Criculum Marine Sciences 2016 HEC Marine-Sciences-Draft

CURRICULUM
OF
MARINE SCIENCE
FOR
BS & MS
(2016)
HIGHER EDUCATION COMMISSION

ISLAMABAD - PAKISTAN
1
CURRICULUM DIVISION, HEC
Prof. Dr. Mukhtar Ahmed Chairman, HEC
Mr. Fida Hussain Director General (Acad.))
Ms. Ghayyur Fatima Director (Curri.))
Mr. Rizwan Shoukat Deputy Director (Curri.))
Mr. Abid Wahab Assistant Director (Curri.))
Mr. Riaz-ul-Haque Assistant Director (Curri.))
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Preface 4
1.2. Minutes of the Final MeetingIntroduction
6
2.3. Rationale 98
3.4. Standardized Template for Four-Year BS 12
11
4.5. Eligibility for Admission 1211
5.6. Layout 1312
6.7. Major Elective Modules 1413
7.8. Scheme of Study for Four-Years BS in Marine Science 1514
8.9. List of Major Elective Modules and Courses thereof 1716
9.10. Detail of Courses for Four-Year BS in Marine Science
2019
10.11. Scheme of Study for Two-Years MS in Marine Science
159128
11.12. Detail of Courses for Two-Year MS in Marine Science
160129
12.13. Recommendations
169139
Annexure A 171
14.
3
Composed by: Mr. Zulfiqar Ali, HEC, Islamabad
PREFACE
The curriculum, with varying definitions, is said to be a plan of the teaching-
learning process that students of an academic programme are required to
undergo. It includes objectives & learning outcomes, course contents, scheme
of studies, teaching methodologies and methods of assessment of learning.
Since knowledge in all disciplines and fields is ]]]]]]expanding at a fast pace and
new disciplines are also emerging; it is imperative that curricula be developed
and revised accordingly.
University Grants Commission (UGC) was designated as the competent

authority to develop, review and revise curricula beyond Class-XII, vide Section
3, Sub-Section 2 (ii), Act of Parliament No. X of 1976 titled “Supervision of
Curricula and Textbooks and Maintenance of Standard of Education”. With the
repeal of UGC Act, the same function was assigned to the Higher Education
Commission (HEC) under its Ordinance of 2002, Section 10, Sub-Section 1 (v).
In compliance with the above provisions, the Curriculum Division of HEC

undertakes the revision of curricula after every three years through respective
National Curriculum Revision Committees (NCRCs),) which consist of eminent
professors and researchers of relevant fields from public and private sector
universities, R&D organizations, councils, industry and civil society by seeking
nominations from their organizations.
In order to impart quality education, which is at par with international standards,

HEC NCRCs have developed unified templates as guidelines for the
development and revision of curricula in the disciplines of Basic Sciences, Applied
Sciences, Social Sciences, Agriculture and Engineering in 2007 &and 2009.
It is hoped that this curriculum document, prepared by the respective NCRC’s,

would serve the purpose of meeting our national, social and economic needs,
and it would also provide the level of competency specified in Pakistan
Qualification Framework to make it compatible with international educational
standards. The curriculum is also placed on the website of HEC
http://hec.gov.pk/english/services/universities/RevisedCurricula/Pages/default.aspx
4
(Fida Hussain)
Director General (Academics)
5
CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, 13 pt
STAGE-I STAGE-II STAGE-III STAGE-IV
CURRI. CURRI. IN FINAL STAGE FOLLOW UP

UNDER DRAFT STAGE STUDY
CONSIDERATI
COLLECTION APPRAISAL OF 1ST PREP. OF QUESTIONNAIRE

DRAFT BY EXP. OF
OF REC. COL./ UNIV. FINAL CURRI.
CONS. OF CRC. FINALIZATION OF INCORPORATION COMMENTS

DRAFT BY CRC OF REC. OF V.C.C.
PREP. OF APPROVAL OF PRINTING OF REVIEW

DRAFT BY CURRI. BY CURRI.
CRC V.C.C.
Abbreviations Used:
IMPLE.OF BACK TO
CRC. Curriculum Revision
CURRI. STAGE-I
Committee
COL. Colleges
EXP. Experts
PREP. Preparation
REC. Recommendations
UNI. Universities ORIENTATION
COURSES
VCC. Vice Chancellor’s
Committee
6
Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, 13 pt
STAGE-I STAGE-II STAGE-III STAGE-IV
CURRI. CURRI. IN FINAL STAGE FOLLOW UP

UNDER DRAFT STAGE STUDY
CONSIDERATI
COLLECTION APPRAISAL OF 1ST PREP. OF QUESTIONNAI

DRAFT BY EXP. OF
OF REC COL./UNIV FINAL CURRI. RE
CONS. OF CRC. FINALIZATION OF INCORPORATION COMMENTS

DRAFT BY CRC OF REC. OF V.C.C.
PREP. OF APPROVAL OF PRINTING OF REVIEW

DRAFT BY CURRI.BY CURRI.
CRC V.C.C.
Abbreviations Used:
IMPLE.OF BACK TO
CRC. Curriculum Revision
CURRI. STAGE-I
Committee
VCC. Vice Chancellor’s
Committee
EXP. Experts
COL. Colleges
UNI. Universities ORIENTATION
COURSES
PREP. Preparation
REC. Recommendations
7
MINUTES OF THE FINAL MEETING:
In continuation to the preliminary meeting of National Curriculum Revision
Committee in the discipline of Marine Science, which was held at Pakistan
Marine Academy, Karachi from February 29 to March 2, 2016, final meeting of
the NCRC was held duringfrom May 30 - -June 01, 2016 at HEC Regional
Centre, Karachi. The objective of the meeting was to finalize the preliminary
draft of BS Marine Science curriculum for circulation by the HEC. The following
attended the meeting:-
1. Prof. Dr. Rashida Qari Convener

Director,
Institute of Marine ScienceSciences,
University of Karachi,
Main University Road, Karachi-75270
2. Prof. Dr. Naureen Aziz Qureshi Member
Vice Chancellor,
Government College Women University,
Faisalabad.
3. Dr. Javed Aftab Member
Senior Research Officer,
(in lieu of Director General, NIO),
National Institute of Oceanography,
Karachi.
4. Dr. Tariq Masood Ali Khan Member
Director,
Institute of Environmental Studies,
Main University Road, Karachi-75270.
5. Prof. Dr. Alia Bano Munshi Member
(in lieu of Director, CEMB) & Professor
Centre of Excellence in Marine Biology (CEMB),
6. Capt. (PN) Mr. Fiaz Hussain TI (M) Member
Captain (PN)/Deputy Chief (Maritime),)
Ministry of Defence,
Maritime Affairs Wing, Islamabad.
7. Chief Engr. Rashid Yahya Usmani Member
Engineering Instructor,
Pakistan Marine Academy,
Hawks Bay Road, Maripur, Karachi.
8
8. Dr. Ehsan Elahi Valeem Deputy Convener
Assistant Professor,
Institute of Marine ScienceSciences,
University Road, Karachi-75270.
9. Dr. Muhammad Aslam Buzdar Member
Dean,
Faculty of Marine Sciences,
Lasbela University of Agriculture, Water & Marine Sciences,
Uthal, Balochistan.
10. Dr. Azra Bano, Member
Uthal, Balochistan.
11. Mr. Muhammad Tahir Khan, Secretary
Lecturer,
Uthal, Balochistan.
12. Mr. Syed Ghulam Qadir Shah, HEC Invitee
National Coordinator,
International Union for Conservation of Nature,
IUCN-Pakistan, 1 Bath Island Road,
Karachi.
13. Mr. Nadeem Mirbahar, Syed Ghulam Qadir Shah,
HEC Invitee
National Resources Management Coordinator,
International Union for Conservation of Nature,
IUCN-Pakistan, 1 Bath Island Road,
Karachi.
The following members of the NCRC eitherwho attended orthe Preliminary
Meeting but could not attend the Preliminary Meeting meeting due to their
official/ personal engagement, however, they sent their representatives in the
said or present meeting as mentioned above:-
1. Prof. Dr. Ghazala Siddiqui
Director, & Professor
Centre of Excellence in Marine Biology (CEMB),
9
2. Dr. Asif InamGhulam Abbas,
Director General,
National Institute of Oceanography (NIO),
Centre of Excellence in Marine Biology,
University of Karachi, Karachi.
3. Capt. Nasim Ahmad Tariq

Nautical Instructor,
4. Mr. A. Najeeb Bhatti
Chief Education Officer,
5. Mr. Tahir jameel,
Chief Engineer,
The meeting started with recitation of Holy Verses from the Holy Quran by Dr.
Ehsan Elahi Valeem, Deputy Convener (NCRC).. Mr. Riaz-ul-Haque, Assistant
Director (Curriculum),) HEC on behalf of the Chairman, the Executive Director,
HEC and Director General (Acad.),.) welcomed the participants and thanked all
the members of the Committee for sparing precious time to participate in the
meeting. He briefed the participants on the aim and objectives of the meeting
with a particular focus on revising the curriculum of BS Marine Science - 2011.
Mr. Sulaiman Ahmed, Director, HEC Regional Centre, Karachi while
inaugurating the proceedings, appreciated the participants for their commitment
to this task of national importance and assured full support from his team of HEC
Regional Centre, Karachi.
The members of the Committee showed confidence on previously selected
Convener, Prof. Dr. Rashida Qari, Director, Institute of Marine
ScienceSciences, University of Karachi, Deputy Convener, Dr. Ehsan Elahi
Valeem, Assistant Proessor, Institute of Marine Science and Secretary, Mr.
Muhammad Tahir Khan, Lecturer, Faculty of Marine Sciences Lasbela
University of Agriculture, Water & Marine Sciences, Uthal. The Convener
thanked the participants for their confidence and started proceedings of the
meeting in accordance with the agenda. The Committee started the revision
process from the finalization of various modules for specialization in Marine
Science programmeprogram. New modules like Integrated Coastal Zone
Management (ICZM), Mangrovology, andMaritime & Port Operations and
ShipHarbour Management were added to provide more job opportunities to the
students studying Marine Science.
10
The Committee reviewed and discussed the preliminary curriculum in detail and
taking into account various aspects/ demand of the discipline and various issues
highlighted by the faculty member and other stakeholders. After detailed
discussion the inputs/ suggestions given by the members of the Committee were
incorporated, where necessary, in the draft curriculum. New books were added
and the contents were updated. After detailed and exhaustive discussion, the
Committee finalized the layout of courses in the light of recommendations of all
the participants and the guidelines provided by the HEC.
The Convener and the Secretary of the NCRC thanked the NCRC members for
their inputs and worth mentioned Deputy Convener Dr. Ehsan Elahi Valeem for
his contribution in finalizing the draft curriculum keeping in view the requirement
of the country and to make it more practical, competitive and effective. The
Committee highly appreciated the efforts vested by Mr. Sulaiman Ahmed,
Director, HEC Regional Centre, Karachi and his staff for providing local
hospitality and comfortable stay during three days meeting and Mr. Riaz-ul-
Haque for his coordination.
Mr. Riaz-ul-Haque, Assistant Director (Curriculum) thanked the Convener, the

Deputy Convener, the Secretary and all the members of the committee for
sparing precious time and for their quality contribution towards accomplishment
of revision process of the curriculum in Marine Science through NCRC.
The meeting ended with the vote of thanks to and from the chair as well as the
participants of the meeting.
Rationale of BS in Marine Science:

Placed in the north-western part of Indian Subcontinent, Pakistan borders the
Arabian Sea with a sizeable coastline running for approximately 990 km in the
east-west direction. Nearly 320 km of this seashore falls in the province of Sindh
whereas the rest of 670 km constitute the Makran coast. The Exclusive
Economic Zone, that stretches 350 nautical miles seaward from the coast,
provides 290,000 km2 area of the Arabian Sea for exploitation of the renewable
and non-renewable resources, on which coastal population of the Sindh and
Balochistan provinces largely depends for their livelihood. Besides, a huge
volume of raw materials, finished products and oil imported through the maritime
trade as well as the exports of Pakistani products provides employment
opportunities to thousands of families in both the provinces.
Marine scientists work on the sustainable use, development and conservation
of marine and coastal environment. Growing world population emphasizes the
ability of our society to produce food, energy and water from oceans to help
sustain our basic needs. Advances in technology, will improve our ability to
derive food, drinking water and energy sources from the oceans and use the
same for waste disposal, and transportation. It will be up to us and our future
generations to build upon our existing knowledge of oceans and their potential
to help meet needs of the world and its inhabitants. Because of the growing
11
concerns for the protection and prudent use of our natural resources, there is
an increasing need for skilled personnel who can advise on, organize and
control the development of marine resources and activities.
In view of the importance of Arabian Sea with respect to fishing, use of
mangrove forest, its potential for offshore hydrocarbon exploration and import/
export of goods through the ports of Karachi and Gawadar, makes it highly
desirable that a fully devoted degree programme is launched in Marine Science
in order to cater the need of appropriately trained and skilled manpower in this
field. BS Marine Science is a branch of Earth Science that studies almost
everything related with oceans, seas, their coasts and seabed. It covers a wide
range of topics including ocean currents, waves and tides; marine organisms
and ecosystem dynamics; geophysical fluid dynamics; plate tectonics and
geology of the sea floor including their minerals and hydrocarbon potential; and
fluxes of various chemical substances and physical properties within the ocean
and across its boundaries. These diverse topics relate to a multitude of
disciplines like chemistry, physics, biology, geology, meteorology and
geography that oceanographers blend together to comprehend knowledge of
the world oceans and processes within it. Marine science is a contemporary field
of education having emerged as a hybrid of traditional fields such as biology,
chemistry and geology forming biogeochemistry.
The BS Marine Science programme will enrol such students who have
completed 12 years of studies with traditional science courses as biology,
chemistry, physics, and mathematics. It integrates science curricula so as to
provide a thorough understanding of the related earth and life science education
in the realm of oceans. The curriculum is designed to provide standard marine
science education in Pakistan that can be divided into following branches and
electives in each module:
 Biological Oceanography and Conservation: Biological Oceanography
or Marine Biology is the study of plants, animals and microbes of the
ocean and their ecological interaction with the habitat and Conservation
Biology is the scientific study of nature and of Earth's biodiversity with the
aim of protecting species, their habitats, and ecosystems from excessive
rates of extinction and the erosion of biotic interactions.
 Chemical and Environmental Oceanography: Chemical Oceanography
or Marine Chemistry is the study of ocean chemistry, the behaviour of the
chemical elements within the Earth's oceans. The ocean is unique in that
it contains - in greater or lesser quantities - nearly every element in the
periodic table, which interacts with the atmosphere. Environmental
Oceanography or Environmental Science is the study of the interactions
among the physical, chemical and biological components of the
environment; with a focus on pollution and degradation of the environment
related to human activities; and the impact on biodiversity and
sustainability from local and global development.
 Fisheries and Aquaculture: Fisheries may involve the capture of wild fish
12
or raising fish through fish farming or aquaculture. It provides science-
based conservation and management for sustainable fisheries and
aquaculture, marine mammals, endangered species, and their habitats.
Aquaculture, also known as aqua-farming, is the farming of aquatic
organisms such as fish, crustaceans, molluscs and aquatic marine
organisms. Aquaculture involves cultivating freshwater and saltwater
populations under controlled conditions, and can be contrasted with
commercial fishing, which is the harvesting of wild fish.
 Geological Oceanography: Geological Oceanography or Marine
Geology studies the structure and morphology of the ocean floor, tectonic
activity and volcanism associated with plate margins, continental margins,
beaches and coastal areas, sediment transport and deposition regimes,
and offshore mineral and hydrocarbon deposits etc.
 Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM): Integrated Coastal Zone
Management (ICZM) or Integrated Coastal Management (ICM) is a
process for the management of the coast using an integrated approach,
regarding all aspects of the coastal zone, including geographical and
political boundaries, in an attempt to achieve sustainability.
 Mangrovology: Mangrovology is the study of mangroves including flora
and fauna inhabiting the Mangrove roots (Pneumatophores) as epiphytes,
endophytes, epifauna and endofauna respectively. Mangrove habitats
provide nursery grounds for a variety of juvenile organisms. Several
economic activities are also associated with Mangroves environment,
which are not only untapped but also unexplored. There is a need to plant
Mangrove saplings on the wetlands to help them grow and foster other
marine creatures. Mangrove Forests can also be developed into a
precious ecotourism sights.
 Physical Oceanography: Physical Oceanography or Marine Physics
studies the physical attributes of the oceans including temperature-
salinity structure, mixing, waves, tides and currents, light and sound
transmission etc.
 Port Operations and Ship Management: Maritime transport is the
shipment of goods (cargo) and people by sea and other waterways. Port
operations are a necessary tool to enable maritime trade between trading
partners. To ensure smooth port operations and to avoid congestion in
the harbour it is inevitable to permanently upgrade the port’s physical
infrastructure, invest in human capital, fostering connectivity of the port
and upgrade the port operations to prevailing standards. Hence, port
operations can be defined as all policies, reforms and regulations that
influence the infrastructure and operations of port facilities including
shipping services.
The programme of BS in Marine Science is aimed at preparing graduates for a

range of interesting careers and opportunities. A marine scientist can be
13
employed in federal, state and local government agencies to manage and
monitor the use of resources, solve problems and conduct research better than
anybody else. They can be employed by private industries such as seafood,
fisheries, aquaculture, exploratory marine geology, satellite imagery, and
ecological modelling, including environmental agencies and numerous non-
government organizations.
14
STANDARDIZED TEMPLATE FOR FOUR-YEAR
No. of Credit Hours

S. Percentage
Category Courses (Crh)
No. (%) of Crh
Min - Max Min - Max
1. Compulsory Courses 9-9 25 - 25 18.4 Formatted Table
General Courses to be
2. chosen from other 7-8 21 - 24 17.6
departments
3. Interdisciplinary Courses 6-8 18 - 24 17.6
Module Specific Foundation
4. 10 - 11 30 - 33 24.3
Courses
5. Major Elective Courses 8 - 10 24 - 30 22.1
5a. Research Project* 1-1 3-3 2.2
5b. Thesis/ Internship* 2-2 6-6 4.4
Total 40 - 46 118 - 136 100
*Optional in lieu of major elective course/ courses.
BS IN MARINE SCIENCE
 Total numbers of Courses 46 Courses Formatted Table
Total numbers of credit hours

 136
(Crh)
 Duration 4 years
 Semester duration 16-18 weeks
 Semesters 8
 Course load per semester 15-18 Cr h
 Number of courses per semester 4-6 courses
ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION IN

FOUR-YEAR BS PROGRAMME
Intermediate Science (or equivalent) with minimum 2 nd division from the
following groups as per preference of order given below:
1. Pre-Medical Group
2. Pre-Engineering Group
3. Other Groups (studied at least two subjects from Chemistry, Physics and
Mathematics)
15
Formatted: Font: 16 pt
LAYOUT
General Courses
Compulsory Module Specific
from Other
Courses Foundation Courses
Departments
9 courses 7-8 courses 10-11 courses
25 Credit hours (Crh) 21-24 Credit hours 30-33 Credit hours
Subject Crh Subject Crh Subject Crh
Citizenship
Education and
Computer
Community 3 3 Hydrography 3
Applications
Engagement/
Optional*
Fundamental of Introduction to 3
English I 3 3
Economics Aquaculture
Introduction to
English II 3 General Biology 3 3
Marine Science
General
English III/ Urdu 3 3 Marine Biology 3
Chemistry
Information General
3 3 Marine Chemistry 3
Technology Geology
Islamic Studies/ Marine Ecology
2 General Physics 3 3
Ethics and Ecosystem
Introduction to
Pakistan Studies 2 3 Marine Geology 3
Sociology
Marine Marine
Mathematics 3 3 3
Biotechnology Geophysics
Introduction to
3 Marine Resources 3
Statistics
Oceanographic
Instruments and 3
Methods
Physical 3
Oceanography
Research
3
Methodology
25 24 33
* University may opt any other subject.
16
Major Elective Modules* including
Research Project/ Internship
S.
Major Elective Modules Crh
No.
1. Biological Oceanography and Conservation (BOC) 30
2. Chemical and Environmental Oceanography (CEO) 30
3. Fisheries and Aquaculture (FA) 30
4. Geological Oceanography (GO) 30
5. Mangrovology (ManglMang) 30
6. Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM) 30
7. Physical Oceanography (PO) 30
8. Port Operations and Ship Management (POSM) 30
Option for Substitution
1. Field Project** 3
2. Thesis/ Internship*** 6
In the final year of BS only one module (of 10 courses) is to be
*
chosen.
Field Project may substitute one course (3 Crh) of a major elective
**
module.
Thesis/ Internship may substitute two courses (6 Crh) of a major
*** elective module within two semesters i.e. one subject each from 7th
and 8th semester.
17
SCHEME OF STUDY FOR FOUR-YEARS
BS IN MARINE SCIENCE
Semester/ Year Name of Subject Crh Formatted Table
First Semester/ First Year

Citizenship Education and Community
CE - 301 3
Engagement
Eng - 301 English-I 3
Biol - 301 General Biology 2+1 = 3
Chem - 301 General Chemistry 2+1 = 3
Maths - 301 Mathematics 3
MS - 301 Introduction to Marine Science 3
18
Second Semester/ First Year
Eng - 302 English-II 3
IslSt- - 302/ Eth- -
Islamic Studies/ Ethics 2
302
Geol - 302 General Geology 2+1 = 3
Phys - 302 General Physics 2+1 = 3
Stats - 302 Introduction to Statistics 2+1 = 3
MS - 302 Marine Ecology and Ecosystems 2+1 = 3
17
Third Semester/ Second Year
Eng- - 401/ Ur- -
English-III/ Urdu 3
401
Biostats - 401 Biostatistics 3
Comp - 401 Computer Applications 2+1 = 3
Sociol - 401 Introduction to Sociology 3
MS - 401 Marine Biochemistry Biotechnology 2+1 = 3
MS - 403402 Marine BiotechnologyResources 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Font color: Auto
18
Fourth Semester/ Second Year
IT - 402 Information Technology 3
PkSt - 402 Pakistan Studies 2
Econ - 402 Fundamental of Economics 3
MS - 402403 Marine Microbiology Biochemistry 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Font color: Black
MS - 404 Marine ResourcesMicrobiology 2+1 = 3
18
MS - 406405 Oceanographic Instruments and Methods 2+1 = 3
17
Fifth Semester/ Third Year
MS - 501 Application of Remote Sensing and GIS 3
MS - 503 Hydrography 2+1 = 3
MS - 505 Marine Biodiversity 2+1 = 3
MS - 507 Coastal Processes 2+1 = 3
MS - 509 Marine Chemistry 2+1 = 3
MS - 511 Marine Geology 2+1 = 3
18
Sixth Semester/ Third Year
MS - 502 Climatology and Climate Change 3 Formatted Table
MS - 503 Hydrography 3
MS - 504 Introduction to Aquaculture 3 Formatted Table
MS - 505 Marine Biodiversity 2+1 = 3

MS - 506 Physical Oceanography 2+1 = 3 Formatted Table
18
Sixth Semester/ Third Year
MS - 507 Coastal Processes 2+1 = 3
MS - 508 Marine Biology 2+1 = 3 Formatted Table
MS - 509 Marine Chemistry 2+1 = 3

MS - 510 Marine Geochemistry 2+1 = 3 Formatted Table
MS - 511 Marine Geology 2+1 = 3

MS - 512 Research Methodology 3 Formatted Table
18
Seventh Semester/ Fourth Year
MS-Odd No. Elective I 2+1 = 3
MS-Odd No. Elective II 2+1 = 3
MS-Odd No. Elective III 2+1 = 3
MS-Odd No. Elective IV 2+1 = 3
MS-Odd No. Elective V 2+1 = 3
15
Eighth Semester/ Fourth Year
MS-Even No. Elective-VI 2+1 = 3
MS-Even No. Elective-VII 2+1 = 3
MS-Even No. Elective-VIII 2+1 = 3
MS-Even No. Elective-IX 2+1 = 3
19
MS-Even No. Elective-X 2+1 = 3
15
Optional for 7th and 8th Semester/ Fourth Year Formatted: Left
Field Project 3
Thesis/ Internship 6
20
LIST OF MAJOR ELECTIVE MODULES AND COURSES THEREOF
Students are required to select one module consisting of 10 courses from eight
modules given below in 7th and 8th semester. One course (3 Crh) may be
substituted by a Field Project or two courses (3 + 3 = 6 Crh) i.e. one from each
semester of an elective module by a thesis/ Internship as the case may be. One or
two courses of a module may also be substituted by the courses of other module.
*Some courses can be taught in more than one module*..
Course No. Elective Module/ Course Crh Formatted Table
Module I Biological Oceanography and Conservation (BOC) Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt

Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-BOC - 601 Aquatic Pathology and Pests 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 602 Biophysics 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 603 Cell and Evolutionary Biology 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 604 Chemistry of Life 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 605 Conservation Ecology 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 606 Faunistic Studies 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 607 Harmful Marine Creatures 3
MS-BOC - 608 Immunology 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 609 Invertebrate Biology 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 610 Physiology of Marine Organisms 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 611 Planktology 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 612 Marine Animal Behaviour 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 613 Marine Botany 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 614 Saline Agriculture 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 615 Seafood Handling, Processing and Safety* 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 616 Skin and SCUBA Diving Science 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 617 Systematic Studies of Marine Organisms 2+1 = 3
MS-BOC - 618 Vertebrate Biology 2+1 = 3
Module II Chemical and Environmental Oceanography (CEO) Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
MS-CEO - 601 Bioremediation 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 602 Environmental Impact Assessment 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 603 Marine and Estuarine Chemistry 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 604 Marine Biogeochemistry 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 605 Marine Environmental Ecotoxicology 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 606 Marine Meteorology 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 607 Marine Natural Product Chemistry 2+1 = 3
MS-CEO - 608 Marine Pollution and Control 2+1 = 3
21
MS-CEO - 609 Natural Hazards and Management 2+1 = 3 Formatted Table
MS-CEO - 610 Physical Chemistry 2+1 = 3

MS-CEO - 611 Water Quality Management 2+1 = 3
Module III Fisheries and Aquaculture (FA)
MS-FA - 601 Advanced Aquaculture 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 602 Aquaculture Environment Management 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 603 Aquaculture Health Management 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 604 Aquaculture Nutrition 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 605 Fisheries Economics and Marketing 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 606 Fisheries Resources and Management 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 607 Fisheries Techniques and Methods 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 608 Fish Population Dynamics 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 609 Hatchery Operation and Management 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 610 Ichthyology 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 611 Marine Fisheries 2+1 = 3
MS-FA - 612 Seafood Handling, Processing and Safety* 2+1 = 3
Module IV Geological Oceanography (GO) Formatted: Centered
MS-GO - 601 Coastal and Marine Sedimentology 2+1 = 3

MS-GO - 602 Geology of Arabian Sea 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 603 Hydrogeology 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 604 Marine Geophysics and Exploration 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 605 Marine Non-living Resources 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 606 Ocean Basin Evolution 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 607 Paleo-Oceanography 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 608 Petroleum Geology 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 609 Plate Tectonics and Coastal Structures 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 610 Quaternary Geology 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 611 Sea Level Changes and Coastal Zones 2+1 = 3
MS-GO - 612 Seismic Studies 2+1 = 3
Module V Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM) Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
MS-ICZM - 601 Basic Principles and Scope of ICZM 2+1 = 3

MS-ICZM - 602 Coastal Ecosystem and Climate Change 2+1 = 3
MS-ICZM - 603 Coastal Resilience and Disaster Risk Reduction 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
MS-ICZM - 604 Coastal Tourism Management 2+1 = 3

MS-ICZM - 605 Coastal Zone Management 2+1 = 3
MS-ICZM - 606 Marine Protected Areas Management 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
MS-ICZM - 607 Marine Spatial Planning &and Conflict Management 2+1 = 3
Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
MS-ICZM - 608 National Policies and International Conventions 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
MS-ICZM - 609 Social Empowerment and Gender Equality 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Font color: Auto, Condensed by 0.2 pt
22
MS-ICZM - 610 Socio-Ecological Fundamentals of Coastal Zones 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
MS-ICZM - 611 The ICM Cycle 2+1 = 3
Module VI Mangrovology (Mangl.) Formatted Table
MS-Mangl - 601 Benthic Ecology of Mangroves 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 602 Biodiversity of Mangroves 2+1 = 3
MS-Mangl - 603 Coastal Land Reclamation 2+1 = 3
MS-Mangl - 604 Conservation of Mangrove Resources 2+1 = 3
MS-Mangl - 605 Ecological Mangrove Rehabilitation (EMR) 2+1 = 3
MS-Mangl - 606 Economic Exploitation of Mangroves and Marketing 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-Mangl - 607 Estuarine Studies 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 608 Human Impact and Threats to Mangrove Ecosystem 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
MS-Mangl - 609 Mangroves and Climat Change 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-Mangl - 610 Mangrove Coastal Forest Management 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 611 Mangrove Ecotourism 2+1 = 3
MS-Mangl - 612 Morphology, Physiology &and Anatomy of Mangroves 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Condensed by 0.4 pt
MS-Mangl - 613 Productivity of Mangrove Wetlands 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"

MS-Mangl - 614 Seabirds of Coastal Area 2+1 = 3
Module VII Physical Oceanography (PO)
MS-PO - 601 Air-Sea Interaction 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 602 Boating and Seamanship 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 603 Climate Change 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 604 Marine Acoustics 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 605 Natural Hazards and the Oceans 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 606 Ocean Circulation and Climate 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 607 Ocean Dynamics 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 608 Ocean Modelling and Numerical Methods 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 609 Ocean Waves, Tides and Currents 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 610 Physical Meteorology 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 611 Satellite Oceanography 2+1 = 3
MS-PO - 612 Sea Level Changes and Coastal Zone 2+1 = 3
Module VIII Port Operations and Ship Management (POSM) Formatted: Condensed by 0.5 pt
MS-POSM - 601 Business Research Methodology 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-POSM - 602 Fundamentals of Maritime, Economics &and 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-POSM - 603 Marketing

Human Resource Management 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 604 International Conventions and Maritime Laws 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 605 Marine and Maritime Employment 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 606 Maritime Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"
MS-POSM - 607 Maritime Safety and Security 2+1 = 3

MS-POSM - 608 Maritime Technologies 3
MS-POSM - 609 Piloting and Navigation 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 610 Port Development, Operations and Management 2+1 = 3
23
MS-POSM - 611 Ship Brokerage, Chartering and E-commerce 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 612 Shipping and Environment Norms 2+1 = 3
MS-POSM - 613 Shipping Operations and Management 2+1 = 3
DETAIL OF COURSES FOR

FOUR-YEAR BS IN MARINE SCIENCE
FIRST SEMESTER
First Semester
CITIZENSHIP EDUCATION AND Formatted Table
CE-301 2+1=3 Crh
COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT
Objectives:
To understand the principles, ethics and core attitudes related to

community participation. To develop an understanding of the complexity
of community and to see the interconnectedness of local and global
communities. To develop and improve skills for effective community
engagement including but not limited to Reflection, Observation, Effective
and purposeful communication, Team work, Conflict resolution,
Organizational skills and Collaborative planning.
Course Outline:
This course explores the politics, processes and functioning of
communities and provides foundational knowledge and skills for effective
and principled community engagement. Regardless of your degree, you
will be a member of many communities- your workplace, your professional
group, your neighbourhood, your city, your country, the world. In the
future, whether as a scientist, engineer, business professional, humanist,
social scientist or health/ /social services provider, you will be called upon
to participate in community activities and community change. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
_LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
2_, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Lab. Work:
Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
This course is an interdisciplinary course where students are encouraged 3_, Font: 8 pt, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
to be active participants. It will include mini-lectures, conversations, Formatted: Left, Pattern: Clear
exercises and simulations. There should be at least one field trip. The Formatted: Pattern: Clear
course will be co-taught in order to students at least two disciplinary
perspectives and will involve guest speakers from campus or community.
Formatted: Font: 10 pt, Bold
Recommended Books:
1. Arthur, J., 2003. Education with character. Routledge.
24
2. Gulson, K.N. and Symes, C., 2007. Spatial theories of education: Policy and
geography matters. Routledge.
1.3. Torney-Purta, J., Lehmann, R., Oswald, H. and Schulz, W., 2001.
Citizenship and education in twenty-eight countries: Civic knowledge and
engagement at age fourteen. IEA Secretariat, Herengracht 487, 1017 BT,
Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
25
Eng - 301 ENGLISH-I 3 Crh
(Functional English)
2. Arthur, J., 2003. Education with character. Routledge.
3. Gulson, K.N. and Symes, C., 2007. Spatial theories of education: Policy and
geography matters. Routledge.
26
English I (Functional English)
Objectives: Enhance language skills and develop critical thinking.

Course Contents:
Basics of Grammar.
Parts of speech and use of articles.
Sentence structure, active and passive voices. voice
Practice in unified sentence.
Analysis of phrase, clause and sentence structure.
Transitive and intransitive verbs.
Punctuation and spelling.
Comprehension;
Answers to questions on a given text
Discussion:
General topics and every-day conversation (topics for discussion to be at the
discretion of the teacher keeping in view the level of students). Listening: To be
improved by showing documentaries/ films carefully selected by subject
teachers. Translation skills: Urdu to English. Paragraph writing: Topics to be
chosen at the discretion of the teacher. Presentation skills: Introduction. )
Listening
To be improved by showing documentaries/films carefully selected by
subject teachers
Translation skills
Urdu to English
Paragraph writing
Topics to be chosen at the discretion of the teacher
Presentation skills
Introduction
Note: Extensive reading is required for vocabulary building
Lab. Work:
Not Applicable.
Recommended Books:
1. Boutin, M-C., Brinand, S. and Grellet, F., 1993. Writing. Intermediate Oxford
Supplementary Skills. Fourth Impression, Pages 20-27 and 35-41, ISBN
0194354057
Thomson, A.J. and Martinet, A.V., 1997. 1. Functional English
27
a) Grammar
1. Practical English Grammar by A. J. Thomson and A. V. Martinet.
Exercises 2.1. Third edition,. Oxford University Press. 1997. ISBN Formatted: Font: Not Italic
0194313492
2. 2. Practical English Grammar by A. J. Thomson and A. V. Martinet.
Exercises 2. Third edition. Oxford University Press. 1997. ISBN
0194313506.
Tomlinson, B. and Ellis, R., 1992. b) Writing
1. Writing. Intermediate by Marie-Christine Boutin, Suzanne Brinand
and Francoise Grellet. Oxford Supplementary Skills. Fourth
Impression 1993. ISBN 0 19 435405 7 Pages 20-27 and 35-41.
28
c) Reading/Comprehension
3. 1. Reading. Upper Intermediate. Brain Tomlinson and Rod Ellis. Oxford
Supplementary Skills. Third Impression, 1992. ISBN 019 4534022.0 19
453402 2.
29
d) Speaking
Biol-301 GENERAL BIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The course provides wide range coverage to principles of life. Particular

emphasis is on chemical basis of life and polymerization in carbohydrates,
lipids, proteins and nucleic acids. The course will impart knowledge about
enzymes and phenomenon of hereditary transformation in living
organisms.
Course Outline:
Origin of life: Definition and concept of life, chemical basis of life, chemical
evolution, origin of metabolism, protobionts, prokaryotic and eukaryotic
cells; Functional diversity: Structure and the basis of function, chemical
diversity, functional groups; Molecules of life: Polymerization,
carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, phospholipids in membrane systems,
polypeptides in protein diversity, enzymes as molecular tools in chemical
transformations. Nucleic acids, the molecule of genetic information and
replication; Cell biology: Overview of structure and function of cell
organelles. Cell division. Genetics, Evolution and Ecology.
Lab. Work:
Identification of the chemical nature of different animal and plant

materials. Phytography and zoography. Cytochemical demonstration of
DNA and RNA in Avian blood and Protozoa. Biochemical tests for
carbohydrates and proteins, lipids. Plasmolysis and deplasmolysis in
blood cells. Protein digestion by enzyme pepsin. Gram staining of bacteria
and study of fungus. Study of mitosis in onion root tip. Study of meiosis
in Grasshopper testis as per list of practical enclosed (Annexure A).
Recommended Books:
1. Campbell, N.A., 2008. Biology. 8th Ed., The Benjamin/ Cummings

Publishing Company Inc. New York. USA,
2. Shier, D., Bulter, J. and Lewis, R., 2007. Holes’s Human Anatomy and
Physiology. McGraw- Hill International Edition. USA.
3.2. Crossley, M. and Whitelaw, E., 1996. Molecular Biology through
Questions, Self Assessment and Review. McGraw-Hill Book Company
Pvt. Ltd., Australia.
4.3. Lewis, B., Cassimeris, L., Lingappa, V. R. and Plopper, G., 2007.
Cells. Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Canada.
4. Shier, D., Bulter, J. and Lewis, R., 2007. Holes’s Human Anatomy and
30
Physiology. McGraw- Hill International Edition. USA.
5. Starr, C., 2003. Biology: a Human Emphasis. 5th Ed., Wadsworth Group,
USA.
31
Chem-301 GENERAL CHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The main objective of this course is to provide a basic knowledge and

understanding of chemistry and principles of chemical reactions. The
course not only provides excellent practice in basic chemistry, but also
allows the rigorous development of experimental schemes and analysis
methods, relying on physical chemistry and analytical reasoning.
Course Outline:
Chemical Bonding, Periodic tables. Ionic, covalent, coordinate covalent

bond. Radioactivity and its environmental hazards. General chemistry of
functional groups of organic compounds (alcohols, carbonyls, esters,
carboxylic acids, amines). Aromatic compounds, ions, radicals.
Photochemical reactions. Solution chemistry. Surface chemistry. Colloids
chemistry. Thermodynamics and chemical kinetics.
Lab. Work:
Preparation of molar, molal, normal solutions/buffers. Osmosis and

Dialysis. Paper Chromatography (one and two dimensional), thin layer
chromatography, Column chromatography. Measurement of pH, EC and
TDS. Use of titrimetric and gravimetric analysis. Use of
spectrophotometric techniques.
Recommended Books:
1. Principles of Environmental Chemistry, Girard, J.E., 1st Ed. Jones and

Barlett, USA, 2005.
2.1. An Introduction to Environmental Chemistry, Andrews, J.E.,
Brimblecombe, P., Jickells, T.D., Liss, P.S. and Reid, B.J., 2004. An
Introduction to Environmental Chemistry. 2nd Edition. Blackwell
Science, UK, 2004.
2. Freeman, W.H., 2003. Qualitative Chemical Analysis, Harris, D.C., 6 th
Edition. and Company, USA.
3. Girard, J.E., 2005. PrinciplesFundamentals of EnvironmentalAnalytical
Chemistry, 1st Ed. Jones and Barlett, USA.
4. Hill, M. K., 2004. Understanding Environmental Pollution, 2 nd Edition.
Cambridge University Press, UK.
3.5. Skoog, D.A., West, D.M. and Holler, F.J., 2004. Fundamentals of
Analytical Chemistry. 8th Edition. Thomson and Brooks, Canada, 2004.
4. Understanding Environmental Pollution, Hill, M. K., 2nd Edition.

Cambridge University Press, UK, 2004.
32
5. Qualitative Chemical Analysis, Harris, D.C., 6th Edition. W.H. Freeman
and Company, USA, 2003.
33
Maths-301 MATHEMATICS 3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To prepare the students, not majoring in mathematics, with the essential

tools of algebra, calculus, trigonometry and geometry to apply the
concepts and the techniques in their respective disciplines.
Course Outline:
Preliminaries, Matrices, Quadratic Equations, Sequences and Series,

Binomial Theorem, Trigonometry, Limits and Continuity, Derivatives and
their Applications, Integration and Definite Integrals, Geometry in Two
Dimensions, Circle and Conic Sections.
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Abraham, S., 1969. Analytic Geometry, Scott, Freshman and Company.

Kaufmann, J.E., 1987. College Algebra and Trigonometry, PWS-Kent
Company, Boston.
2. Anton, H., Bevens, I., Davis, S., 2005. Calculus: A New Horizon (8th
Edition), John Wiley, New York.
1.3. Dolciani, M.P., MP, Wooton, W.,, Beckenback, E.F., EF, Sharron S,
1978. Algebra 2 and Trigonometry, 1978, Houghton & Mifflin.
2.4. Kaufmann, J.E., 1987. College Algebra and Trigonometry, Boston
(suggested text).), Kaufmann JE, College Algebra and Trigonometry,
1987, PWS-Kent Company, Boston.
5. Stewart, J., 1995. Calculus (3rd Edition), Brooks/Cole (suggested text).
Swokowski, E.W., 1983. Calculus and Analytic Geometry, PWS-Kent
Company, Boston.
3.6. Swokowski, E.W., 1986.Swokowski EW, Fundamentals of Algebra
and Trigonometry (6th Edition), 1986, PWS-Kent Company, Boston.
4. Anton H, Bevens I, Davis S, Calculus: A New Horizon (8th Edition), 2005,
John Wiley, New York.
5. Stewart J, Calculus (3rd Edition), 1995, Brooks/Cole (suggested text).
Swokowski EW, Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 1983, PWS-Kent
Company, Boston.
6.7. Thomas, G.B., GB, Finney, A.R., 2005. AR, Calculus (11th Edition),
2005, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Ma, USA.
34
35
7. Abraham S, Analytic Geometry, Scott, Freshman and Company, 1969.
Kaufmann JE, College Algebra and Trigonometry, 1987, PWS-Kent
Company, Boston.
8. Swokowski EW, Fundamentals of Algebra and Trigonometry (6 th
Edition), 1986, PWS-Kent Company, Boston.
INTRODUCTION TO Formatted Table

MS-301 3 Crh
MARINE SCIENCE
Objectives:
To understand basics of Marine Science, its biological, geological,

chemical and physical characteristics and interrelationship.
Course Outline:
A history of Marine Science, basic structure of the earth, plate tectonics

and ocean basins, Basics of Ocean Chemistry, Basics of Ocean Physics,
Climate System, Waves, Tides and Ocean currents, Life in the Oceans,
Marine Ecology, Plankton, benthos, Nekton, Food chains and food webs.
Oceanic Resources, Marine Pollution, Maritime Activities.
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, Compendium on UN Law ofOceanography, An

introduction to the Sea.
1.2. Anonymous, Guidelines for Offshore Marine
OperationsEnvironment by Peter K. Weyl. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
2.3. Gross, G., Oceanography: A view of the Earth. by Grant Gross. 2_, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
3. Pinet, P.R., 1992. Compendium on UN Law of the Sea.
4. Oceanography, An Introduction to the Planet Oceanus. 1992 by Paul R.
Pinet.
5. The Ocean by Severdrup, Johnson and, Fleming, The Ocean.
6. Tom, S., Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science, 9th Edition,
Tom S. Garrison Orange Coast College, ISBN-10: 1305105168| ISBN-13:
9781305105164, 640 ppp.
7. Weyl, P.K., Oceanography, An introduction to the Marine Environment.
36
7. Guidelines for Offshore Marine Operations.
Second Semester
Eng - 302 ENGLISH-II 3 Crh
(Communication Skills)
English II (Communication Skills)

Objectives: Enable the students to meet their real life communication needs.
Course Contents:
Paragraph writing. Practice in writing a good, unified and coherent paragraph. Formatted: Font: Bold
Essay writing Introduction. CV and job application Translation skills Urdu to Formatted: Justified, Indent: First line: 0"
English. Study skills. Skimming and scanning, intensive and extensive, and
speed reading, summary and precis writing and comprehension. Academic
skills. Letter/ memo writing, minutes of meetings, use of library and internet
Presentation skills. Personality development (emphasis on content, style and
pronunciation). Note: documentaries to be shown for discussion and review. Formatted: Font: Bold
Practice in writing a good, unified and coherent paragraph

Essay writing
Introduction
CV and job application
Translation skills
Urdu to English
Study skills
Skimming and scanning, intensive and extensive, and speed reading,
summary and précis writing and comprehension
Academic skills
Letter/memo writing, minutes of meetings, use of library and internet
Presentation skills
Personality development (emphasis on content, style and pronunciation)
Note: documentaries to be shown for discussion and review
Recommended Books:
Anonymous, 1992. Communication Skills
a) Grammar
1. Practical English Grammar by A. J. Thomson and A. V. Martinet.
Exercises 2. Third edition. Oxford University Press 1986. ISBN 0
19 431350 6.
37
b) Writing
1. Writing. Intermediate by Marie-Christine Boutin, Suzanne Brinand
and Francoise Grellet. Oxford Supplementary Skills. Fourth
Impression 1993. ISBN 019 435405 7 Pages 45-53 (note taking).
2.1. Writing. Upper-Intermediate by Rob Nolasco. Oxford Supplementary
Skills. Fourth Impression 1992. ISBN 01943540650 19 435406 5 (particularly
good for writing memos, introduction to presentations, descriptive and
argumentative writing).
Boutin, M-C., Brinand, S. and Grellet, F., 1993. Writing. Intermediate
c) Reading
2. 1. Reading. Advanced. Brian Tomlinson and Rod Ellis. Oxford
Supplementary Skills. FourthThird Impression, 1991. ISBN 0194354057,
Pages 45-53 (note taking).0 19 453403 0.
3. Langan, J., 2. Reading and Study Skills.
4. Thomson, A.J. and Martinet, A.V. 1986. Practical English Grammar by
Exercises 2. Third edition. Oxford University Press, ISBN 0194313506.John
Langan
5. Tomlinson, B. and Ellis, R., 1991. Reading. Advanced. Oxford
Supplementary Skills. Third Impression, ISBN 0194534030.
3.6. Yorky, R., Study Skills. by Richard York.
IslSt - 302
ISLAMIC STUDIES] 2 Crh
(Compulsory)
ISLAMIC STUDIES
(Compulsory)
Objectives: Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
This course is aimed at:

1 To provide Basic information about Islamic Studies
2 To enhance understanding of the students regarding Islamic Civilization.
3 To improve Student’sStudents skill to perform prayers and other worships
and
38
4 To enhance the skill of the students for understanding regardingof issues
related to faith and religionreligious life.
Course Outline:
Basic Problems of Human Life and their Solutions. Need of Religion and its role
in Human Life Islam and other religions. Islam Its concept and meanings, Deen
and Muzhab. Islamic concepts of Universe and Humanity, Place of Humanity in
Islam, Man as Vicegerent of Allah, Chief Characteristics of Islamic Ideology.
Fundamental Beliefs and Practices of Islam (a) Tauheed (Unity of Allah), Risalat
(Finality of the Prophethood), Akhirat (Day of Judgement). (b) Salat, Soum, Zakat,
Hajj, Jehad. Islamic Way of Life (a) Sources of Shariah: The Qu’ran, Sunnah, Ijma
(Consensus), Qiyas and Ijtihad (reasoning); (b) Social system in Islam:
Responsibilities and mutual relationship of members of family, separate role of
man and woman in an Islamic Social set up, concept of Woman’s freedom in
Islam, Responsibilities of man and woman in character-building of new
generation; (c) Morality in Islam: Concept of morality, Relationship of morality and
Faith, Islamic principles and methods of character-building, Moral values in Islam;
(d) Islamic Political System: (i) Legislative System (ii) Judicial System; (e) Muslim
Ummah: Role and objectives of Muslim Ummah. Introduction to Quranic Studies.
Quranic Ayat and their Translation. Following last 10 surrah of the Holy Quran
with their translations: Surrahs 1. Al-Feel 2. Al-Quresh 3. Al-Maoon 4. Al-Kausar
5. Al-Kafiroon 6. An-Nasr 7. Al-Lahab 8. Al- Akhlas 9. Al-Falak 10. An-Nas. Seerat
of Holy Prophet (S.A.W.A.W.). Selected study from text of Hadith. Islamic
Economic System. Islamic History.
Detail of Courses:
Introduction to Quranic Studies
1) Basic Concepts of Quran
2) History of Quran
3) Uloom-ul-Quran
Study of Selected Text of Holly Quran
1) Verses of Surah Al-Baqara Related to Faith (Verse No-284-286)
2) Verses of Surah Al-Hujrat Related to Adab Al-Nabi
(Verse No-1-18)
3) Verses of Surah Al-Mumanoon Related to Characteristics of faithful
(Verse No-1-11)
4) Verses of Surah al-Furqan Related to Social Ethics (Verse No.63-77)
5) Verses of Surah Al-Inam Related to Ihkam (Verse No-152-154)
Study of Selected Text of Holly Quran
1) Verses of Surah Al-Ihzab Related to Adab al-Nabi (Verse No.6, 21, 40,
56, 57, 58.)
2) Verses of Surah Al-Hashar (18,19,20) Related to thinking, Day of
Judgment
3) Verses of Surah Al-Saf Related to Tafakar, Tadabar (Verse No-1,14)
Seerat of Holy Prophet (S.A.W) I
1) Life of Muhammad Bin Abdullah ( Before Prophet Hood)
2) Life of Holy Prophet (S.A.W) in Makkah
39
3) Important Lessons Derived from the life of Holy Prophet in Makkah
Seerat of Holy Prophet (S.A.W) II
1) Life of Holy Prophet (S.A.W) in Madina
2) Important Events of Life Holy Prophet in Madina
3) Important Lessons Derived from the life of Holy Prophet in Madina
Introduction to Sunnah
1) Basic Concepts of Hadith
2) History of Hadith
3) Kinds of Hadith
4) Uloom –ul-Hadith
5) Sunnah & Hadith
6) Legal Position of Sunnah
Selected Study from Text of Hadith
Introduction to Islamic Law & Jurisprudence
1) Basic Concepts of Islamic Law & Jurisprudence
2) History & Importance of Islamic Law & Jurisprudence
3) Sources of Islamic Law & Jurisprudence
4) Nature of Differences in Islamic Law
5) Islam and Sectarianism
Islamic Culture & Civilization
1) Basic Concepts of Islamic Culture & Civilization
2) Historical Development of Islamic Culture & Civilization
3) Characteristics of Islamic Culture & Civilization
4) Islamic Culture & Civilization and Contemporary Issues
Islam & Science
1) Basic Concepts of Islam & Science
2) Contributions of Muslims in the Development of Science
3) Quran & Science
Islamic Economic System
1) Basic Concepts of Islamic Economic System
2) Means of Distribution of wealth in Islamic Economics
3) Islamic Concept of Riba
4) Islamic Ways of Trade & Commerce
Political System of Islam
1) Basic Concepts of Islamic Political System
2) Islamic Concept of Sovereignty
3) Basic Institutions of Govt. in Islam
Islamic History
1) Period of Khlaft-E-Rashida
2) Period of Ummayyads
3) Period of Abbasids
40
Social System of Islam
1) Basic Concepts of Social System of Islam
2) Elements of Family
3) Ethical Values of Islam
Reference Books:
1) HameedullahHameed ullah Muhammad, “Emergence of Islam”,” , IRI,
1. Islamabad.
Hameedullah2) Hameed ullah Muhammad, “Muslim Conduct of State”
3) Hameed ullah Muhammad, ‘Introduction to Islam
4)2. Mulana Muhammad Yousaf Islahi”.,”
3. 5) Hussain Hamid Hassan, “An Introduction to the Study of Islamic
Law” leaf Publication Islamabad, Pakistan.
6) Ahmad Hasan, “Principles of Islamic Jurisprudence” Islamic Research
4. Institute, International Islamic University, Islamabad (1993).)
7) Mir Waliullah, “Muslim Jurisprudence and the Quranic Law of Crimes”
5. Islamic Book Service (1982).)
8) H. S. Bhatia, “Studies in Islamic Law, Religion and Society” Deep & Deep
6. Publications New Delhi (1989).)
9) Dr. Muhammad Zia-ul-Haq, “Introduction to Al Sharia Al Islamia” Allama
7. Iqbal Open University, Islamabad (2001).)
8. Khalifa Abdul Hakim, Islamic Ideology.
9. Muhammad Rafiuddin, Ideology of the Future.
10. Muhammad Qutub, Islam: The Misunderstood Religion.
11. Khushid Ahmed, Islam: Its meaning and Message.
12. Syed Anwar Ali, Islam the Religion.
13. Ahmad A. Galwash, The Religion of Islam.
14. A.M.A. Shushtery, Outlines of Islamic Culture.
15. Hameedullah Muhammad, “Muslim Conduct of State”
Eth-302 ETHICS 2 Crh
Objectives:
This course is an introduction to moral philosophy and is intended for the

student who has little or no prior exposure to philosophy. It provides a
broad but reasonably detailed examination of the central issues of moral
philosophy and also considers how these can be applied to several
contemporary moral problems.
Course Outline:
Indication and scope of ethics: relation of ethics to psychology,

metaphysics and religion. A brief review of major theories or the moral
standard (The standard as Law, Happiness and as Perfection). Promotion
of moral values in society through family & various educational and
cultural Institutions; Concept of good and evil; Freedom and
41
responsibility; Various theories of punishment. Ethical teachings of world
religions with special reference to Hinduism, Christianity, Buddhism,
Judaism and Islam. Hundred ethical precepts from the Quran and sayings
of the Holy Prophet (Peace be upon him). Islam's attitude towards
minorities.
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. B.A. Dar, QuranicWoods, M. ed., 1992. Eudemian Ethics.

2. Denise, T.C., White, N.P. Books I, Ii, and Peterfreund, S.P., 2002. Great
traditions in ethics. Wadsworth.
3. Harol H. Titus, Ethics for To-day.
4. J.S. Mackenzie, A Manual of Ethics.
1.5. Modudi, S. Islami Riyasat, Islamic Publications, LahoreViii. Clarendon
Press.
2.6. Pojman, L.P. and Fieser, J., 2011. Cengage Advantage Books: Ethics:
Discovering Right and Wrong. Cengage Learning.
3. Denise, T.C., White, N.P. and Peterfreund, S.P., 2002. Great traditions in
ethics. Wadsworth.
4. J.S. Mackenzie, A Manual of Ethics.
5. Harol H. Titus, Ethics for To-day.
6. B.A. Dar, Quranic Ethics.
7. Proceedings of to Islamic Colloquium, Lahore 1957.
8. Woods, M. ed., 1992. Eudemian Ethics Books I, II, and VIII. Clarendon Press.
8. Modudi, S. Islami Riyasat, Islamic Publications, Lahore.
Geol-302 GENERAL GEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course is designed to acquire the knowledge about the basic

concepts of Geology. This will help the students to get knowledge about
various types of rocks and minerals and the processes of their formation.
Course Outline:
42
Introduction and scope of geology, its importance and relationship with
other sciences. Earth as a member of the solar system; its origin, age,
composition and internal structure. Introduction to rocks and minerals.
Introduction to plate tectonics, mountain building processes earthquake
and volcanoes. Primary sedimentary, igneous and metamorphic
structures. Introduction of folds, faults, joints, cleavage, foliation,
lineation and unconformities. Weathering and erosion. Isostasy.
Geological Time Scale.
Lab. Work:
Study of relief features with the help of models and topographic maps.
Identification of rocks and minerals.
Recommended Books:
1. Bennison, G.M., 1997. An Introduction of Geological Structures and

Maps. Edward Arnold.
1.2. Holmes, A., 1978. Principles of Physical Geology. by Holmes, A.,
1978, Nelson.
3. Jones, Norris. W., Johnes, Charles E., 2005. Lab. Manual for Physical
Geology, McGraw-Hill.
4. McClay, K.R., 1987. The Mapping of Geological Structures. Open
University Press.
2.5. Park, R.G., 1983. Foundation of Structural Geology. by Park, R.G.,
1983, Blackie.
3.6. Platt, J.I., 1961. Elementary Exercises upon Geological Maps. by
Platt, J.I., 1961, Thomas Murby & Co.
4. An Introduction of Geological Structures and Maps by Bennison, G.M.,
1997, Edward Arnold.
5.7. Physical Geology by Plummer, McGeay & Carlson, 2005, Physical
Geology. .
6. Smith, G. and Pun, A., 2006. Lab Manual for Physical Geology by Jones,
Norris. W., Johnes, Charles E., 2005, McGraw-Hill.
7.8. How Does Earth Work: Physical Geology and Process of Science.
Smith, G. and Pun, A., 2006, Prentice Hall.
8. The Mapping of Geological Structures by McClay, K.R., 1987, Open

University Press.
43
Phys-302 GENERAL PHYSICS 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course is designed to enable students to acquire basic understanding of

the Physical world, its origin and structure to help the potential application of the
unexplored and unidentified organisms in the industry.
Course Outline:
Vector analysis. Simple Harmonic Motion and Damped Vibration. D.C.

Circuits. Network Theorems. Heat and Thermodynamics. Entropy.
Rectifier and filter circuits. Transistors.
Lab. Work:
Specific experiments.
Recommended Books:
1. Boas, M.L., Electricity and Magnetism by K.K. Tewari (S. Chand & Co.,
Ltd.)
2.1. Mathematical Methodsmethods in Physical Sciences. physical
sciences by M. L. Boas (John Willey & Sons.).
3.2. Subrahmanyam N. and BrijLal, Waves and Oscillations. by N.
Subrahmanyam & BrijLal (Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.).
3. Tewari, K.K., Electricity and Magnetism, S. Chand & Co., Ltd.
44
Stats-302 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
To familiarize students with the statistical parameters necessary for the

scientific presentation and drawing inferences.
Course Outline:
What is Statistics? Presentation of Data. Measures of Central Tendency.

Measures of Dispersion. Probability and Probability Distributions.
Sampling and Sampling Distributions. Hypothesis Testing. Testing of
Hypothesis- Single Population. Testing of Hypotheses-Two or more
Populations. Testing of Hypothesis-Independence of Attributes.
Regression and Correlation.
Lab. Work:
Exercises may be given.

Recommended Books:
1. Muhammad, F. 2005. “Statistical Methods and Data Analysis”, Kitab

Markaz, Bhawana Bazar Faisalabad.
1.2. Walpole, R. E. 1982. “Introduction to Statistics”, 3rd Ed., Macmillan
Publishing Co., Inc. New York.
45
2. Muhammad, F. 2005. “Statistical Methods and Data Analysis”, Kitab
Markaz, Bhawana Bazar Faisalabad.
MARINE ECOLOGY AND

MS-302 2+1=3 Crh
ECOSYSTEMS
Objectives:
To understand the basic functional definition of ecology and ecosystem.

Course Outline:
Abiotic and biotic components of an ecosystem, Habitat and zonation.

Primary Production, factor affecting primary productivity. Consumer in
marine environment: Dynamics of populations, competition, Feeding and
response, Food selection, Processing of conserved energy. Structure and
dynamics: Marine communities, Trophic structure, Taxonomic structure,
social structure, colonization and succession. Function of marine
ecosystem: Nutrient cycling, Seasonal changes, Long-term and large
scale changes.
Lab. Work:
Field trips and reports, case studies of coastal ecosystems.

Recommended Books:
1. Marine Ecology: Concepts and Applications, 2010 Martin R. Speight, P.

A. Henderson, Willey and Blackwell.
2. Marine ecology, 2007, Sean D. Connell, Bronwyn M. Gillanders, Oxford
University Press.
3. Elements of marine ecology, 1998, Ronald Victor Tait, Frances Dipper,
Butterworth and Heinemann.
4.1. An introduction to marine ecology, 1999, R. S. K. Barnes,
R.S.K.,Richard Stephen, R., Kent Barnes, K. andR. N. Hughes, R.N.,
1999. An Introduction to Marine Ecology. Wiley-Blackwell.
2. Connell, S.D. and Gillanders, B.M., 2007. Marine ecology. Oxford
University Press.
5.3. Intertidal Ecology, 1999 David G. Raffaelli, D.G. andStephen J.
Hawkins, S.J., 1999. Intertidal Ecology. Springer Verlag.
4. Speight, M.R. and Henderson, P.A., 2010. Marine Ecology: Concepts
and Applications, Willey and Blackwell.
6. Stephen, R., Barnes, K. and Mann, K.H., 1991. Marine ecological
processes 1995, Ivan Valiela, Springer.
7.5. Fundamentals of Aquatic Ecology. , 1991, Richard Stephen Kent
Barnes, Kenneth Henry Mann, Willey and Blackwell.
46
6. Tait, R.V., Butterworth, F.D. and Heinemann, 1998. Elements of Marine
Ecology.
7. Valiela, I., 1995. Marine Ecological Processes. Springer.
47
THIRD SEMESTER
Eng - 401 ENGLISH-III 3 Crh
(Technical Writing and Presentation Skills)
English III (Technical Writing and

Presentation Skills)
Objectives: To enhanceEnhance language skills and develop critical
thinking
Course Contents:
Presentation skills Formatted: Justified

Formatted: Font: Bold
Essay writing.
Formatted: Font: Bold
Descriptive, narrative, discursive, argumentative.
Academic writing. Formatted: Font: Bold
How to write a proposal for research paper/term paper.

How to write a research paper/ term paper (emphasis on style, content,
language, form, clarity, consistency). )
Technical Report writing. Formatted: Font: Bold
Progress report writing. Formatted: Font: Bold

Formatted: Font: 13 pt, Not Italic
Note.: Extensive reading is required for vocabulary building. Formatted: Justified

Formatted: Font: Italic
Lab. Work: Formatted: Font: Italic

Formatted: Font: 11 pt, Italic
Not Applicable. Formatted: Font: 11 pt, Italic

Recommended Books:
Kirszner, L.G. Technical Writing and Presentation Skills
a) Essay Writing and Academic Writing
1. Writing. Advanced by Ron White. Oxford Supplementary Skills. Third Formatted: Justified, Numbered + Level: 1 + Numbering
Style: 1, 2, 3, … + Start at: 1 + Alignment: Left + Aligned at:
Impression 1992. ISBN 0 19 435407 3 (particularly suitable for discursive, 0" + Indent at: 0.25"
descriptive, argumentative and report writing).
Formatted: Font: 8 pt, Not Bold
2. Mandell, S.R. College Writing Skills by John Langan.
McGraw-Hill Higher Education. 2004.
3.1. Patterns of College Writing (4th edition).) by Laurie G. Kirszner and Formatted: Justified, Numbered + Level: 1 + Numbering
Style: 1, 2, 3, … + Start at: 1 + Alignment: Left + Aligned at:
Stephen R. Mandell. St. Martin’s Press. 0" + Indent at: 0.25", No widow/orphan control
2. Langan, J., 2004. College Writing Skills. McGraw-Hill Higher Education.
b) Presentation Skills
c) Reading
48
3. The Mercury Reader. A Custom Publication. Compiled by Northern Illinois
University. General Editiors:Editors: Janice Neulib, J.,; Kathleen Shine Cain,
K.S.,; Stephen Ruffus, S. and Maurice Scharton, M. (A reader which will give
students exposure to the best of twentieth century literature, without taxing
the taste of engineering students).
White, R., 1992. Writing. Advanced. Oxford Supplementary Skills. Third
Impression,
4. ISBN 0 19 435407 3 (particularly suitable for discursive, descriptive,

argumentative and report writing).
49
Ur-401 URDU 3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To enhance language skills and develop critical thinking in native

language.
Course Outline:
Prose: Ser dosrey darvesh ki, Bandar ki taqreer dil kharash, Khutoot-e-
Ghalib, Qaumi taleem, qaumi hamdardi aur bahmi ittefaq, Islahe talleem-e-
atfal, Qaumi izzat, Maktab key mutaliq aik dilchasp hikayat, Hum jeetay
hen ya mar gaey? Sir Syed marhoom aur urdu literature, Humara muashra
aur arabi, Maulvi sahib ko apney tarjumey per naz tha, Syed Ras Masood,
Azdwaj-e-muhabbat, Muft karam dashtan, Jani dushman, Siyah-o-sufaid,
Kapas ka phool, Arhar ka khet, Lahore ka gughrafia, Humara sun-e-
pedaish, Meenar-e-Pakistan. Poetry: Ghazliyat (Khwaja Meer Dard, Meer
Taqi Meer, Mushafi, Aatish, Nasikh, Ghalib, Momin, Dagh, Hasrat Mohani,
Asghar, Jigar, Fani, Firaq, Yas, Iqbal and Faiz), Qasaid (Sauda aur Zoq),
Musnawiat (Meer Hasan aur Dia Shankar Naseem), Rubaiat (Nazeer Akbar
Abadi, Hali, Shibli Naamani aur Iqbal), Qataat (Akbar, Iqbal, Josh, Seemab
Akbar Abadi, Ehsan Danish, Hafeez Jalandhari aur Noon Meem Rashid).
Lab. Work:
Not Applicable.
Recommended Book:
1. Anonymous, 2015. Makhzan-e-Adab. Urdu Laazmi Ka Jadeed Nisaab.

University of Karachi, Karachi, Pakistan.
50
Biostats-401 BIOSTATISTICS 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To familiarize students with the statistical parameters necessary for the

scientific presentation and drawing inferences of biological problems.
Course Outline:
Descriptive Statistics. Organizing and displaying data. Measures of

Central Tendency. Measures of Dispersion and Variability. Curve Fitting.
Probability. Simple and Multiple Regression. Simple and Multiple
Correlation. Test of Hypothesis and Significance. Student “t”, “F” and Chi-
Square Distributions. Analysis of Variance.
Lab. Work:
Exercises may be given.

Recommended Books:
1. Chaudhry, S. A. and Kmal, S. 1996. Introduction to Statistical Theory. Part-

I and Part-II, Ilmi Kitab Khana, Urdu Bazar, Lahore.
2. Daniel, W. W. 1983. Bio-Statistics. Foundation for Analysis in Health
Science. 3rd Ed.
3. Harvey, M. 1995. Intuitive Biostatistics. Oxford University Press. NY.
4. Kuzma, J.W. and Bohnenblust, S.E. 2001. Basic Statistics for the Health
Sciences. McGraw-Hill International Education.
5. Nilton, J. S. and Tsokos, J. D. 1983. Statistical Methods in Biological and
health Sciences. McGrew-Hill.
6. Onton, P., Adams, S. and Voelkar, D.H. 2001. Cliffnotes for Statistics.
Blackwell Scientific Publishers.
7. Pacano, M. and Gauvreau, K. 2000. Principles of Biostatistics.
8. Quinn, G. 2002. Experimental Design and Data Analysis for Biologists.
Cambridge University Press.
9. Rosner, B. 2005. Fundamentals of Biostatistics. John Wiley & Sons.
10. Samuels, M. 1991. Statistics for the life sciences. Dellen Pub Co SF, USA.
11. Samuels, M. L. and Witmar, J. A. 2003. Statistics for Life Sciences. 3rd
Edition. Cambridge University Press.
12. Walpole, R. E. 1982. Introduction to Statistics. Macmillam Pub Co, NY.
13. Zar, J. H. 1984 Biostatistical Analysis. 2nd Ed Prentice Hall USA.
Comp-401 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
51
Objectives:
Computing technology is all around us in our everyday lives, from mobile

phone to GPS system to networking website etc. Being intelligent,
innovative and forward-thinking students can develop technology e.g.
climate modelling, the study of diseases and ecology. As well as learning
how computers work, the students will get an understanding of the
technology behind computer games, mobile phones, the internet and
many other computing-based products.
Course Outline:
Computer programming, Essential mathematical skills. Embedded

Systems, Windows applications, web applications, console applications.
System software: windows, file manager and linux etc. Software creation
and invention new ways to use it. Computer games, mobile applications
and the software that is contained in the devices we use on a daily basis.
Application software: browsing software, word processing, multimedia,
or spreadsheet software.
Lab. Work:
Small projects may be given.

Recommended Books:
1. Bhattacharya, S. 2011. Introduction to Computer Applications for

Beginners. Department of Economics University of Kalyani.
2. Bhise, S.B., Dias, R.J., Mali, K.K. and Ghanwat, P.H., 2011. Textbook of
Computer Applications and Biostatistics. Trinity Publishing House, 358 pp.
3. Sinha, P.K., 2004. Computer Fundamentals. 3rd Ed., BPB Publications,
404 pp.
52
INTRODUCTION TO
Sociol-401 2+1=3 Crh
SOCIOLOGY
Objectives:
To inculcate community participation and social interaction between

students and the coastal community to help resolve their problems.
Course Outline:
Individual, Culture and Society. Sociological Theory. Methods of Sociological

Research. Social Interaction. Social Control. Social and Cultural Change and
Social Policy. Community. Social Problems in Pakistan: Population Growth,
Demographic Transition, Deviant Behaviour, Institutionalised evasions, social
conflicts, internal and international Migration, Aging, Drug abuse, Prostitution,
Smuggling, Illiteracy and Poverty.
Lab. Work:
Field based activities.

Recommended Books:
1. Anthropology: The Study of Man Adamson Hoebel, E.

2. Pakistani Society Akbar Ahmad, S.
3.2. Contemporary Social Problems Robert K. Merton.
4.3. Contemporary Sociological Theories Pitrim Sorokin.
5.4. Family in Asia Man Singh Das & Pahos D. Bardis.
5. Feudal System in Pakistan Nawab Haider Naqvi.
6. Ibn-i-Khaldun : His Life and Work M. Abdullah Enan.
7. Master of Sociological Thought Lewis A. Coser.
8. Pakistani Society Akbar Ahmad, S.
8.9. Pakistani Society M. Iqbal Chaudhry.
10. Social Change and History Robert Nisbet.
11. Social Problems Jon. M. Shepard & Voss.
12. Sociology : Roles & Relationships Everett K. Wilson.
9.13. Sociology Ogburn & Nimkoff.
10.14. Strategies of Social Research Smith, H.W.
11. The Sociology of Religion Max Weber: Roles & Relationships Everett K. Formatted: (none), Pattern: Clear
Wilson.
12. Social Problems Jon. M. Shepard & Voss.
13. Social Change and History Robert Nisbet.
14.15. Feudal System in Pakistan Nawab Haider Naqvi. Formatted: Font color: Auto, Pattern: Clear
15.16. The Sociology of Rural Life Lynn Smith, T.

16.17. The Sociology of Social Problems Horton & Leslie.
53
17. The Sociology of Religion Max Weber.
MARINE Formatted Table

MSBT-401 2+1=3 Crh
BIOCHEMISTRYBIOTECHNOLOGY
Objectives:
Characteristics and functions of major building blocks of marine

organisms. General understandings of simple biochemical processes in
an organism. Learning of different metabolic pathways in a marine
organism.
Course Outline:
Introduction to biochemistry (Cell Structure and function, ionizations of

water, buffers, pH, Diffusion and osmosis). Biomolecules metabolism of
protein, Carbohydrates, and Lipids, Nucleic acids, Vitamins, Enzymes and
hormones. Electron transport chain. Energy source, carbon and nitrogen
input and assimilation (Photosynthesis, Nitrogen fixation, Respiration).
Lab. Work:
Proximate Analysis. Conventional Methods for estimation of Proteins,

Carbohydrates, lipids and Vitamins. Techniques: Spectrophotometeric
techniques, Chromatographic techniques, Electrophoresis etc.
Recommended Books:
1. Bohinski, C.R., 1982. Modern Concepts in Biochemistry. 4th Ed., Allyn

and bocon, Inc. Boston.
2. Ramn, D.J., 1989. Biochemistry. Noil Patterson Publishers, Burlinson.
3. Shulman, G.E. and Malcolm, R.L., 1999. The Biochemical Ecology of
Marine Fishes.
4. Stryer, L., 1995. Biochemistry. 4th Ed., WIC Freeman and Company, N.V.
5. Valeem, E. E. and Shameel, M. 2010. Composition of Fatty Acids in Marine
and Freshwater Algae of Sindh: Isolation and Characterization. VDM Verlag
Dr. Müller, 240 pp. ISBN. 10: 3-639-25103-2, ISBN-13: 978-3-639-25103-6.
6. Voet, D. and Voet, G.J., 1995. Biochemistry. Wiley and Sons, Inc., N. V.
7. Zubay, G.,1989. Biochemistry. 2nd Ed., Maxwell, Macmillan, N.V.
54
55
MS-403 MARINE BIOTECHNOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
To acquaint students with recent advancements in the field of marine Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
biotechnology and how molecular techniques may be applied for studying
marine organisms and to provide basic concepts and significance of
biotechnology as it is being used in industry.
Course Outline:
Definition and history; foundations of biotechnology and interdisciplinary pursuit; Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
introduction to marine microorganisms commonly used in industry and marine
biotechnology; branches and/ or applications of biotechnology in medicine,
agriculture (algae, fungi, food, livestock and fisheries, etc.); primary and secondary
metabolites (e.g., antibiotics, organic acids, toxins, etc.); aquaculture techniques;
marine microbes and phytoplankton/ flora of biotechnological importance; role of
marine microbes in global carbon cycling; recent progress in discovery of drugs and
enzymes from marine sources; significance of microorganisms in food production,
fermentation, pharmaceutical and other industries; protection of biotechnological
products; media and nutritional requirements of industrial organisms; safety in
biotechnology; public perception of biotechnology; biotechnology and ethics;
biotechnology and the developing world.
Lab. Work:
Isolation and screening of potential microbes from different environmental Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
sources; lab scale production of bacterial enzymes; lab-scale production of
alcohol by yeast; the use of microbes in bioleaching; use of microbes in
microbial enhanced oil recovery.
Recommended Books:
1. Daugherty, E.,, 2012. Biotechnology: Science for the New Millennium. 1 st Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Edition, Revised; Paradigm Publication.
2. Gal, Y.L., 2010. New Developments in MarineSmith JE, 2009. Biotechnology. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li, Pattern: Clear
Springer5th Edition; Cambridge Univ. Press. Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
3. Gal, Y.L., YL, 2010. Marine Biotechnology I (Advances in Biochemical Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
Engineering Biotechnology). Springer. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
4. Gal, Y.L., YL, 2010. Marine Biotechnology II (Advances in Biochemical
Engineering Biotechnology). Springer.
5. Johansen, M.N., 2011. Microalgae: Biotechnology, Microbiology and Energy.
Nova Science Pub Inc.
6. Okafor, N., 2007. Modern Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. 1 st
Edition; Science Publishers, USA.
5.7. Ratlegde, C. and Kristiansen, B.,, 2006. Basic Biotechnology. 2nd Edition; Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Cambridge University Press, UK.
8. Smith, J.E., 2009. Biotechnology. 5th Edition; Cambridge Univ. Press.
6.9. Thomas, J.A. JA and Fuchs, R.L., RL, 2002. Biotechnology and Safety Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Assessment. 3rd Edition; Academic Press, UK.
56
FOURTH SEMESTER
7. Johansen MN, 2011. Microalgae: Biotechnology, Microbiology and Energy.
Nova Science Pub Inc.
8. Gal YL 2010. New Developments in Marine Biotechnology. Springer.
9. Okafor N, 2007. Modern Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. 1 st
Edition; Science Publishers, USA.
INFORMATION
3(2+1=3 Crh)
ITMS-402 TECHNOLOGYMARINE Chr
Formatted Table
RESOURCES
Objectives:
To make students hand on computer devices and software.

Course Outline:
Basic Definitions & Concepts; Hardware: Computer Systems & Components,

Uses, importance and future needs. Types of Computers, Part of
Computer, types of printers/ plotters, Storage Devices, Number Systems;
Software: Operating Systems, Programming and Application Software,
Operating Systems, Introduction to Programming, Databases and Information
Systems, Networks, Data Communication, The Internet, Browsers and Search
Engines; Accessing the Internet Application: connection through LAN
connection through modem, connection through high-speed lines. The
Internet: Email, Collaborative Computing and Social Networking; The Internet:
E-Commerce, IT Security and other issues, Project Week, Review Week.
Lab. Work:
Exploring Windows: work place: desktop components and customizing

them exploring parts of a window, menu and dialog boxes, multitasking,
and shutting down windows. Working with the Accessories: calculator,
notepad, WordPad, paint program, media player, etc. Organizing tiles and
folders using window explorer. Using Windows System Tools, Working
with Control Panel. Installing new software and hardware.
Recommended Books:
1. Alexis, L., Fundamentals of Information Technology. Mathewsleon Leon

Press.
2. Peter, N., Introduction to Computers. 6th International Edition, McGraw-Hill.
3. Sarah, E. H. Stacey, C.S., Computers, Communications & information: A
user's introduction,
4. Scham’s Series, Introduction to Computer Science.
57
5. Shelly, G.B., Cashman, T.J. and Vermatt, M.E., 2002. Discovering
Computers.
6. Williams, S. Using Information Technology: A Practical Introduction to
Computer & Commn., 6th Edition. McGraw-Hills.
PkSt - 402 PAKISTAN STUDIES 2 Crh

(Compulsory)
Objectives:
To develop vision of historical perspective, government, politics, contemporary
Pakistan, ideological background of Pakistan. Study the process of governance,
national development, issues arising in the modern age and posing challenges
to Pakistan.
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 13 pt, Not Bold
Course Outline: Formatted: Normal, Don't add space between paragraphs of

the same style, Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
1. Historical Perspective: a. Ideological rationale with special reference to Sir
Formatted: Normal, Justified, Right: 0", Don't add space
Syed Ahmed Khan, Allama Muhammad Iqbal and Quaid-e-Azam Muhammad between paragraphs of the same style, Line spacing: Multiple
Ali Jinnah; b. Factors leading to Muslim separatism; c. People and Land (i. Indus 0.95 li
Civilization, ii.Muslim advent); Location and geo-physical features. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
2. Government and Politics in Pakistan, Political and constitutional phases: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
3_, Font: 12 pt
1947-58; 1958-71; 1971-77; 1977-88; 1988-99; 1999 onward.
3. Contemporary Pakistan: Economic institutions and issues; Society and social
structure; Ethnicity; Foreign policy of Pakistan and challenges; Futuristic outlook
of Pakistan.
Recommended Books:
1. Afzal, M.R., 1998. Political Parties in Pakistan, Vol. I, II & III. National
Institute of Historical and cultural Research, Islamabad.
2. Akbar, S.Z., 2000.Issue in Pakistan’s Economy. Karachi: Oxford University
Press.
3. Amin, T. Ethno - National Movement in Pakistan, Islamabad: Institute of
Policy Studies, Islamabad.
4. Aziz, K.K., 1976. Party, Politics in Pakistan. National Commission on
Historical and Cultural Research, Islamabad.
5. Burke, S.M. and Ziring, L., 1993. Pakistan’s Foreign policy: An Historical
analysis. Karachi: Oxford University Press.
6. Burki, J.S., 1980. State & Society in Pakistan, The MacMillan Press Ltd.,
7. Haq, N.U., 1993. Making of Pakistan: The Military Perspective. National
Commission on Historical and Cultural Research, Islamabad.
8. Mehmood, S., 1994. Pakistan Political Roots & Development. Lahore.
9. Mehmood, S., Pakistan Kayyun Toota. Idara-e-Saqafat-e-Islamia, Club
Road, Lahore.
58
10. Sayeed, K.B., 1967. The Political System of Pakistan. Houghton Mifflin,
Boston.
11. Waseem, M., 1987. Pakistan Under Martial Law. Vanguard, Lahore.
12. Wilcox, W., 1972. The Emergence of Bangladesh, Washington: American
Enterprise, Institute of Public Policy Research.
13. Zahid, A., 1980. History & Culture of Sindh. Royal Book Company, Karachi.
14. Ziring, L., 1980. Enigma of Political Development. Wm Dawson & Sons
Ltd., Kent England.
FUNDAMENTAL OF
Econ-402 2+1=3 Crh
ECONOMICS
Objectives:
To educate students on the basics of economics with a focus on application and

principles in practical scenarios and everyday activities.
Course Outline:
Basic economics concepts, applications, and principles; budgeting for success;

and wealth building. Definition of Economics and basic terms. What are key
Scarce Economics Resources? Opportunity Cost, Sacrifice, Economics
Principles and Theories, Consumers (Demanders) and Producers (Suppliers)?
Why is Economics important for the Individual, Consumers, Producers,
Businesses, and the Government? How Economics applies to Budgeting. How
Economics relates to Savings and investments. What Economics concepts
apply on buying a House, making a career decision, to Buy a Car or not? What
is Budgeting and its key Components? Seven (7) Key Components of Wealth
Building. Live Below Your Means, if you expect to Build Wealth? Build Wealth,
Why?
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Birchall, O. and Verry, D., 2016. Introduction to Economics. University

of London, 62 pp.
2. Marshall, A., 1895. Principles of Economics. Vol. 1, 3rd Ed. Macmillan & Co.,
London, 823 pp.
3. Menger, C., 1976. Principles of Economics. The Institute for Humane
Studies, 328 pp.
59
MS-402 MARINE MICROBIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
Students will learn about the microbial world in seas and oceans, their role
in the environment, importance in the marine food web.
Course Outline:
Introduction to marine microbiology (microbial environment, biological

organization and evolution, importance of microbes and their sizes,
chemical & physical factors influencing microbial distribution and
processes, marine microbial habitat); Methods in microbiology,
physiological processes of Cell; Eukaryotic microbes (nanoplanktonic
flagellates, dinoflagellates, ciliates, diatom, cocolithophorids,
radiolarians, foraminifera, fungi), Prokaryotic microbes [bacteria and
cyanobacteria (Blue-green Algae)], marine Archaea), Role of microbes in
oceanic processes (primary productivity, carbon and nitrogen cycling),
marine microbial loop, Eutrophication, Symbiotic Association, Harmful
microbes (pathogens and toxin producing) in relation to human and
marine organisms (fish and invertebrates), Marine microbes and human
society.
Lab. Work:
Sterilization Techniques, Preparation of media, Inoculation and

Purification of culture, Grams Staining, Identification of micro-organisms.
Recommended Books:
1. Austin, B., 1988. Marine Microbiology.

2. Helmreich, S., 2009. Alien Ocean: Anthropological Voyages in Microbial
Seas.
3. Litchfield, C.D., 1976. Marine Microbiology.
4. Mitra, A. and Banerjee, K., 2004. Marine Microbiology.
5. Munn, C.B., 2004. Marine Microbiology: Ecology and Applications.
6. Paul, J.H., 2001. Methods in Microbiology Marine Microbiology. Gulf
Professional Publishing, Science Academic Press.
7. Wood, E.J.F., 1975. The Living Ocean: Marine Microbiology.
60
MS-404 MARINE RESOURCES 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
Broadening the scope of harvesting of marine resources. Technological

advancement in developing conventional and non- conventional marine
products. Sustainable utilization and development of marine resources.
Course Outline:
Identification of living and non-living resources on the coast, seabed and

offshore areas. Aggregates, sea salt. Gas hydrates, commercially
important seabed minerals. Renewable energy from waves, tides,
currents. Sustainable development of coastal and offshore resources.
Living resources i.e. sponges, crustacean, molluscan, echinoderms, Fish,
turtles, mammals, seaweeds and Mangroves. Plankton fisheries and pearl
fisheries, exploration of local potential commercial species with reference
to regional fisheries.
Lab. Work:
Identify coastal resources along the Pakistan Coast. Introduction of GIS

techniques to develop and highlight coastal resources.
Recommended Books:
1. Marine resources: property rights, economics and environment Max

Falque, M.,Michael De Alessi, M. andHenri Lamotte, H. - 2002. Marine
Resources: Property Rights, Economics
1. Living marine resources: their utilization and Environment. Formatted: Font: Italic
2. management Edwin S. Iversen, E.S., - 1996. Living Marine Resources:

Their Utilization
2. Large marine ecosystems of the Indian Ocean: assessment,
sustainability and Management.
3. management. Kenneth Sherman, K.,Ezekiel Okemwa, E. andMicheni J.
Ntiba, M.J., - 1998. Large Marine Ecosystems of the Indian Ocean:
Assessment, Sustainability and Management.
61
FOURTH SEMESTER
OCEANOGRAPHIC
MS-406IT- INSTRUMENTS AND Formatted Table
2+1=3 Crh
402 METHODSINFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
Objectives:
To make students hand on computer devices and software.
Course Outline:
Basic Definitions & Concepts; Hardware: Computer Systems & Components,
Uses, importance and future needs. Types of Computers, Part of
Computer, types of printers/ plotters, Storage Devices, Number Systems;
Software: Operating Systems, Programming and Application Software,
Operating Systems, Introduction to Programming, Databases and Information
Systems, Networks, Data Communication, The Internet, Browsers and Search
Engines; Accessing the Internet Application: connection through LAN
connection through modem, connection through high-speed lines. The
Internet: Email, Collaborative Computing and Social Networking; The Internet:
E-Commerce, IT Security and other issues, Project Week, Review Week.
Lab. Work:
Exploring Windows: work place: desktop components and customizing
them exploring parts of a window, menu and dialog boxes, multitasking,
and shutting down windows. Working with the Accessories: calculator,
notepad, WordPad, paint program, media player, etc. Organizing tiles and
folders using window explorer. Using Windows System Tools, Working
with Control Panel. Installing new software and hardware.
Recommended Books:
1. Introduction to Computers 6th International Edition, Peter, N. McGraw-Hill.
2. Using Information Technology: A Practical Introduction to Computer &
Commn., 6th Edition. Williams, S. McGraw-Hills.
3. Computers, Communications & information: A user's introduction, Sarah, E.
Hutchinson. Stacey, C. Swayer.
4. Fundamentals of Information Technology, Alexis L Mathewsleon Leon Press.
5. Discovering Computers 2002, G.B. Shelly. T.J. Cashman and M.E.
Vermatt.
6. Introduction to Computer Science, Scham’s Series.
62
Pakistan Studies (Compulsory)
Introduction/Objectives:
 Develop vision of historical perspective, government, politics,
contemporary Pakistan, ideological background of Pakistan.
 Study the process of governance, national development, issues arising in
the modern age and posing challenges to Pakistan.
Course Outline:
1. Historical Perspective
a. Ideological rationale with special reference to Sir Syed Ahmed Khan,
Allama Muhammad Iqbal and Quaid-e-Azam Muhammad Ali Jinnah.
b. Factors leading to Muslim separatism
c. People and Land
i. Indus Civilization
ii. Muslim advent
iii. Location and geo-physical features.
2. Government and Politics in Pakistan
Political and constitutional phases:
a. 1947-58
b. 1958-71
c. 1971-77
d. 1977-88
e. 1988-99
f. 1999 onward
3. Contemporary Pakistan
a. Economic institutions and issues
b. Society and social structure
c. Ethnicity
d. Foreign policy of Pakistan and challenges
e. Futuristic outlook of Pakistan
Recommended Books:
1. Burki, Shahid Javed. State & Society in Pakistan, The MacMillan Press Ltd
1980.
2. Akbar, S. Zaidi. Issue in Pakistan’s Economy. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 2000.
3. S. M. Burke and Lawrence Ziring. Pakistan’s Foreign policy: An Historical
analysis. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1993.
4. Mehmood, Safdar. Pakistan Political Roots & Development. Lahore, 1994.
5. Wilcox, Wayne. The Emergence of Bangladesh, Washington: American
Enterprise, Institute of Public Policy Research, 1972.
6. Mehmood, Safdar. Pakistan Kayyun Toota, Lahore: Idara-e-Saqafat-e-
Islamia, Club Road, nd.
7. Amin, Tahir. Ethno - National Movement in Pakistan, Islamabad: Institute
of Policy Studies, Islamabad.
63
8. Ziring, Lawrence. Enigma of Political Development. Kent England: Wm
Dawson & sons Ltd, 1980.
9. Zahid, Ansar. History & Culture of Sindh. Karachi: Royal Book Company,
1980.
10. Afzal, M. Rafique. Political Parties in Pakistan, Vol. I, II & III. Islamabad:
National Institute of Historical and cultural Research, 1998.
11. Sayeed, Khalid Bin. The Political System of Pakistan. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin, 1967.
12. Aziz, K. K. Party, Politics in Pakistan, Islamabad: National Commission on
Historical and Cultural Research, 1976.
13. Muhammad Waseem, Pakistan Under Martial Law, Lahore: Vanguard,
1987.
14. Haq, Noor ul. Making of Pakistan: The Military Perspective. Islamabad:
National Commission on Historical and Cultural Research, 1993.
FUNDAMENTAL OF
Econ-402 2+1=3 Crh
ECONOMICS
Objectives:
To educate students on the basics of economics with a focus on application and
principles in practical scenarios and everyday activities.
Course Outline: Formatted: Normal, Don't add space between paragraphs of

the same style, Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Basic economics concepts, applications, and principles; budgeting for success;
and wealth building. Definition of Economics and basic terms. What are key
Formatted: Normal, Justified, Right: 0", Don't add space
Scarce Economics Resources? Opportunity Cost, Sacrifice, Economics between paragraphs of the same style, Line spacing: Multiple
Principles and Theories, Consumers (Demanders) and Producers (Suppliers)? 0.95 li
Why is Economics important for the Individual, Consumers, Producers, Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
Businesses, and the Government? How Economics applies to Budgeting. How 3_, Font: 12 pt
Economics relates to Savings and investments. What Economics concepts Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 15 pt, Not Bold
apply on buying a House, making a career decision, to Buy a Car or not? What
is Budgeting and its key Components? Seven (7) Key Components of Wealth
Building. Live Below Your Means, if you expect to Build Wealth? Build Wealth,
Why?
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Menger, C., 1976. Principles of Economics. The Institute for Humane
Studies, 328 pp.
2. Birchall, O. & Verry, D., 2016. Introduction to Economics. University of
London, 62 pp.
3. Marshall, A., 1895. Principles of Economics. Vol. 1, 3rd Ed. Macmillan & Co.,
London, 823 pp.
64
MS-403 MARINE BIOCHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
Characteristics and functions of major building blocks of marine
organisms. General understandings of simple biochemical processes in
an organism. Learning of different metabolic pathways in a marine
organism.
Course Outline:
Introduction to biochemistry (Cell Structure and function, ionizations of
water, buffers, pH, Diffusion and osmosis). Biomolecules metabolism of
protein, Carbohydrates, and Lipids, Nucleic acids, Vitamins, Enzymes and
hormones. Electron transport chain. Energy source, carbon and nitrogen
input and assimilation (Photosynthesis, Nitrogen fixation, Respiration).
Lab. Work:
Proximate Analysis. Conventional Methods for estimation of Proteins,
Carbohydrates, lipids and Vitamins. Techniques: Spectrophotometeric
techniques, Chromatographic techniques, Electrophoresis etc.
Recommended Books:
9. Zubay, G.,1989. Biochemistry. 2nd Ed., Maxwell, Macmillan, N.V.
10. Bohinski, C.R., 1982. Modern Concepts in Biochemistry. 4 th Ed., Allyn
and bocon, Inc. Boston.
11. Voet, D. and Voet, G.J., 1995. Biochemistry. Wiley and Sons, Inc., N. V.
12. Stryer, L., 1995. Biochemistry. 4th Ed., WIC Freeman and Company, N.V.
13. Ramn, D.J., 1989. Biochemistry. Noil Patterson Publishers, Burlinson.
14. Shulman, G.E. and Malcolm, R.L., 1999. The Biochemical Ecology of
Marine Fishes.
15. Valeem, E. E. and Shameel, M. 2010. Composition of Fatty Acids in Marine
and Freshwater Algae of Sindh: Isolation and Characterization. VDM Verlag
Dr. Müller, 240 pp. ISBN. 10: 3-639-25103-2, ISBN-13: 978-3-639-25103-6.
MS-404 MARINE MICROBIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
Students will learn about the microbial world in seas and oceans, their role
in the environment, importance in the marine food web.
Course Outline:
Introduction to marine microbiology (microbial environment, biological
organization and evolution, importance of microbes and their sizes,
chemical & physical factors influencing microbial distribution and
processes, marine microbial habitat); Methods in microbiology,
65
physiological processes of Cell; Eukaryotic microbes (nanoplanktonic
flagellates, dinoflagellates, ciliates, diatom, cocolithophorids,
radiolarians, foraminifera, fungi), Prokaryotic microbes [bacteria and
cyanobacteria (Blue-green Algae)], marine Archaea), Role of microbes in
oceanic processes (primary productivity, carbon and nitrogen cycling),
marine microbial loop, Eutrophication, Symbiotic Association, Harmful
microbes (pathogens and toxin producing) in relation to human and
marine organisms (fish and invertebrates), Marine microbes and human
society.
Lab. Work:
Sterilization Techniques, Preparation of media, Inoculation and
Purification of culture, Grams Staining, Identification of micro-organisms.
Recommended Books:
1. Marine microbiology: ecology and applications, Colin B. Munn - 2004.
2. Marine microbiology Brian Austin - 1988.
3. Marine microbiology Carol D. Litchfield - 1976.
4. Alien ocean: anthropological voyages in microbial seas Stefan
Helmreich - 2009.
5. Marine microbiology Abhijii Mitra, Kakoli Banerjee - 2004.
6. The living ocean: marine microbiology E. J. Ferguson Wood - 1975.
7. Methods in Microbiology Marine Microbiology. John H. Paul, Gulf
Professional Publishing 2001, Science Academic Press.
OCEANOGRAPHIC
MS-405 2+1=3 Crh
INSTRUMENTS AND METHODS
Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course is designed to introduce students to the important physical

processes in the oceans in such a way that they will understand both the
conceptual physical principles and at the larger scale how these fit into
the earth as a system.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Introduction to the principles of the instruments, Brief account of: time

and position measurements [clocks, time signals, ground- and satellite-
based navigation (GPS/ RS/ GIS), attitude/ motion sensors], data logging
(analog and digital recorders, telemetry, memory and recording, water
66
properties measurements (temperature, conductivity, oxygen, optical
properties, tracers and dyes), Secchi Disk, Rosette (Nansen/ Niskin Bottle,
XBT), seabed sampling (grabs, corers, ROVS, underwater cameras),
current measurements [mechanical, acoustic, electromagnetic, optical,
radar (Ecosounder, waverider buoy, drifters), pressure and sea level
measurements, mechanical technology (cables, winches, buoys,
anchors)], Scuba Diving and Snorkelling gears.
Lab. Work:
Lab. Work:
Plotting and understanding basic Oceanographic parameters and

sampling techniques, instruments and methods, Tests of different
parameters. Demonstration of tidal pattern. Short field deployment of
available instrument, and analyzing the resulting data, field visits.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1969. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering.

McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.
2. Baker, D.J., Ocean instruments and experiment design in Evolution of
physical oceanography.
3. Warren B.A. and Wunsch, C., 1981. The MIT Press, Boston, p. 396-433.
4.3. Berteaux, H.O., 1975. Buoy Engineering. John Wiley & sons, New
York, 1-319 pp.
5.4. Bowditch, N., 1984. American Practical Navigator. U.S. Defence
Mapping Agency.
6.5. Dobson, F., Hasse, L. and Davis, R., 1980. Air-sea Interactions:
Instruments and Methods, Plenum Press, New York, 801 pp.
7.6. Popkin, B.W., Grosline, D.S. and Hammond, D.E., 1987. Laboratory
Exercises in Oceanography. 2nd Ed., W.H. Freeman and Company. New
York.
7. Warren B.A. and Wunsch, C., 1981. The MIT Press, Boston, p. 396-433.
FIFTH SEMESTER
APPLICATION OF Formatted Table
MS-501 3 Crh
REMOTE SENSING AND GIS
This course is designed to introduce principles, concepts and Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
applications of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) and Remote
Sensing (RS): a decision support tool for planners and managers of spatial
information and to obtain information on the earth from decimetre level to
km level locally and globally.
67
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Introduction to Geographical Information System, Data Types (Spatial/
Aspatial), Data Models and Structures (Raster/ Vector), Data Sources and
Capturing Techniques, Displaying and Manipulating spatial information,
Vector Data Preparation (Digitization and Spatial Data Editing), GPS
Survey, Introduction to the concept of RS, Electromagnetic Spectrum,
Atmospheric Interaction, Technology of Remote Sensing (Orbits,
Satellites, Sensors and Platforms), Applications of Remote Sensing,
Satellite Image Processing Cycle, Image Enhancement, Data Fusion and
Mosaicking, Information Extraction (Classification and Vectorization).
Lab. Work:
Introduction to ArcGIS, Exploring GIS Dataset in ArcCatalog, Working on

vector data in ArcGIS (Scanning, Digitization and Editing), Integrating GPS
data in GIS Environment, Applications of GIS, ERDAS Imagine -
Environment, Noise Corrections, Geometric Corrections, Radiometric
Corrections.
Recommended Books:
1. Chang, K-t., 2002. Introduction to Geographic Information Systems,

McGraw-Hill Company, New York, U.S.A.
2. Demers, M.N., 2002. Fundamentals of Geographic Information System,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Singapore.
1.3. Matt Duckham, M.,Michael F. Goodchild, M.Michael F. and Worboys,
M.F., (2003.) Foundations of Geographic Information Science, Tylor &
Francis, New York, USA.
2.4. Lillesand T.M. and Kiefer, R.W., 2000. Remote Sensing and Image
InterpretationMichael N. Demers (2002) Fundamentals of Geographic
Information System, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. ., Singapore.
3. Basanta Shrestha & Birendra Bajracharya (2000), GIS for Beginners, By
ICIMOD, Kathmandu, Nepal.
4. Kang-tsung Chang (2002) Introduction to Geographic Information
Systems, McGraw-Hill Company, New York, U.S.A.
5. W. G. Rees, W.G., (2001.) Physical Principles of Remote Sensing
Cambridge University Press, United Kingdom.
6. Robert A. Schowengerdt, R.A., (January 15, 1997.) Remote Sensing 2nd
Edition, Academic Press ISBN: 0126289816.
7. Shrestha, B. and Bajracharya, B., 2000. GIS for Beginners, By ICIMOD,
Kathmandu, Nepal.
MS-503 HYDROGRAPHY 2+1=3 Crh

Objectives:
68
The purpose of the course is to give the students a comprehension of
hydrography along with fundamentals of hydrographic surveying
methods and measurement principles with practical demonstration to
enable students to participate effectively in various hydrographic
surveying tasks.
Course Outline:
Definition of Hydrography; Importance of hydrographic surveying; Contributions
of hydrography to Maritime Activities including support for Port Management,
coastal engineering and offshore construction; Economic benefits of
hydrography; Principles of Hydrographic Surveying; Geodesy (Ellipsoid, Geoid,
Projections, Datum transformation, vertical datums and reference planes);
Surveying equipment and their calibrations; Positioning (Basic knowledge, GPS,
DGPS, RTK, Underwater positioning); Bathymetry (General, Single-beam,
Multi-beam); Data acquisition and Processing using Single and Multi-beam
echo-sounding systems and other sensors such as Side Scan Sonar, Sub -
bottom Profilers, Sound velocity meter and Land Surveyor's equipment with its
accuracies; DGPS Accuracy, Error detection, Statistics; Tides (Theory,
Observations, Predictions and uses of Tidal information); Quality assurance;
Project Management; Hydrographic Data management; Nautical Charting;
National/ Port Hydrographic organizations with roles & responsibilities and
National Hydrographic Service obligations under the SOLAS Convention.
Lab. Work:
OJTs on hydrographic equipment; Practical demonstrations and visit to
National/ Port Hydrographic setups.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 2005. Manual on Hydrography. International Hydrographic
Bureau, Monaco.
2. Anonymous, 2010, Manual on Hydrography. International Hydrographic
Organisation (IHO), Publication C-13.
3. Anonymous, Geodesy: Introduction and Overview of Geodetic Datums
available on University of Colorado.
4. Anonymous, Guidelines of Good Practice for Hydrographic Surveys in New
Zealand Ports and Harbours.
5. Anonymous, Hydrographic Survey Standards. IHO Special Publication.
6. Caspers, H., 1964. Hela, Ilmo, and Taivo Laevastu: Fisheries Hydrography.
How Oceanography and Meteorology can and do serve fisheries. With 67 fig.
London: Fishing News (Books) Ltd., 137 pp.
7. De Jong, C.D., Lachapelle, G., Skone, S. and Elema I.A., 2003.
Hydrography. 2nd Ed., Delft University Press, NL., 353 pp.
8. Ingham, A.E. and Abbott, V.J., 1993. Hydrography for the Surveyor and
Engineer. 3rd Ed., Wiley-Blackwell, 144 pp.
9. Lekkerkerk, H-J, 2011, Handbook of Offshore Surveying-Three Volumes
Set, Skilltrade, Netherlands.
MS-505 MARINE BIODIVERSITY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
69
To understand the structure and function of marine biodiversity
components from genes to habitats and develop skills to carry out impact
assessment and conservation.
Course Outline:
The structure and functioning of Marine Biodiversity (genus specific

habitats). Impact studies and its relationship with the basic oceanographic
processes. Toolbox for investigating marine biodiversity for attempting
data analysis: experimental design, modeling, taxonomy, Evolution,
Invasive species, data and Information Management, Field observations
and interpretation and Molecular methods; Molecular bar-coding of
biodiversity, Conservation, Laws for conservation, Marine protected
areas. Conservation and Restoration of marine biodiversity and
application of the above mentioned theories and methods in order to
develop a sustainable use of the marine environment.
Lab. Work:
Systematic studies of major biological taxa, field trips on biodiversity in

situ, use of biodiversity indices. Design and present a specific marine
conservation project report writing and discussions covering marine
conservation issues, including informal student presentations on
political, economic, historical, educational as well as natural science
issues related to conservation and analysis of marine biodiversity.
Recommended Books:
1. Jonathan, A. and Adams, J.S., 2009. Species Richness: patterns in the

diversity of life. Springer.
2. Miller, B.T., The Living Oceans. Island Press, USA.
3. Norse, E. and Crowder, L. 1999. Marine Conservation Biology: a Science of
Maintaining the Sea’s Biodiversity. Island Press, USA.
4. Ormond, R.F.G., Gage, J.D., Martin V.A., 2005. Marine Biodiversity:
Patterns and Processes. 472 pp.
5. Queiroga, H., 2006. Marine Biodiversity: Patterns and Processes,
Assessment, Threats, Management and Conservation. Springer.
6. Snedden, R., 2007. The Diversity of Life: from single cell to multicellular
organisms. Heinemann Lib.
7. Starr, C. and Taggart, R., 2006. Biology: the unit and diversity of life.
Thomson Learning Inc.
MS-507 COASTAL PROCESSES 2+1=3 Crh
70
Objectives:
Study the effects of seawater movement on the coastal sediments, role of

beach sediments in the protection of coasts, anthropogenic activities that
alter the beach profile.
Course Outline:
Waves, tides, coastal currents. Distribution of sediment on the beach.

Beach drift, Factors responsible for coastal erosion, coastal accretion, sea
intrusion classification of sediments, sediment budget, coastal sediment
transport, shoreline protection. Protection of chronically eroding beaches,
types of hard stabilization for protection of coastal areas, Natural beach
nourishment. Anthropogenic activities, beach management. Set back
limits. Shifting of beach dunes. Sediments pathways in the Deep sea
sedimentation, Minerals in the sediments. Why do Creeks Meander.
Formation of deltas. Barrier island formation, Options for Management of
Coastal areas.
Lab. Work:
Microscopic examination of beach sediments, identification of Biogenic

oozes. Placer minerals, Sediment grain size analysis using a standard
sieve shaker. Monitoring beach changes. Measuring beach slope. Case
study of erosional beaches, creeks and islands etc.
Recommended Books:
1. Brebbia, C.A., Benassai, G. and Rodriguez, G.R., Coastal Processes:

Volume 126.
2. Coastal Processes: Concepts in Coastal Engineering and their
Application to multifarious environment by Tomoya Shibayama.
3. Kjerfve, B., Coastal Lagoon Processes.
4. Kosian, R.D., Pykhov, N.V. and Edge, B.L., Coastal Processes in Tideless
Seas.
5. McAnally, W.H. and Mehta, A.J., Coastal and Estuarine fine Sediment
Processes.
MS-509 MARINE CHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh

71
Objectives:
Concept development of Marine Chemistry.

Course Outline:
General introduction and history, Chemical composition of seawater,

Physico-chemical properties of seawater (Structure, Chlorinity, Salinity,
Refractive index, Electrical conductivity, Density, Temperature), Dissolved
gases Solubility, distribution, Atmospheric exchange, CO2 equilibria),
Micronutrients (Composition, Distribution, Cycles), Minor and Major
elements, Dissolved organic particulates, Radioisotopes, Primary
productivity in relation to chemical constituents. Basic marine
sedimentary constituents, inorganic deep-sea sediment, pelagic and non-
pelagic biogenous and chemical composition of sediments.
Lab. Work:
Seawater and sediment collection techniques, Sample collection and

preservation, Salinity measurement, Analysis of seawater for dissolved
gasses, nutrients and chlorophyll, Field visit.
Recommended Books:
1. Brightwell, C., 2007. Marine Chemistry.

2. Gianguzza, A., Pelizzetti, E. and Sammartano, S., 1997. Marine
Chemistry: an Environmental Analytical Chemistry Approach.
3. Horne, R.A., 1969. Marine Chemistry: the Structure of Water and the
Chemistry of the Hydrosphere.
4. Riley, J.P. and Chester, R., 1971. Introduction to Marine Chemistry,
Academic Press.
5. Riley, J.P. and Skirrow, G., 1975. Chemical Oceanography. Academic
Press.
6. Satanarayana, D., 2007. Marine Chemistry.
MS-511 MARINE GEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh

72
Objectives:
To give detail overview of the structure, evolution and geological

processes of the ocean basin and continental margin. This course will
enable the students to fully understand the marine environment, what
dynamic processes shape the surface of the earth under the ocean
surface, sedimentation processes, and Sediment distribution on seafloor.
Course Outline:
Exercise of marine charts, navigation, bathymetry, marine acoustics, high

resolution seismic, geography of marine environment. Sea floor spreading
and plate tectonics. Marine sediments and seabed classification.
Lab. Work:
Specific exercises/ Field Assignments.

Recommended Books:
1. Anderson, R.N., 1986. Marine Geology: A Planet Earth Perspective.

John Wiley.
2. Anonymous, Initial Reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, Washington,
D.C.
3. Kennett, J.P. 1982. Marine Geology. Prentice-Hall, INC, Englewood
Cliffs, N.J.
4. Nairn, A.E.M. and Stehli, F.G., 1973. The Ocean Basins and Margins. The
South Atlantic. Plenum, New York.
5. Pinet, P.R., 1992. Oceanography, an Introduction to the Planet
Oceanus. West Publishing Company, New York.
6. Popkin, B.W., Grosline, D.S. and Hammond, D.E., 1987. Laboratory
Exercises in Oceanography 2nd Edition by W.H. Freeman and Company.
New York.
7. Seibold, E. and Berger, W.H., 1993. The Sea Floor: An In Introduction to
Marine Geology by Heidelberg, Germany: Springer-Verlag.2nd Edition.
SIXTH SEMESTER
7. Thomas M. Lillesand & Ralph W. Kiefer (Year 2000) Remote Sensing
73
and Image Interpretation John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
CLIMATOLOGY AND Formatted Table

MS-502 3 Crh
CLIMATE CHANGE
Objectives:
Climate change is one of the most controversial issues of the 21st century.
This introductory course presents Earth’s climate system and explores
the science and related issues of global climate change.
Course Outline:
Course Outline: Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Fundamental principles of climatology; Earth-Sun relationship: earth's

radiation balance, latitudinal and seasonal variation of insolation,
temperature, humidity and precipitation rate in Pakistan with special
reference to seasonal distribution and variations of temperature and wind;
air masses notably monsoons' and jet streams, tropical cyclones, and
cloud formation, classification of climates. Hydrological cycle and water
balance. Climate change; greenhouse warming, stratospheric ozone
depletion. Paleoclimatology. Principal seasons of subcontinent, winter
season; western disturbances, anticyclones and associated weather, fog,
hail, thunderstorms, cold waves, subtropical westerly jet stream,
Monsoon season; cyclonic storms, dust storm, heat waves, southwest
monsoon season, north-east monsoon; active and break cycle, monsoon
depressions, rainfall and its variability, drought, aridity, cyclonic storms
in Arabian sea.
Lab. Work:
Not Required
Recommended Books:
1. Barry, Atmosphere, Weather and Climate.

1. Flannery, T., Physical Climatology by Sellers.
2. Introduction to Climates by Trewartha.
3. Climatology by Haurwitz & Austin.
4. World Climatology by Lockwood.
5.2. The Weather Makers: Our Changing Climate and Whatwhat it
Meansmeans for Life on Earth by Tim Flannery.
6. Atmosphere, Weather and Climate by Barry.
MS-503 HYDROGRAPHY 3 Crh

Objectives:
74
To cover fundamental aspects of hydrography, a curriculum required for
a field hydrographic surveyor.
Course Outline:
Mobile mapping systems, hydrography to support Port Management and
coastal engineering and offshore construction. Tide observation and
reduction. Positioning, tides, bathymetry and the first project calibrating a
hydrographic measurement system. Acquisition systems, sensor
calibration, GNSS practice and including project management.
Hydrographic Data Management. Nautical Charting Hydrography.
Lab. Work:
Not Required
Recommended Books:
1. Caspers, H., 1964. Hela, Ilmo, and Taivo Laevastu: Fisheries Hydrography.
How Oceanography and Meteorology can and do serve fisheries. With 67 fig.
London: Fishing News (Books) Ltd., 137 pp.
3. Haurwitz and Austin, Climatology.
4. Lockwood, World Climatology.
5. Sellers, Physical Climatology.
6. Trewartha, Introduction to Climates.
2. De Jong C.D., Lachapelle, G., Skone, S., and Elema I.A., 2003.
Hydrography. 2nd Ed., Delft University Press, NL., 353 pp.
3. Ingham, Ae. and Abbott, V. J., 1993. Hydrography for the Surveyor and
Engineer. 3rd Ed., Wiley-Blackwell, 144 pp
4. Anonymous, 2005. Manual on Hydrography. International Hydrographic
Bureau, Monaco.
INTRODUCTION TO Formatted Table

MS-504 2+1=3 Crh
AQUACULTURE
Objectives:
To develop the basic learning and practical knowledge in the field of

aquaculture.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
75
Introduction to Aquaculture, History and scope of aquaculture. Site and
species selection criteria. Sources of seed. Systems of aquaculture (pond,
cage, pen and race-ways culture) their planning, construction, and
management. Types of Aquaculture such as extensive, semi-extensive,
intensive, mono, poly and integrated. Water quality parameters (abiotic:
temperature, light, salinity, pH, turbidity, etc.) and Biotic parameters
(Plankton, insects, aquatic vegetation, etc.) and their effect on fish
production, food and feeding of fish. Artificial and natural fish food, feed
formula and ingredients, Fish diseases and their control. Production
harvest, preservation, processing and transportation. Fish marketing and
economics.
Lab. Work:
Water quality assessment and management. Morphological characters of

typical fish, morphometric, species identification, fin formula, etc., key to
identification of commercial shrimp and fishes. Visit to fish farm, visit to
fish market. Formulation and preparation of artificial feed in laboratory.
Estimation of feed conversion efficiency Estimation of specific growth rate
from data obtained. Fish diseases (bacterial, fungal and parasitic) samples
study and slides.
Recommended Books:
1. Bardach, J.E., 1997. Aquatic Engineering (Mike Walker).

2.1. Sustainable Aquaculture. (J.E. Bardach).
2. Bardach, J.E., Sustainable Aquaculture.
3. Beveridge, M., 2004. Fish Hatchery and Management (G. Wedemeyer).
4.3. Cage Aquaculture. by M. Beveridge. 2004
5.4. FAO, Hatchery hatchery Manual.
6. Pillay, Responsible Marine Aquaculture. Edited by Stickney and JP
McVey, 2002.
7.5. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. T.V.R. Pillay and M. N. Kutty,
M.N., 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices.
8.6. Pillay, T.V.R.,. 2002. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. Blackwell.
9. Shepherd, J. and Bromage, N., 1992. Sustainable Aquaculture by J. E.
Bardach. 1997.
10.7. Intensive Fish Farming. by Jonathan Shepherd and Niall Bromage
1992.
MS-505 MARINE BIODIVERSITY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
To understand the structure and function of marine biodiversity
components from genes to habitats and develop skills to carry out impact
assessment and conservation.
76
Course Outline:
The structure and functioning of Marine Biodiversity (genus specific
habitats). Impact studies and its relationship with the basic oceanographic
processes. Toolbox for investigating marine biodiversity for attempting
data analysis: experimental design, modeling, taxonomy, Evolution,
Invasive species, data and Information Management, Field observations
and interpretation and Molecular methods; Molecular bar-coding of
biodiversity, Conservation, Laws for conservation, Marine protected
areas. Conservation and Restoration of marine biodiversity and
application of the above mentioned theories and methods in order to
develop a sustainable use of the marine environment.
Lab. Work:
Systematic studies of major biological taxa, field trips on biodiversity in
situ, use of biodiversity indices. Design and present a specific marine
conservation project report writing and discussions covering marine
conservation issues, including informal student presentations on
political, economic, historical, educational as well as natural science
issues related to conservation and analysis of marine biodiversity.
Recommended Books:
8. Stickney and McVey, J.P., (Eds.), 2002. Responsible Marine
Aquaculture.
9. Walker, M., Aquatic Engineering.
10. Wedemeyer, G., Fish Hatchery and Management.
1. Marine Biodiversity: Patterns and Processes, Rupert F. G. Ormond,

John D. Gage, Martin V. Angel - 2005 - 472 pages.
2. The Living Oceans, B. Thorne Miller, Island Press, USA.
3. Marine Conservation Biology: a science of maintaining the Sea’s
Biodiversity, E. Norse and L. Crowder. 1999. Island Press, USA.
4. Marine biodiversity: patterns and processes, assessment, threats,
management and conservation. Henrique Queiroga. 2006 Springer.
5. Biology: the unit and diversity of life (Cecie Starr and Ralph Taggart,
2006; Thomson Learning Inc.).
6. Species Richness: patterns in the diversity of life (Jonathan Adams and
Jonathan S. Adams, 2009; Springer).
7. The Diversity of Life: from single cell to multicellular organisms
(Roberst Snedden, 2007; Heinemann Lib).
MS-506 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
77
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Ocean dimensions, shape and bottom material, Physical Properties of

Seawater, Chlorinity, salinity, thermal properties, T-S diagram, density,
pressure, optical properties, transmission of sound, Equation of state of
seawater, General ocean circulation, dynamics of circulation, Ekman flow,
Upwelling, convergence, Western and Eastern boundary currents,
thermohaline circulation, formation of water masses; Ocean Waves and
Tides, Coastal Processes, Long shore currents, Rip currents, Hydraulic
regime, oceanography of Arabian sea.
Lab. Work:
Plotting and understanding basic Oceanographic parameters and

sampling techniques, instruments and methods, Tests of different
parameters. Demonstration of tidal pattern. T-S diagram. Data handling
and processing using dedicated software.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, Compendium on UN Law of the Sea.

1. Gross,Descriptive Physical Oceanography, by G., . L. Pickard and
William J. Emery.
2. Oceanography, An introduction to the Marine Environment by Peter K.
Weyl.
3.2. Oceanography: A view of the Earth. by Grant Gross.
4. Pickard, G.L. and Emery, W.J., Descriptive Physical Compendium on
UN Law of the Sea.
3. Oceanography.
5.4. Pinet, P.R., 1992. Oceanography:, An Introduction to the Planet
Oceanus. 1992 by Paul R. Pinet.
6.5. The Ocean by Severdrup, Johnson and, Fleming, The Ocean. .
SIXTH SEMESTER
MS-507 COASTAL PROCESSES 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
78
Study the effects of seawater movement on the coastal sediments, role of
beach sediments in the protection of coasts, anthropogenic activities that
alter the beach profile.
Course Outline:
Waves, tides, coastal currents. Distribution of sediment on the beach.
Beach drift, Factors responsible for coastal erosion, coastal accretion, sea
intrusion classification of sediments, sediment budget, coastal sediment
transport, shoreline protection. Protection of chronically eroding beaches,
types of hard stabilization for protection of coastal areas, Natural beach
nourishment. Anthropogenic activities, beach management. Set back
limits. Shifting of beach dunes. Sediments pathways in the Deep sea
sedimentation, Minerals in the sediments. Why do Creeks Meander.
Formation of deltas. Barrier island formation, Options for Management of
Coastal areas.
Lab. Work:
Microscopic examination of beach sediments, identification of Biogenic
oozes. Placer minerals, Sediment grain size analysis using a standard
sieve shaker. Monitoring beach changes. Measuring beach slope. Case
study of erosional beaches, creeks and islands etc.
Recommended Books:
6. Coastal Processes: Concepts in Coastal Engineering and their
Application to multifarious environment by Tomoya Shibayama.Weyl,
P.K., Oceanography, An introduction to the Marine Environment.
79
1.
2. Coastal Processes: Volume 126; by C. A. Brebbia, G. Benassai, G. R.
Rodriguez.
3. Coastal processes in tideless seas by Ruben Derenikovich Kosian, Nikola!
Valentinovich Pykhov, Billy L. Edge.
4. Coastal lagoon processes by Bjorn Kjerfve.
5. Coastal and estuarine fine sediment processes by William H. McAnally,
Ashish J. Mehta.
MS-508 MARINE BIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To introduce basic concepts of oceanography, biodiversity, ecology and

evolution as they pertain to marine coastal environments. To learn
through theoretical and practical exercises how environmental and
biological factors interact to sustain near-shore ecosystems. To acquire
field skills to study marine near-shore environments. To improve
discussion, analytical, presentation and writing skills.
Course Outline:
Biodiversity of different shore types such as rocky, sandy, muddy, rocky-

sandy, rocky-muddy and sandy-muddy shores etc. Seaweeds and
Mangroves. Interaction of biological factors to sustain near-shore
ecosystems. Coral reef systems, physiological and behavioural
adaptations that enable organisms to live in a particular environment.
Basic ecological principles, marine conservation, metapopulations-
dynamics, adaptation to climate change, and conservation genetics.
Lab. Work:
Field trips of different shore types.

Recommended Books:
1. Bertness, Gaines and Hay,: Marine Community Ecology. Sinauer

Associates, Inc. ISBN 0-87893-057-4. Library call number:
QH541.5.S3M256 2001
2. Human, The Reef Set: Reef Fish, Reef Creature and Reef Coral (3
Volumes). New World Publications, Inc.Morrissey and Sumich: Biology
of Marine Life. 9th edition. Jones and Bartlett Publishers.
2. Kaplan: ISBN 1-878348-32-9.
3. Kaplan, Coral Reefs. Peterson Field Guide. Houghton Mifflin Company. ISBN
0-618-00211-1.
4. Kaplan,: Southeastern and Caribbean Seashores. Peterson Field Guide.
Houghton Mifflin Company. ISBN-13 978-0-395-97516-9.
5. Human: The Reef Set: Reef Fish, Reef Creature and Reef Coral (3
80
Volumes). New World Publications, Inc. ISBN 1-878348-32-9.
5. Morrissey and Sumich, Biology of Marine Life. 9th edition. Jones and
Bartlett Publishers.
6. Trujillo and Thurman, Essentials of Oceanography, 10 edn. Prentice Hall.
ISBN-13: 9780321668127.
6.7. Wisehart,: A Photographic Atlas of Marine Biology. Morton Publishing
Company. ISBN: 9780895827852. Library call number QH91.17.W57 2012
7. Trujillo and Thurman: Essentials of Oceanography, 10 edn. Prentice Hall.
ISBN-13: 9780321668127. Library call number GC11.2.T49 2011
MS-509 MARINE CHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh
Objectives:
Concept development of Marine Chemistry.
Course Outline:
General introduction and history, Chemical composition of seawater,
Physico-chemical properties of seawater (Structure, Chlorinity, Salinity,
Refractive index, Electrical conductivity, Density, Temperature), Dissolved
gases Solubility, distribution, Atmospheric exchange, CO2 equilibria),
Micronutrients (Composition, Distribution, Cycles), Minor and Major
elements, Dissolved organic particulates, Radioisotopes, Primary
productivity in relation to chemical constituents. Basic marine
sedimentary constituents, inorganic deep-sea sediment, pelagic and non-
pelagic biogenous and chemical composition of sediments.
Lab. Work:
Seawater and sediment collection techniques, Sample collection and Formatted: Normal, Left
preservation, Salinity measurement, Analysis of seawater for dissolved

gasses, nutrients and chlorophyll, Field visit. Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 12 pt, Not Bold
Recommended Books:
1. Marine chemistry: an environmental analytical chemistry approach

Antonio Gianguzza, Ezio Pelizzetti, Silvio Sammartano - 1997.
2. Marine Chemistry D. Satanarayana - 2007.
3. Marine Chemistry Chris Brightwell - 2007.
4. Marine chemistry: the structure of water and the chemistry of the
hydrosphere Ralph Albert Horne - 1969.
5. J.P. Riley and R. Chester, 1971, Introduction to Marine Chemistry,
Academic Press.
6. J.P. Riley and G. Skirrow, 1975, Chemical Oceanography (Vol ),
Academic Press. Formatted: Font: 9 pt, Font color: Black, English (United
Kingdom)
MS-510 MARINE GEOCHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted: Left, Widow/Orphan control

Formatted Table
81
Objectives:
The course has been designed to provide background for and exposure
to current research in marine geochemistry to understand the role of
physical, chemical, biological processes in controlling chemical
distribution in the marine environment.
Course Outline:
Sources and transport of material to the ocean (atmosphere, river,

hydrothermal, relative flux magnitude). Ocean as reservoir (Nutrients,
Organic carbon and carbon cycle, particulate material) in seawater.
Formation, classification, distribution, chemical composition and
chemical signatures of marine sediments. The geochemical cycle and the
composition of ocean water. Trace elements in the ocean, Residence time
and Reactivity of elements. The composition of oceanic suspended
matter. The geochemistry of Marine sediments, Sediment interstitial
waters and digenesis. Organic matter production, accumulation and
preservation. Marine carbonates, Isotopes in marine sediments. Chemical
characteristics of Hydrothermal vent fluids, Ferromanganese deposits in
the ocean. Geochemical Proxies and global environmental history.
Geochemical models.
Lab. Work:
Residence time and Reactivity of Major Elements, Calculation of Chemical

Fluxes, Paleo-productivity, Interpretation of Geochemical Proxies.
Geochemical analysis of Marine Sediments.
Recommended Books:
1. Tracers in the sea by Broecker, W.-S. and, Peng, T.H., 1982. Tracers in
the Sea., Eldigio, Palisades.
2. Chester, R., 1990. Marine Geochemistry. by Chester, R; 1990, Chapman and
Hall, London.
3. Particle Flux in the Ocean by Ittekkot and et al (eds) 1996, Wiley and Sons.
New York.
4.3. Methods of Seawater Analysis, Grasshoff, K., Kremling, K. and
Ehrhardt, M., 1999. Methods of Seawater Analysis., Wiley-VCH, New
York.
4. Ittekkot et al., (Eds.), 1996. Particle Flux in the Ocean. Wiley and Sons. New
York.
5. Ocean Biogeochemical Dynamics by Sarmiento, J. L. and N. Gruber,
2006. Ocean Biogeochemical Dynamics., Princeton University Press.
6. Marine Geochemistry by Schulz, H. D., and Zabel, M., (Eds.),. (eds), 2002.
Marine Geochemistry., Springer.
7. Coastal upwelling: Its sedimentary record, Part B: Sedimentary records
of ancient coastal upwelling by Thiede, J. and Suess, E., (Eds.), (eds),
1983. Coastal Upwelling: Its Sedimentary Record. Part B: Sedimentary
Records of Ancient Coastal upwelling., Plenum Press. New York.
82
8. Modern and ancient continental shelf anoxia by Tyson, R.V and Pearson,
T.H., (Eds.),. (eds); 1991. Modern and Ancient Continental Shelf Anoxia.,
Geol. Soc. Spec. Publ; 58, Blackwell, Oxford.
9. Whelan, J.K. and Farrington, J.W., (Eds.), 1992. Organic matter:
Productivity, accumulation and preservation in recent and ancient
sediments. by Whelan, J.k and Farrington, J.W. (eds), 1992, Columbia
University Press. New York.
MS-511 MARINE GEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh

Objectives:
To give detail overview of the structure, evolution and geological
processes of the ocean basin and continental margin. This course will
enable the students to fully understand the marine environment, what
dynamic processes shape the surface of the earth under the ocean
surface, sedimentation processes, and Sediment distribution on seafloor.
Course Outline:
Exercise of marine charts, navigation, bathymetry, marine acoustics, high
resolution seismic, geography of marine environment. Sea floor spreading
and plate tectonics. Marine sediments and seabed classification.
Lab. Work:
Specific exercises/ Field Assignments.
Recommended Books:
11. Marine Geology: A planet Earth Perspective by Anderson, R.N.1986,
John Wiley.
12. Marine Geology by James P. Kennett, 1982, Prentice-Hall, INC,
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.
13. Initial Reports of the Deep Sea Drilling Project, Washington, D.C.
14. The Ocean Basins and Margins by Nairn, A.E.M. and Stehli,F.G, 1973,
The South Atlantic. Plenum, New York.
15. Oceanography, an introduction to the planet oceanus by Pinet Paul R.
1992, West publishing company, New York.
16. Laboratory Exercises in Oceanography 2 nd Edition by Popkin, B.W.,
Grosline, D.S. and Hammond, D.E., 1987, W.H. Freeman and Company.
New York.
17. The Sea Floor: An In Introduction to Marine Geology by Seibold, E. and
Berger, W.H., 1993, Heidelberg, Germany: Springer-Verlag.2nd Edition.
MS-512 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To prepare students have better understanding of different research

methods and analyse data.
83
Course Outline:
Research design, Personal Statement, Research Proposal, Research

Question or Problem Statement, Samples and Sampling techniques,
Qualitative and quantitative methods, Research Techniques (Structured
interviews, questionnaires, interpretive biographies, focus groups,
participant observation), Modes of analysis (Thematic and content
analysis) results and its interpretations, References and references styles,
Research ethics.
Lab Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Finney, D. J., 1952. Statistical method in biological assay (No. 574.182 F55
1978.). London: Griffin.
2. Gill, P., Stewart, K., Treasure, E., & Chadwick, B., 2008. Methods of data
collection in qualitative research: interviews and focus groups. British dental
journal, 204(6): 291-295.
3. Hinkle, D. E., Wiersma, W. and Jurs, S.G., 2003. Applied statistics for the
behavioral sciences.
4. Kothari, C. R., 2004. Research methodology: Methods and techniques. New
Age International.
5. Kumar, S. and Phrommathed, P., 2005. Research methodology. Springer,
US, p. 43-50.
6. Teddlie, C. and Tashakkori, A., (Eds.), 2009. Foundations of mixed methods
research: Integrating quantitative and qualitative approaches in the social
and behavioral sciences. Sage Publications Inc.
84
SEVENTH AND EIGHTH SEMESTER
MAJOR ELECTIVE MODULES
Module I: Biological Oceanography and Conservation (BOC)
AQUATIC PATHOLOGY
MS-BOC-601 2+1=3 Crh
AND PESTS
Objectives:
To study about symptom, causes and cure of diseases of aquatic

organisms.
Course Outline:
Inflammation and immune response and pathological changes in tissues.

Signs of sickness and effect on fish and mode of contractions of infection.
Nutritional diseases and elements from environmental factors. Disease
caused by parasites and pathogens and its control measures. Fungal
Diseases, Bacterial Diseases. Protozoan Diseases. Worm Diseases.
Crustacean Diseases.
Lab. Work:
Methods of sampling fish and shellfish for disease diagnosis. Bacterial,

fungal, viral and parasitical diseases. Live and post mortem examination
of diseased fish. Collection and identification of parasites. Morphological,
biochemical and biological tests of bacteria, virus and fungi.
Immunological and molecular disease diagnostic techniques. Antibiotic
sensitivity assays. Techniques in histology. Pathological changes in
different organ systems associated with different pathogens. Symptoms
and Methods of treatment. Bacterial diseases in shrimps. Diseases of cultural
fish species from Pakistan coastline. Methods of vaccines and vaccination.
Recommended Books:
1. R. Ramachandran Nair Encyclopaedia of fish disease.

2.1. K.P. Biswas, K.P. Prevention and control of fish and Prawn diseases.
3. B.K. Mishra, P. Swain, P.K.Sahoo, B.K.Das, N.Sarangi. Disease
management in FW Pisiculture.
4. Wheaton, F.W. Aquacultural Engineering.
5.2. Bose et al. Coastal Aquacultural Engineering.
3. Mishra, B.K., Swain, P., Sahoo, P.K., Das, B.K. and Sarangi, N. Disease
Management in FW Pisiculture.
4. Nair, R.R., Encyclopaedia of Fish Disease.
8. Post, G., Textbook of Fish Health.
9. Roberts R.J., Fish Pathology.
85
5. Schaperclaus, Fish Diseases.
6. Sinderman C.J.,. Principle diseases of Marine fish and shell fish.
7. Wheaton, F.W., Aquacultural Engineering.
7. Schaperclaus Fish Diseases.

8. Roberts R.J. Fish Pathology.
9. Post, G. Text Book of Fish Health.
MS-BOC-602 BIOPHYSICS 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The students having the knowledge of Biology and Physics would learn
biophysical processes during this course.
Course Outline:
Nature and scope of biophysics; Molecular Structure of Biological Systems;

Chemical binding, energies and bonds; Energy transfer and transformation in
photosynthesis and biological membranes; Dynamics of biological systems;
Fundamental concepts of thermodynamics, aqueous and ionic equilibrium of
living cells; Other biotransport processes; Long and short distance transports;
Viscoelestic properties of biomaterials. The biomechanics of human body, blood
circulation, swimming and flying; Physical factors of the environment; Biophysics
of hearing, infra and ultrasounds; Biomagnetism: Magnetic effects on humans
and other organisms; Ionizing radiations; Radiobiological reactions; Vision,
biosensing and biomechanics; Models approaches for propagation, ecological
interactions, growth, differentiation evolution and neural process.
Lab. Work:
1. Study of transport processes in plants, 2. Study of membrane potential and

redox, 3. Study of germination and growth biology magnetized and irradiated
seeds, 4. Monitoring studies of body temperature in organisms under stress, 5.
Determination of osmotic potential, pressure potential and water potential in
plants, 6. Ion uptake and balance of charge measurements, 7. Study of
biosensing and bioindication, 8. Study of threshold of hearing, ECG and blood
pressure monitoring in humans.
Recommended Books:
1. Ackerman E.A. Ellis, L.E.E. and& Williams L.E., . (1979.), Biophysical

Science, Prentice-Hall Inc.
2. Banks S.M., 1983. Photosynthetic system: structure function and symmetry,
John Willey and Sons.
2.3. Cantor C.R. and Schimmel P.R., . (1980.), Biophysical chemistry, W.A.
Fremman and Co.
3.4. Hughes W., . (1979.), Aspects of Biophysics, John Willey and Aons.
86
4.5. Pullman B., . (1978.), Molecular Association in Biology, Academic Press.
5.6. Setlow R.B. and pollard E.L., . (1962.), Molecular Biophysics., Pergamon
Press.
8. Sickevitz, L. and Menninger, G., 1991. Cell Structure and Function, Sounders
College Pub.
9. Skulachev, V.P., 1988. Membrane Bioenergetics Springer-Verlag.
6.7. Stanford J.R., . (1975.), Foundation of Biophysics Academic press.
7. Banks S.M. (1983), Photosynthetic system: structure function and symmetry,
John Willey and sons.
8. Loewy Sickevitz, Menninger, Gallant (1991), Cell structure and function,
Sounders college pub.
9. Vladimir P. Skulachev (1988), Membrane Bioenergetics, Springer-verlag.
87
CELL AND Formatted Table
EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY
Objectives:
To understand evolution at cellular and molecular level.

Course Outline:
Evolutionary theory and genetical basis of evolution, fundamental principles

of population genetics and comparative genomics. Cell structure and function
at molecular level, Structure and function of macro-molecules, nucleic
acid and information storage, translation into RNA and protein., Control of
gene expression, Cell signalling. Classical population genetics, quantitative
genetics, molecular evolution, human evolution, phylogenomics and speciation.
Lab. Work:
Students will be assigned problem sets during lectures as well as computational

resources, tools be introduced during labs.
Recommended Books:
1. Bitter, E., 1991. Evolutionary Biology. (Edward Bitter 1991; JAI Press.).
2. Hartt, D.L. and Johns, E.W., 2009. Genetics. Johns and Barlett Learning.
2.3. Klugg, W.S. and Cummings M.R., 2002. Concepts of Genetics.
(William S. Klugg and Micheal R. Cummings 2002; Merill Publishing
Co..).
4. Williams, G., 2000. Advanced Biology for You. Nelson Thompson.
3. Wo, R. and Ma, C-X., 2007. Genetics (Denial L. Hartt and Elisabeth W. Johns
2009; Johns and Barlett Learning).
4.5. Statistical Genetics of Quantitative trades: linkage map and QTL.
(Rongling Wo and Chang-Xing Ma 2007; Springer.).
88
5. Advanced Biology for You (Gareth Williams 2000; Nelson Thompson).
MS-BOC-604 CHEMISTRY OF LIFE 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand the chemical and physiological behaviour of cell.

Course Outline:
Structure, evolution and simple biochemistry of cell, Cell physiology,

Special topics in aquatic biochemistry (bioluminescence, osmoregulation,
tolerance to extreme environments). Organic chemistry and biochemistry
including proteins, DNA, RNA, and chemical origins of life. Nature of chemical
and biochemical discoveries.
Lab. Work:
Estimation of basic biochemical compounds (total proteins, lipids,

carbohydrates). Estimation of amino acids, fatty acids and sugars.
Estimation of total chlorophyll and other pigments in seawater.
Assessment of photosynthesis (light and dark bottle experiment).
Recommended Books:
1. Biochemistry (Marry K. Campbell, M.K. 2007. Biochemistry.; Thompson

Publ..).
2. Canfield, D.E. Learning Principles of Biochemistry (Albert Lehninger
and Kristensen, E., David Lee Nelson, 2005. ; W. H. Freemann).
3. Biochemistry (Geoffary L. Zubay, 1983; Addison-Wesley).
4.2. Aquatic Geomicrobiology. (Donald E. Canfield and Erick Kristensen, Formatted: Font: Italic
2005; Elsevier.).
3. Lehninger, A. and Nelson, D.L., 2005. Learning Principles of
Biochemistry. W. H. Freemann.
5. Karen C. Timberlake, K.C., Chemistry: An Introduction to General, Organic Formatted: Justified
and Biological Chemistry., 12th Edition, Pearson.

4. Zubay, G.L., 1983. Biochemistry. Addison-Wesley.
89
MS-BOC-605 CONSERVATION ECOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course would focus on the concepts and theories in ecology that have the
greatest potential for conserving biological diversity.
Course Outline:
Extent of life forms and theory/ practices behind maintaining biodiversity,

Habitat level management: issues of habitat damage or loss, Basics of
coastal zone management: management and co-management - local,
regional and global perspective. Invasive species, Climate adaptation,
Conservation and the human population.
Lab. Work:
Case studies: students are required to select a site or community, collect

data, and design a management plan for that particular site or community.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, Marine Conservation Biology: Science of maintaining the

Sea’s Biodiversity.
2. Boyd, L., Bowen, W.D. and Iverson, S.J., 2010. Marine Mammal
Ecology and conservation: A handbook of Techniques. Oxford
University Press.
3. Cote, I.M. and Reynolds, J.D., 2006. Coral Reef Conservation.
1.4. Dyke, F.V. 2008. Conservation Biology: foundations concepts,
applications., Fred V. Dyke 2008, 2nd Edition, Springer.
5. Groom, Meffe, and Carroll, Principles of Conservation Biology. 3rd Edition.
6. Hunter, M.L. and Gibbs, J.P., 2007. Fundamentals of Conservation
Biology. Blackwell Publishing.
7. Norse, E.A. and Crowder, L.B., 2005. Marine Conservation Biology
Institute, USA.
8. Ryth M. and Lindholm, J., Dynamic Modeling for Marine Conservation.
Springer Verlag, USA.
2.9. Soule, M.E. and Wilcox, B.A., 1980. Conservation Biology: an evolutionary- Formatted: Justified
90
ecological perspective. M. E. Soule and B. A. Wilcox, 1980.
3. Spotila, J.R., 2004. Fundamentals of Conservation Biology, M. L.
Hunter and J. P. Gibbs, 2007, Blackwell Publishing.
4. Marine Conservation Biology: Science of maintaining the Sea’s
Biodiversity.
5. Elliott A Norse and L. B. Crowder, 2005, Marine Conservation Biology
Institute, USA.
6. Dynamic modeling for marine conservation. M. Ryth & J. Lindholm.
Springer Verlag, USA.
7.10. Sea Turtles: A complete guide to their biology, behaviour and
conservation. J. R. Spotila. 2004, Johns Hopkins University Press
USA.
8. Coral Reef Conservation. I. M. Cote and J. D. Reynolds. 2006,

9. Marine Mammal Ecology and conservation: A handbook of
Techniques. L. Boyd, W. D. Bowen and S. J. Iverson, 2010. Oxford
University Press.
10. Principles of Conservation Biology, 3rd Edition by Groom, Meffe, and Carroll.
MS-BOC-606 FAUNISTIC STUDIES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The aim of this course is to provide thorough knowledge about the diversity of
invertebrates and vertebrates like birds, fish, amphibians, reptiles and mammals,
as well as understanding of how knowledge about these organisms can be
applied in conservation biology and environmental work.
Course Outline:
Animal groups of invertebrates and vertebrates i.e. fish, amphibians/ reptiles,

mammals and birds. Identification of species comprises appearance and
in certain cases also sounds, tracks and other signs. Use of identification
literature. Adaptations to the environment, animal communities,
reproduction and dissemination strategies, as well as inventory methods.
Lab. Work:
Collection, preservation and identification of marine organisms.
????????????????????????????????
Recommended Books:
91
1. Gassmann, D., Ed., 2015. Faunistic Studies in South-East Asian and
Pacific Island Odonata. Volume 10: 1-46.
2. Watson, M.F., Lyal, C.H.C. and Pendry, C.A., 2015. Descriptive Taxonomy:
The Foundation of Biodiversity of Research. Cambridge University Press.
338 pp.
3. Tambs-Lyche, H., 1958. Zoogeographical and Faunistic Studies on West
Norwegian Marine Animals. Biological Station, Espegrend, Grieg. 24 pp.
4.2. Moraitou-Apostolopoulou, M. and Kiortsis, V., Es., 2013.
Mediterranean Marine Ecosystems. Volume 8 of Nato Conference
Series I Ecology. Springer Science & Business Media. University of
Athens, Greece, 408 pp.
3. Tambs-Lyche, H., 1958. Zoogeographical and Faunistic Studies on West
Norwegian Marine Animals. Biological Station, Espegrend, Grieg. 24 pp.
4. Watson, M.F., Lyal, C.H.C. and Pendry, C.A., 2015. Descriptive Taxonomy:
The Foundation of Biodiversity of Research. Cambridge University Press.
338 pp.
MS-BOC - 607 HARMFUL MARINE CREATURES 3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course provides general information on dangerous marine life that may be
encountered during marine operations. This course is designed to teach students
how to avoid these organisms to minimize the chance of injury and how to apply
basic first aid specific to the injuries caused by each dangerous plant or animal.
Course Outline:
Predatory (Sharks, Killer Whales, Barracuda, Moray Eels, Sea Lions),

Venomous Fish (Excluding Stonefish, Zebrafish, Scorpionfish; and Highly
Toxic Fish (Stonefish, Zebrafish, Scorpionfish), Stingrays, Coelenterates,
Octopuses, Segmented Worms (Annelida; e.g. Bloodworm, Bristleworm),
Cone Shells, Sea Snakes and Poisonous marine animals. Ciguatera Fish
92
Poisoning, Scombroid Fish Poisoning, Puffer (Fugu) Fish Poisoning,
Paralytic Shellfish Poisoning (PSP; Red Tide), Sea Cucumbers and
Parasitic Infestation. First Aid and Treatment.
Lab. Work:
Not required.
Recommended Books:
1. Auerbach P.S. and Greehr E.C., Eds., 1983. Management of

Wilderness and Environmental Emergencies. Macmillan Publishing
Co., New York.
1.2. Auerbach, P.S. and Halstead, B.W., 1982. Prevention and Treatment of
Dangerous Marine Animal Injuries. International Bio-toxicological
Centre, World Life Research Institute, Colton, CA.
10. Auerbach, P.S., 1991. A Medical Guide to Hazardous Marine Life.
Second Edition, Mosby Yearbook.
2. Auerbach P.S. and Greehr E.C., Eds., 1983. Management of
Wilderness and Environmental Emergencies. Macmillan Publishing
Co., New York.
3. Budkur, P., 1971. The Life of Sharks. Columbia University Press, NY.
4. Cousteau, J. Y., 1970. Sharks. Doubleday, Garden City, NY.
5. Dembert, M.L., Strosahl, K. and Bumgarner, R.L., 1981. Fish and
Shellfish Acquired Diseases. American Family Physician, 24: 103-108.
6. Diving and Subaquatic Medicine, Diving Medical Centre, Masman
N.S.W., Australia; 1981, Second edition; C. Edmonds, C. Lowry and C.
Pennefather.
7. Edmonds, C., Dangerous Marine Creatures, Reed Book Ptg., Ltd., 2
Aquatic Drive, French’s Forest, NSW 20806 Australia.
7.8. Poisonous and Venomous Marine Animals of the World, Darwin Press
Inc., Princeton, NJ; 1978; B. W. Halstead.
8.9. Schwartz, G., Sofar, P., Stone, J., Starey, P. and Wagner, D., 1978.
Principles and Practice of Emergency Medicine, W. B. Saunders Co.,
Philadelphia, PA, p. 812-815.
9. Edmonds, C., Dangerous Marine Creatures, Reed Book Ptg., Ltd., 2
Aquatic Drive, French’s Forest, NSW 20806 Australia.
10. Auerbach, P.S., 1991. A Medical Guide to Hazardous Marine Life.
Second Edition, Mosby Yearbook.
MS-BOC - 608 IMMUNOLOGY 2+1=3Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The primary goals of this course are to learn about the cellular and protein
components of the mammalian immune system, and to gain an
understanding of how they function.
93
Course Outline:
Introduction; Basic Concepts in Immunology, Cells and Organs of the

Immune System, Innate immunity, Antigens, Immunoglobulins, Antibody-
Antigen Interactions, Immunoglobulin Genes; Organization and
Expression, B-Cell Maturation, Activation and Differentiation, Major
Histocompatibility Complex, Antigen Processing and Presentation, T-Cell
Receptor, T-Cell Maturation, Activation, and Differentiation, Cytokines,
The Complement System, Leukocyte Migration and Inflammation, Cell-
Mediated and Humoral Effector Responses, Hypersensitive Reactions,
Vaccines, Immune Response to Infectious Diseases, Autoimmunity,
Immunodeficiency Diseases, The Immune System in AIDS,
Transplantation Immunology, and Cancer and the Immune System.
Lab. Work:
Specific case studies and assignments etc.

Recommended Books:
1. Caroprese, M., Ciliberti, M. G. and Albenzio, M., 2015. Immunological

Activity of Marine Microalgae Extracts, in Marine Algae Extracts:
Processes, Products, and Applications. (Eds. Kim, S.-K. and
Chojnacka, K.), Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim,
Germany.
1.2. Janeway’s Immunobiology 8e, 2011, Murphy, Garland Publishing.
2.3. Secombes, C.J. and Ellis, A.E., 2012. The Immunology of Teleosts. (Ed.,
Roberts, R.J.), Wiley-Blackwell, Oxford, UK.
3. Caroprese, M., Ciliberti, M. G. and Albenzio, M., 2015. Immunological

Activity of Marine Microalgae Extracts, in Marine Algae Extracts:
Processes, Products, and Applications. (Eds Kim, S.-K. and Chojnacka,
K.), Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, Germany.
MS-BOC-609 INVERTEBRATE BIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
94
Objectives:
The aim of this course is to provide thorough knowledge about the diversity of
invertebrates and their biology. To survey the diversity of the invertebrate animal
phyla by comparing the body‐plans, life histories, and ecologies of representative
species. To understand some of the behavioural habits, such as feeding
behaviour, migration, locomotion, and reproduction of each group.
Course Outline:
Introduction to marine invertebrate, taxonomy, morphology and ecology

of invertebrate animals. Review and diversity of all animal phyla to at least
the Linnaean Class level (except for vertebrates). Diversity of the
invertebrates. Reproduction and Development, Evolution of
Developmental Patterns, Porifera, Echinoderms, Mollusks, Arthropods,
Crustaceans: Shrimp, Prawns, Lobsters and Crayfish. Identification,
anatomy and ecological relationships. Commercially important Mollusks
and crustaceans of Pakistan.
Lab. Work:
To identify invertebrate taxa, recognize common local species, identify

common and unknown species, have an understanding of the ecological
relationships of the local species, be able to collect and properly preserve
organisms, be competent in the use of microscopes for dissection and
identification. Identification of intertidal organisms: a) Rocky shore-
Patella, Chiton, Fissurella, Mytilus species, Pernaviridis, Cardium,
Balanus, Gorgonids, Littorina and Corals; b) Sandy shore: Solen,
Umbonium, Oliva, Pea crab, Fiddler crab, Molluscan shells, Star fish and
Balanoglossus; c) Muddy shore: Lingula, Chaetopterus, Arenicola,
Tubiculus worm and Mud skipper.
Recommended Books:
1. Ruppert, E. E., Fox, R. S. and Barnes R. D., 2004. Invertebrate Zoology.

7th Ed., Thompson Brooks/Cole Publ.
2.1. Brusca R.C. and Brusca, G.J., 2002. Invertebrates. 2nd Ed., Sinauer
Associates, Inc., Publishers.
3. Pollock, L.W., 1998. A Practical Guide to the Marine Animals of
Northeastern. Rutgers University Press, North America.
4.2. Gosner, K.L., 1971. Guide to the Identification of Marine and
Estuarine Invertebrates.
5.3. Keith, D. E. 2006. Invertebrate Zoology Laboratory Manual, Tarleton State
University, Biological Sciences, 60 pp.
4. Pollock, L.W., 1998. A Practical Guide to the Marine Animals of
Northeastern. Rutgers University Press, North America.
5. Ruppert, E. E., Fox, R. S. and Barnes R. D., 2004. Invertebrate Zoology.
95
7th Ed., Thompson Brooks/ Cole Publ.
PHYSIOLOGY OF Formatted Table

MARINE ORGANISMS
Objectives:
Comparative study of anatomical and taxonomical features and vital

functions of major invertebrates and vertebrates, Life histories, Defense
mechanism and predation, Food capture and choices, reproduction,
respiration, osmoregulation and excretion, locomotion. Trophic
relationship, ecology and adaptation.
Course Outline:
Comparative study of anatomical, physiological and taxonomical features

and vital functions of marine organisms (phytoplankton, seaweeds,
halophytes, sea grasses and mangroves). Factors effecting plant growth
in the oceans. Photosynthesis and nitrogen fixation, growth and
productivity, useful chemicals from plants.
Lab. Work:
Dissection of type specimens of marine animals (fish, crab, shrimp,

polycheates), study different systems, gut contents studies.
Recommended Books:
1. Anderson, H.T., 1969. The biology of Marine Mammals., Herald T.

Anderson 1969, Academic Press.
2. Becker, E.W., 1994. Microalgae.
3. Chen, F. and Jiang, Y., 2001. Algae and their biotechnological
potential.
4. Clayton, M.N. and Cheshire, L. 1990. Biology of Marine Plants.
5. Dawes, C.J., 1988. Marine Botany.
2.6. Harrison, R.J., 1972. Functional anatomy of marine mammals Volume
2., Richard John Harrison, 1972, Academic Press.
3.7. Hughes, R., 1986. A functional biology of marine gastropods. R.N. Hughes.
1986. Croom Helm. The University of California.
4.8. Laybourm-Parry, 1984. A functional biology of free-living protozoa.
Laybourm-Parry, 1984, University of California Press, Berkley Los
Angeles.
9. South, G.R. and Whittick, A., 1987. Introduction to Phycology.
5.10. Sumich, J.L. and Morrissey, J.F., 2004. Introduction to the biology of
marine life. James L. Sumich and John F. Morrissey. 2004. Johns and
96
Bartlett Publisher, Canada.
6. Biology of marine plants, 1990, Margaret N. Clayton, Longmann

Cheshire.
7. Marine botany, 1988, Clinton J. Dawes.
8. Introduction to Phycology, 1987, Graham Robin South, Alan Whittick.
9. Microalgae, 1994, E. Wolfgang Becker.
10. Algae and their biotechnological potential, 2001, Feng Chen, Yue
Jiang.
MS-BOC-611 PLANKTOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To introduce students tiny suspended marine organisms, their biology and

importance in productivity of marine environment.
Course Outline:
Classification of Plankton (Phytoplankton and Zooplankton), Adaptation

to planktonic life. Factors influencing the distribution and abundance,
plankton bloom, patchiness, vertical distribution and red tide. Algal
Pigments and the Light Environment, Intertidal Zonation, Marine plankton
in relation to fisheries. Indicator species. Harmful algal blooms (HABs),
Phytoplankton: Creators of life, providers of food, saviors of the planet,
Earth’s most Important Phytoplankton: Niches, adaptations, and life
cycles. Photosynthesis and light. Ocean productivity- nutrient
relationships: Seasonal and global distributions of primary production:
Upwelling: How it works and impacts on primary productivity.
Lab. Work:
Collection and identification of common marine and estuarine

phytoplankton and zooplankton. Methods of collection, preservation and
analysis of plankton. Quantification of phytoplankton, Culture, and
Cultivation.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous., 1975. Proposals for standardization of diatom

terminology and diagnoses. Nova HedwigiaBeih. 53: 323.
2. Patrick, R. and C. Reimer., 1975. The Diatoms of the U.S. Vol. 1 and 2.
Monograph 13. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.
97
2.3. Ross, R. et al., 1979. An amended terminology for the silicious
components of the diatom cell. Nova HedwigiaBeih. 64:
3. Patrick, R. and C. Reimer., 1975. The Diatoms of the U.S. Vol. 1 and 2.
Monograph 13. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.
MS-BOC-612 MARINE ANIMAL BEHAVIOUR 2+1=3 Crh

Objectives:
To understand behaviour and biology of marine organisms with respect to

their conservation.
Course Outline:
Study of different groups of animals and plants using live, skeletal and
fossil casts (birds, mammals, turtles, other target groups), Behaviour of
target groups of animals and plants, Threats and issues of target groups
and Conservation strategies.
Lab. Work:
Visits to conservation sites/protected areas. Study of fossil specimen and

skeletal materials Assignment/case study.
Recommended Books:
1. Sumich, J.L., 2004. Marine Mammals: evolutionary Biology. Annalisa

Berta and; Academic Press.
2. Sumich, J.L. and Morrissey, J.F., 2004. Introduction to the Biology of
Marine Life. Johns and Barlett Publishers.
3. Norse, E.A. and Crowder, L.B., 2005. Marine Conservation Biology: the
science of maintaining the sea’s boundary. Island Press.
4.1. Anonymous, 1997. Asian Marine Biology - 14 Hong Kong University
Press.
5.2. Bazler J.A. 2003. Biological Resources in the Electronic Age.
98
Greenwood Publishing Group.
3. Norse, E.A. and Crowder, L.B., 2005. Marine Conservation Biology: the
science of maintaining the sea’s boundary. Island Press.
4. Sumich, J.L. and Morrissey, J.F., 2004. Introduction to the Biology of
Marine Life. Johns and Barlett Publishers.
5. Sumich, J.L., 2004. Marine Mammals: evolutionary Biology. Annalisa
Berta and; Academic Press.
MS-BOC-613 MARINE BOTANY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To recognize marine algae from Pakistani waters. To understand the

identifying characteristics of major classes and families of marine algae. To
classify individual marine flowering plants by class, order, family, genus
and species.
Course Outline:
Introduction to Botany, Introduction to the Algae, types of algae, Life

history and reproduction of Macroalgae Algae (Seaweeds). Food Webs
and other Biota, Quantification of cultured algae: Phylogeny, Molecular
Systematic and Applications, Endosymbiosis and the Origin of Eukaryotic
Algae. Microalgal Ecology. Systematics and Ecology of Seaweeds,
Mangroves, Halophytes and other Marine Vascular and flowering Plants.
Lab. Work:
Collection and identification of common marine and estuarine microalgae,

macroalgae and halophytes. Marine and estuarine submerged aquatic vascular
99
plants (Mangroves morphology, occurrence, and important morphological
measurements.
Recommended Books:
1. Dawes, C.J., 1998. Marine Botany. 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc. 496
pp.
1.2. Fritsch, R.E. 1935. The Structure and Reproduction of the Algae. Vol. 1,
Univ. Press, Cambridge.
2.3. Graham, Graham and Wilcox 2009 Algae 2nd Ed. Benjamin
Cummings.
3. Dawes, C.J., 1998. Marine Botany. 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc. 496
pp.
MS-BOC-614 SALINE AGRICULTURE 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To educate students about potential of agriculture in coastal areas or saline

habitats.
Course Outline:
Coastal agriculture: Scope, Farming trends in coastal areas of Pakistan; Saline

agriculture, halophytes and their classification. Coastal land management.
Agronomic techniques for use of seawater. Production of coastal and biofuel
crops, postharvest techniques. Soil and plant sampling techniques. Preparation
of plant and soil samples for analytical work.
Lab. Work:
100
Identification of halophytes. Measurement of soil and water salinity. Plant
screening for tolerance to sea water. Determination of soil texture in coastal
areas. Visits to coastal areas.
Recommended Books:
1. Beatley. T., Brower, D. and Schwab, A., 2002. An Introduction to Coastal

Zone Management. Island Press, 1718 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Suite
300, Washington, D.C.
2. Hinrichsen, D., 1998. Coastal Waters of the World: Trends, Threats, and
Strategies. Island Press, Washington, DC, USA.
3.2. Clark, J.R., 1995. Coastal Zone Management Handbook. Mote Marine
Laboratory of Sarasota, Florida, USA.
4.3. Clark, J.R., 1998. Coastal Seas: The Conservation Challenge. 989
Market Street San Francisco, CA.
4. Hinrichsen, D., 1998. Coastal Waters of the World: Trends, Threats, and
Strategies. Island Press, Washington, DC, USA.
6. Hussain, T. and Jabbar, A., 1985. Soil and Plant Analysis. Department of Soil
Science, University of Agriculture, Faisalabad.
5. Kay, R. and Alder, J., 2005. Costal Planning and Development. Taylor
and Francis, London.
6. Sukumar, B., 2008. Water Quality Management for Coastal Aquaculture.
Daya Publishing House, India.
7. Hussain, T. and Jabbar, A., 1985. Soil and Plant Analysis. Department of Soil
Science, University of Agriculture, Faisalabad.
8.7. Ryan, J., Estefan, G. and Rashid, A., 2001. Soil and Plant Analysis
Laboratory Manual. 2nd Ed., ICARDA, Aleppo, Syria and NARC, Islamabad,
Pakistan.
8. Sukumar, B., 2008. Water Quality Management for Coastal Aquaculture.
Daya Publishing House, India.
9. Westerman, R.L. (Ed.), 1990. Soil Testing and Plant Analysis. 3rd Ed. Soil
Sci. Am. Inc., Madison, WI, USA.
SEAFOOD HANDLING, Formatted Table

PROCESSING AND SAFETY
Objectives:
Understanding of major food safety hazards and control, handling,

storage and shelf-life of fishery product, International laws regarding food
safety.
Course Outline:
101
Food safety hazards using HACCP principles, developing HACCP
regulations, Hazard Analysis, Critical Control Point (CCP) determination,
monitoring CCP and verification procedures, sanitation control
procedures, biological hazards- microorganisms/ pathogens, (yeasts,
moulds, bacteria especially spore forming, viruses, non spore forming
protozoa, food spoilage, parasites- worms, protozoans and food additives.
Food processing technologies. ISO 9001-2000 and ISO-17025.
Lab. Work:
Visit to fish harbour and fish processing industry. Report writing on the
major fish processing issues and its control.
Recommended Books:
1. Ahmed, F.E., 1991. Seafood Safety. National Academic Press USA.

1.2. Anonymous, Seafood Handlingsafety, Processing and
SafetyBiotechnology. F. Shahidi, Y. Jones and D.D. Kitts 1997,
Techonomic Publishers.
2.3. Bremner, H.A., 2002. Safety and Quality Issues in Fish Processing.
H. A. Bremner 2002, CRC Press.
3. Cato, J.C., 1998. Seafood Safety. F. E. Ahmed 1991, National Academic
Press USA.
4. Seafood Safety: Economics of Hazard Analysis and Criticle Control
Points (HACCP). J. C. Cato 1998, FAO Fisheries Technical Paper 381.
5. Shahidi, F., Jones, Y. and Kitts, D.D., 1997. Seafood Safety, Processing
and Biotechnology. Techonomic Publishers.
5.6. Shahidi, F., Mayashita, K. and Wanasudra, U., 2010. Seafood Quality:
Safety and Health Application. F. Shahidi, K. Mayashita, U. Wanasudra
2010, Wiely and Blackwell.
6. Seafood Handling Processing and Safety
SKIN AND SCUBA DIVING Formatted Table

SCIENCE
Objectives:
102
The purpose of this course is designed to expose the student to the skills,
enjoyment and equipment necessary to explore the underwater world. To
experience the wonders of the undersea life using SCUBA equipment. It
provides general guidance applicable to maintaining all diving equipment
and diving systems and prepares student for certification as a certified Open
Water Diver.
Course Outline:
History of Diving. Skin Diving. SCUBA Diving. Underwater Physics.

Underwater Physiology and Diving Disorders. Dive Systems. Dive
Programme Administration. Safe Diving Distances from Transmitting
Sonar. Operational Planning and Risk Management. Surface Supplied Air
Diving Operations. Shallow Water Diving. Mixed Gas Diving.
Lab. Work:
Practical training of skin and SCUBA diving to demonstrate proper use of

the mask, snorkel and fins, basic skin diving techniques, a safe and
successful descent and ascent and proper procedure for handling a diving
accident.
Recommended Books:
1. Cross, E.R., 1961. Advanced Skin and Scuba Diving. Marine Research
Publishing Company, Hawaii, 88 pp.
2. Thompson, A. A Complete Guide to Snorkel and Skin Diving.
3. Owen, D.M., 1955. A Manual for Free Divers Using Compressed Air.
Pergamon Press, 60 pp.
4.2. Erickson, R.D., 1972. Discover the Underwater World. The Complete
Guide to the Art and Science of Skin and Scuba Diving. U.S. Divers Co.,
Santa Ana, California, 132 pp.
3. Owen, D.M., 1955. A Manual for Free Divers Using Compressed Air.
Pergamon Press, 60 pp.
5.4. Roberts, F.M., 1960. Basic SCUBA - Self Contained Underwater
Breathing Apparatus, It's Operation, Maintenance and Use. The Sport
Diver's Bible. D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc, New jersey, USA, 386 pp.
5. Thompson, A. A Complete Guide to Snorkel and Skin Diving.
103
SYSTEMATIC STUDIES OF Formatted Table
MARINE ORGANISMS
Objectives:
To understand the historical background of taxonomy and classification system.

To learn about different species concepts. To identify and differentiate among
species.
Course Outline:
Systematics of living marine organisms. introduction, history and role of

taxonomy in biology, binominal nomenclature, microtaxonomy, phenon, taxon,
species concepts (typological concept, nominalist concept, biological concept,
evolutionary concept) , non-dimensional species concept; Multidimensional
species concept; Cohesion species concept, polytypic species, subspecies,
super species, sibling species, Macro-taxonomy; different kinds of taxonomic
characters; Taxonomic collection and identification; definitions of Synonym,
Homonym, evolutionary concepts.
Lab. Work:
Study of preserved invertebrate species and their classification up to class level.

Collection, preservation and identification of common species with the help of
keys.
Recommended Books:
1. Heywood, V.H., 1975. Taxonomy and Ecology., Academic Press, London.

1. Mayer, E., 1994. Principles of Systematic Zoology. McGraw Hill, New York.
2. Mayer, E. and Asblock, P.D., 1991. Principles of Systematic Zoology.
McGraw-Hill, New York
3. Mayer, E., 1994. Principles of Systematic Zoology. McGraw Hill, New York.
3.4. Mayr, E., 1985. Animal Species and Evolution, Harvard University
Press.
4. Heywood, V.H., 1975. Taxonomy and Ecology., Academic Press, London.
5. Whili, M.J.D., 1978. Modes of Speciation, W.H. Freeman and Co., San
Francisco.
104
MS-BOC-618 VERTEBRATE BIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To introduce students the diversity of vertebrates with emphasis on marine

animals and their phylogenetic relationships. To demonstrate interrelationships
between vertebrate structures, function, physiology and ecology. To learn
concepts of classification and apply them to the identification of marine
vertebrates. Upon completion students should be able to identify marine
vertebrates and demonstrate an understanding as how marine vertebrates used
to survive in the ocean.
Course Outline:
To study classification and habitats of marine vertebrate’s morphology,

physiology, anatomy ecology and evolution of vertebrates. Vertebrate ancestry,
behaviour and classification of marine fishes, reptiles, birds and mammals.
Identification, feeding behaviour, reproduction, migration and other
characteristics of marine vertebrates. Taxonomy of commercially important
vertebrates of Pakistan, Benthic, demersal, pelagic and mesopelagic fishes.
Reproduction and life-history of selected marine vertebrates. Age determination
techniques in fish. Fish processing techniques.
Lab. Work:
Collection of vertebrates, preservation, staining, mounting,

skeletonization, skinning and stuffing of fishes (Taxidermy), preparation
of drawings, photography of large specimens. Identification of species/
genera, preparation of collection record. Sampling design and methods
for field collection. Identification of commercially important fish, in the
field and laboratory. Gonad maturation index, procedure for counting of
eggs of fish larvae. To identifying characteristics of major classes and
families of marine vertebrates. To classify individual vertebrates by class,
order, family, Genus and species sampling on field trip. Collection
analysis and examination of organisms in the field and laboratory.
Recommended Books:
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 16 pt, Not Italic

1. Anderson, H.T., 1969. The biology ofTait, R.V., Marine Mammals.
Academic PressZoology. Oxford press.
2.1. Levinton, J.S., 2014. Marine Biology: Function, Biodiversity, Formatted: Pattern: Clear
Ecology. 4th Ed.

3.2. Harbo, R. 2011. Whelks to Whales: Coastal Marine Life of the Pacific
Northwest.
3. Levinton, J.S., 2014. Marine Biology: Function, Biodiversity, Ecology.
105
4th Ed.
4. Anderson, H.T., 1969. The biology of Marine Mammals. Academic
Press.
5.4. Richard John Harrison, 1972. Functional anatomy of marine mammals
Volume 2, Academic Press.
5. Tait, R.V., Marine Zoology. Oxford press.
Module II: Chemical and Environmental Oceanography (CEO)

MS-CEO-601 BIOREMEDIATION 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To use microorganisms and plants for the remediation of contaminated

soil, sludge and groundwater.
Course Outline:
What is bioremediation? Managing a bioremediation project, Microbial

systems of bioremediation, Site characterization for bioremediation,
Treatability Studies, Bioremediation processes, Phytoremediation of
organic, metals and inorganic contaminants.
Lab. Work:
Field trips of the wetlands. Discussion with the pytoremediation experts

at the Garden on the design and operation of the wastewater wetlands.
Recommended Books:
1. A. Singh O. P., 2004. Applied Bioremediation and Phytoremediation.

Ward (Eds.), Springer, New York.
1.2. Cookson, Jr.J.T., 1995. Bioremediation Engineering: Design and
Application. McGraw-Hill, Inc. New York.
106
ENVIRONMENTAL
MS-CEO-602 2+1=3 Crh
IMPACT ASSESSMENT
2. A. Singh O. P., 2004. Applied Bioremediation and Phytoremediation.
Ward (Eds.), Springer, New York.
ENVIRONMENTAL
IMPACT ASSESSMENT
Formatted Table
Objectives:
An environmental impact assessment (EIA) is an assessment of the

possible impact - positive or negative - that a proposed project may have
on the environment, consisting of the natural, social and economic
aspects with special focus on coastal installations.
Course Outline:
Introduction and principles, nature and procedures (IEE, EIS, SEA, EIA).
Purpose of environmental impact assessment with reference to coastal/
marine environment. National Environmental Laws, International
Conventions and Protocols relevant to EIA. Scoping and Public
Participation. Marine Baseline Surveys (Flora and Fauna), Coastal and
marine ecology/ ecosystems, geomorphology of coast, ocean dynamics,
air and noise pertaining to coastal areas. Risk analysis and management,
mitigation measures, Environmental Management Plans with relevance to
the project.
Lab. Work:
Small projects may be given.

Recommended Books:
1. Bai, Y., 2003. Marine Structural Design. Elsevier.

2. Barthwal, R.R., 2002. Environmental Impact Assessment. New Age
International.
3. Gilpin, A., 2005. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA): cutting edge
for the twenty-first century. Cambridge University Press.
4. Glasson, J., Therivel, R. and Chadwick, A. 2005. Introduction to
Environmental Impact Assessment. Taylor & Francis.
5. Glasson, J., Therivel, R. and Chadwick, A., 2005. Introduction to
Environmental Impact Assessment. Taylor & Francis.
1.6. Morris, P., 2009. Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment.,
Peter Morris, 2009 Taylor & Francis..-
107
2.7. Petts, J., 1999. Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment.,
Judith Petts, 1999, Wiley-Blackwell.
3. Wathern, P., 2005. Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment,
Glasson, J., R. Therivel, A. Chadwick, 2005, Taylor & Francis.
4. Environmental Impact Assessment, R. R. Barthwal, 2002, New Age
International.
5. Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment, John Glasson, Riki
Therivel, Andrew Chadwick, 2005, Taylor & Francis.
6.8. Environmental Impact Assessment: theory and practice., Peter
Wathern, 2005, Routledge.
108
7. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA): cutting edge for the twenty-
first century, Alan Gilpin, 2005, Cambridge University Press.
8. Marine Structural Design, Yong Bai, 2003, Elsevier.
MARINE AND Formatted Table

ESTUARINE CHEMISTRY
Objectives:
The oceans are in interactive contact with the atmosphere, biosphere and
lithosphere and virtually all elements pass through the ocean at some
point in their cycles. In this course the first-order processes that take
place within the sea and affect its chemistry will be studied. What controls
the distribution of chemical species in seawater and sediments? How long
do different elements spend, on average, in the ocean? How do marine
chemical processes interact with the biological, geological, and physical
processes in the oceans? How can the chemistry of the oceans affect the
future of planet Earth?
Course Outline:
Physical, chemical, and biological processes governing the chemical

composition of sea water in estuarine, coastal and marine environment.
Nutrient and carbon fluxes, interstitial water chemistry, sea surface layer
chemistry, air-sea inter-action, analytical marine chemistry.
Lab. Work:
Coastal and deep sea water sampling techniques and protocols;

Extraction of water from marine and deep sea sediments, Preservation of
water samples at sea organic/ in-organic chemical/Analytical techniques
for sample analyses.
Recommended Books:
1. Butcher, S.S., Charlson, R.J., Orians, G. and Wolfe, G.V. (Eds.), 1992.
Global Biogeochemical Cycles. New York, Academic Press.
1.2. Chester, R., . (1990.). Marine Geochemistry. London, Unwin Hyman Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
Ltd. 698 pp698pp. Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
2.3. Langmuir, D., 1997. Aqueous Environmental Geochemistry. Prentice Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
Hall. 600 ppPankow, J. F. (1991). Aquatic Chemistry Concepts. Chelsea, Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
MI, Lewis Publishers. 673pp.
3.4. Libes, S.M., . (1992.) An Introduction to Marine Biogeochemistry,
John Wiley and Sons, New York, 734pp.
5. Millero, F., 1996. Chemical Oceanography, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fl,
469 pp.
4. Butcher, S. S., R. J. Charlson, G. Orians and G. V. Wolfe, Ed. (1992). Global
109
Biogeochemical Cycles. New York, Academic Press.
6. Morel, F. M. and J. G. Hering, J.G., (1993.). Principles and Applications
of Aquatic Chemistry. New York, Wiley Interscience, 588 pp.
7. Pankow, J.F., 1991. Aquatic Chemistry Concepts. Chelsea, MI, Lewis
Publishers. 673 pp.
5.8. Pilson, M.E.Q., 1998. An introduction to the chemistry of the sea.
Prentice Hall. 431 pp. 588pp.
6.9. Stumm, W. and J. J. Morgan, J.J., (1996.). Aquatic Chemistry. New
York, John Wiley & Sons. 1022 pp1022pp.
7. Millero, F. (1996) Chemical Oceanography, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fl,
469pp.
8. Langmuir, D. (1997). Aqueous Environmental Geochemistry. Prentice
Hall. 600pp.
9. Pilson, M. E. Q. (1998). An introduction to the chemistry of the sea.
Prentice Hall. 431pp.
MS-CEO-604 MARINE BIOGEOCHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
Marine biogeochemistry focuses on the role of the marine system in the

global cycles of climatically active trace gases, including sulphur gases,
nitrous oxide and methane, parameterisation of air-sea gas exchange and
the understanding of large scale oceanographic processes through the
use of purposefully released tracers, the role of the bacterioneuston in air-
sea trace gas exchange and the reactivity and photochemistry of
chromophoric dissolved organic matter in freshwater and marine
environments and implications for global biogeochemistry.
Course Outline:
The Physical Chemistry of Seawater, the Crustal-Ocean-Atmosphere

Factory, Salinity as a Conservative Tracer, the nature of Chemical
Transformation in the Ocean. Gas Solubility and Exchange Across the Air-
Sea Interface. The Redox Chemistry of Seawater. Organic Matter:
Production and Destruction. Trace Elements in Seawater. The Chemistry
of Marine Sediments. Classification of Sediments. Organic
Biogeochemistry. Marine - estuarine science and Biogeochemical Cycles,
Organic Matter Sources and Transformation, Trace Metal and Nutrient
Cycling (marine nitrogen, phosphorus, sulphur) in marine, coastal and
estuarine environment. Marine Carbon Cycle and Global Climate Change.
Primary Productivity and Biogeochemical Cycles.
Lab. Work::????????????????
Estimation of elemental concentration in sediment samples, primary

productivity of different habitats and composition of organic matter.
110
Recommended Books:
1. Bianchi, T.S., 2006. Introduction to marine biogeochemistry. By Susan

M. Libes - 2009 - 909 pages.
2.1. Biogeochemistry of Estuaries., by Thomas S. Bianchi, 2006, Oxford
University Press.
2. Libes, S.M., 2009. Introduction to marine biogeochemistry. 909 pp.
Formatted: Normal, Tab stops: Not at 0.38"
111
MARINE ENVIRONMENTAL Formatted Table
ECOTOXICOLOGY
Objectives:
1. Introduction to Chemistry, Introduction to Marine Biology, Marine Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE

Ecology Specific Objectives of the Course: Conservation of marine 3_, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not Expanded
ecology and ecosystem. Improvement of health of marine organisms by / Condensed by
and humans. Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Numbered + Level: 1 +

Numbering Style: 1, 2, 3, … + Start at: 1 + Alignment: Left +
Aligned at: 0.25" + Indent at: 0.5"
1. Introduction to Chemistry, Introduction to Marine Biology, Marine Ecology Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
Specific Objectives of the Course: Conservation of marine ecology and _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
2_, Condensed by 0.1 pt
ecosystem. Improvement of health of marine organisms and humans. Formatted: No bullets or numbering
Course Outline: Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
3_, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not Expanded
Introduction to ecotoxicology, major environmental contaminants, by / Condensed by
bioaccumulation factors influencing bioaccumulations, uptake,
biotransformation, de-toxification, elimination and accumulation, transfer
to various tropic level and their impact, molecular effects on biomass,
acute and chronic lethal effects to marine organisms and ecosystems.
Lab. Work:
Study of different ecosystems.

Recommended Books:
1. Sial, I. M., Kazmi, Q. B. & Valeem, E. E., 2011. Toxicity of Permethrin Versus
Biosal Against Cyprinus carpio: Synthetic and Imported Pesticide Compared
with Locally Formulated Phytopesticide (Neem Whole Fruit Extract). VDM
Verlag Dr. Müller, 336 pp. ISBN-10: 3-639-34195-3, ISBN-13: 978-3-639-
34195-9.
2. Wells, P. G. 2000. Environmental Toxicology, David A. Wright and
Pamela Welbourn Cambridge University Press 2002.
3. Environmental Toxicology: Biological and Health Effects of Pollutants,
Second Edition.
4. Ming-Ho Yu, Ming-Ho Yu, Humio Tsunoda, 2004.CRC Press.
5. Introduction to Environmental Toxicology. Impacts of Chemicals Upon
Ecological Systems, W. G. Landis and M.-H. Yu. By P. G. Wells, 2000.
2. Wright, D.A. and Welbourn, P., 2002. Environmental Toxicology.
3. Yu, M-Ho. and Tsunoda, H., 2004. Environmental Toxicology: Biological
and Health Effects of Pollutants, Second Edition. CRC Press.
112
MS-CEO-606 MARINE METEOROLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To give students concepts of marine environment those culminate with the

prediction of marine meteorology.
Course Outline:
State of the atmosphere, Thermodynamics of dry air, moist air: Isobaric

processes for moist air, Vertical stability of the atmosphere, Solar
Radiation: Characteristics of the sun; Nature of solar radiation; Definitions
and concepts in radiation; Transfer of radiation through a medium;
Terrestrial radiation; Characteristics of terrestrial radiation; Absorption of
terrestrial radiation; Transmission of terrestrial radiation through the
atmosphere; Simpson’s computation of terrestrial radiation transfer;
Elsasser’s radiation chart; Radiative cooling or heating of the atmosphere;
The mean heat balance of the earth - atmosphere system; The atmospheric
green house effect.
Lab. Work:
To demonstrate how can the Marine Environment be altered by the

changes in the atmosphere?
Recommended Books:
1. Haltiner, G.J. and Martin, F.L., Dynamical and Physical Meteorology.

2.1. Anonymous, 1973. Compendium of Meteorology. WMO Pub.
Physical Meteorology, Vol. 1, No.2.
2. Haltiner, G.J. and Martin, F.L., Dynamical and Physical Meteorology.
3. Houghton, H.G., Physical Meteorology.
4. Iribarne, J.V. and Godson, W.L., Atmospheric Thermodynamics.
113
MARINE NATURAL Formatted Table
PRODUCT CHEMISTRY
Objectives:
The course will focus on identification of natural product chemistry of

marine organisms (Plants and Animals) and their uses. Basic information
regarding biosynthesis and bioassay screening to be provided.
Course Outline:
Introduction of marine natural products, Bioactive metabolites of marine

organisms (Plants and Animals) Bioactivity of marine organisms,
Introduction to biosynthesis and isolation of bioactive metabolites, Salient
features of Bioassay screening of organic components.
Lab. Work:
Basic principles of techniques used for biosynthesis and bioassay

screening for marine natural products.
Recommended Books:
Anonymous, Introduction to Chemistry, Introduction to Marine Biology, Formatted: No bullets or numbering
Marine Ecology Specific Objectives of the Course: Conservation of marine Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
ecology and ecosystem. Improvement of health of marine organisms and 2_, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Condensed by
humans. 0.1 pt
2. Atta-ur-Rahman, Choudhary, M.I. and Thomsen, W.J., 2001. Bioassay Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
Techniques for drug Development. Harwood Academic Publishers. 3_, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not Expanded
2.3. Bhakuni, D.S. and Rawat, D.S., 2005. Bioactive marine natural by / Condensed by
products., D. S. Bhakuni, Diwan S. Rawat, 2005, Gulf Professional

Publishing.
3.4. Bhat, S.V., 2005. Chemistry of Natural Products., Sujata, V. Bhat,
2005, Narosa Publishing House.
5. Cutler, S.J., 2000. Biologically Active Natural Products. CRC Press.
6. Dewick, P.M., 2002. Medicinal Natural Products. John Wiley and Sons.
7. Hostettmann, K., 1995. Chemistry and Pharmacology of Natural
Products. Cambridge University Press.
8. Kaufman, P.B., 1999. Natural Products from Plants. CRC Press.
4.9. Sing, A., 2004. Organic Chemistry of Natural Products., Ayodhya
Sing, 2004, Campus Book International.
5. Medicinal Natural Products, Paul M. Dewick, 2002, John Wiley and
Sons.
6. Biologically Active Natural Products, Stephen J. Cutler, 2000, CRC
Press.
7. Natural Products from Plants, Peter B. Kaufman, 1999, CRC Press.
8. Bioassay Techniques for drug Development, Atta-ur-Rahman, M. I.
114
Choudhary, W. J. Thomsen, 2001, Harwood Academic Publishers.
9. Chemistry and Pharmacology of Natural Products, K. Hostettmann,
1995, Cambridge University Press.
Introduction to Chemistry, Introduction to Marine Biology, Marine Ecology
Specific Objectives of the Course: Conservation of marine ecology and
ecosystem. Improvement of health of marine organisms and humans.
MARINE POLLUTION AND Formatted Table

CONTROL
Objectives:
To understand pollution, its sources and implication with the biotic and
abiotic environment.
Course Outline: Formatted: Pattern: Clear
Introduction to marine pollution, chronic and acute inorganic and organic

marine pollutants. Causes, effects and impacts on marine environment
and humans. Health of the oceans, ocean disposal (marine outfalls,
shipboard wastes, dumping of sludge, disposal of dredge spoil,
radioactive wastes) and its impact. Marine pollution control and mitigation
measurements; oil spills contingency plan and combating techniques.
Lab Work: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
3_, Font: 6 pt, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Seawater, sediment and marine organism analysis for different marine

pollutants.
Recommended Books:
1. Jhonston, R., 1976. Marine Pollution. Academic Press.

2.1. Bishop, P.L., 1982. Marine Pollution and Its Control. McGraw-Hill
series in water resources and environmental engineering.
3. Sindermann, C.J., 1995. Ocean Pollution: Effects on Living Resources and
Humans (Marine Science).
4.2. Clark, R. B., 2001. Marine Pollution.
3. Geyer, R.A. 1981. Marine Environmental Pollution: Dumping and
mining. Elsevier.
5.4. Hassan, D., 2006. Protecting the Marine Environment from Land-
Based Sources of Pollution: Towards Effective International
115
Cooperation.
6.5. Hofer, T.N., Abessa, D.M.S., Aguiar, V.M.C. and Alfonso, J.A., 2008.
Marine Pollution. New Research.
7. Geyer, R.A. 1981. Marine Environmental Pollution: Dumping and
mining. Elsevier.
6. Jhonston, R., 1976. Marine Pollution. Academic Press.
7. Sindermann, C.J., 1995. Ocean Pollution: Effects on Living Resources and
Humans (Marine Science).
NATURAL HAZARDS Formatted Table

MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
Broadly, course is designed to learn collection and analysis of scientific

data with respect to natural hazards. To study the hazards, its history,
trends and definitions. How and why places are hazardous, including the
human geographic processes that put people at risk. Understanding of
human nature and responses to disasters, and how science can be applied
in the face of such disturbance.
Formatted: Font: 6 pt, Not Expanded by / Condensed by
Energy Sources & Earth Interior, Bathymetry and Plate Tectonics, Plate
Tectonics & Earthquakes, Tsunami, Volcanoes, Bathy Charts,
Earthquakes/ Volcanoes, Introduction of Atmosphere, its dynamics,
Ocean Conveyor Belt, Ocean Dynamics, Ocean Storms, Ocean Waves,
Waves as Hazards, Tides & Standing Waves, Ocean Currents, Hurricanes,
Hurricane Dynamics, Hurricane Damage, Global Climate Change ,
Hurricane Forecasts, ENSO, Cooling and Warming, Anthropogenic
Climate Change, Natural Climate Change.
Lab. Work: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
Specific assignments may be given. _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
3_, Font: Times New Roman, 6 pt, Font color: Black, English
Recommended Books: (United Kingdom)
Formatted: Justified, No widow/orphan control
116
1. Bryant, E.A., Natural Hazards.
2. Ebert, C.H., Disasters, An Analysis of Natural and Human-induced
Hazards.
3. Hyndman, D. and Hyndman, D., Natural Hazards and Disasters.
1.4. Keller, E. A. and Blodgett, R. H., Natural Hazards; Earth’s Processes
as Hazards, Disasters, and Catastrophes.
2. Hyndman, D. and Hyndman, D., Natural Hazards and Disasters.
3. Ebert, C.H., Disasters, An Analysis of Natural and Human-induced
Hazards.
4.5. Murck, B.W., Skinner B.J. and Porter S.C., Dangerous Earth, An
Introduction to Geologic Hazards.
117
5. Bryant, E.A., Natural Hazards.
MS-CEO-610 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To obtain an in-depth understanding of why and how chemical reactions occur,

which in turn may enable us to accurately design reactions leading to novel
molecules of the future? To obtain a vision of matter-energy relationship in
physical and chemical systems and understand transformations at the molecular
level. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
2_, Font: Bold, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not
Course Outline: Expanded by / Condensed by , Pattern: Clear
Fundamentals, mathematical functions and differential calculus with Formatted: Pattern: Clear
several independent variables. Gases, application to classical ideal gases.
Internal energy & enthalpy, Thermochemistry. First Law of
Thermodynamics, Entropy and Second Law of Thermodynamics. Third law
of thermodynamics Gibbs and Helmholtz energies. Equilibrium calculations Le
Chatelier’s principle. Physical Changes: Pure Substances, Mixtures and
Solutions. Chemical Changes: Equilibrium, Kinetics. Statistical
Thermodynamics.
Lab. Work::????????????????????? _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
Practical related to thermodynamics, mixtures and solutions. Formatted: Font: 6 pt
Assignments may be given to develop a marine product.
Recommended Books:
1. Atkins, P. and Paula, J.D., 2010. Physical Chemistry. 9th Ed., Freeman, New
York.
2. Mortimer, R.G., 2013. Mathematics for Physical Chemistry. 4th Ed., Elsevier.
3. Schärt, W., 2014. Basic Physical Chemistry. 1st Ed., 166 pp.
118
MS-CEO-611 WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course examines the nature of point and non-point sources of surface
and ground water pollution and examines the framework controlling water
quality management activities.
Water chemistry, water microbiology, water quality and pollution, drinking

water treatment, wastewater collection and treatment, storm water
management, best management practices (BMPs) and treatment,
groundwater management, industrial wastewater treatment.
Lab. Work: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
Laboratory chemical analysis of different types of waters.

Recommended Books:
1. Hammer and Hammer, 2004. Water and Wastewater Technology. 5th Ed.,
Prentice Hall
2. Pirbazari, M., 2006. Urban Storm Water Best Management Practices.
USEPA Office of Water.
3. Vigil, K.M., 2003. Clean Water. Corvallis, Oregon: Oregon State
University Press. ISBN 0-87071-498-8.
119
Module III: Fisheries and Aquaculture (FA)
MS-FA-601 ADVANCED AQUACULTURE 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course will enable to understand different culture systems, their

designs and operations. Understanding the requirement of each system, its
feasibility will help develop a feasible culture system in a given area.
Course Outline:
Introduction to development of aquaculture systems: design,

construction and operation, feasibility and economics of marine
invertebrates and vertebrates. Recirculating water system: advantages
and disadvantages, types and economic considerations.
Types of culture systems: Pond culture: Scope and objectives, types of
ponds, design and construction, soil properties, water budget, fry rearing
techniques, production rates, Harvesting and economic aspects. Cage
and Pen culture: scope and objectives, types of ponds and cages, design
and construction, selection of suitable site, cultivable species, farming
operation and management. Brood stock conditioning, spawning, rearing
and harvesting.
Seaweed culture: Scope and objectives, culturing practices, site selection
criteria, cultivable species, and procurement of seed, farming operation
and management.
Lab Work: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
Formatted: Left
Assignment/case study on aquaculture systems, visits to aquaculture
facilities/ hatcheries.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fish, Second Edition

(Aquaculture Series) Publisher: Springer; 2nd Edition.
1. Bardach, J.E., Aquatic Engineering (Mike Walker).
2. Sustainable Aquaculture. (J.E. Bardach).
3. Beveridse M., Fish Hatchery and Management (G Wedemeyer).
4.3. Cage Aquaculture. (M. Beveridse).
5.4. FAO Hatchery Manual.
5. Hoff, F.H.,1999. Plankton Culture Manual. Florida Aqua Farms Inc; 5th
Rev. Edition, 160 pp.
6. Pillay, T.V.R. and Kutty, M. N., 2005. Responsible Marine Aquaculture.
Edited by Stickney and JP McVey, 2002.
7.6. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. T.V.R. Pillay and M. N. Kutty, 2005.
120
Aquaculture.
8. Stickney, R.R., 1994. Principles of Aquaculture. (Robert R. Stickney
1994).
9.10. Wedemeyer, G., 2001. Fish Hatchery Management by G Wedemeyer
2001.
10. Nutrition and Feeding of Fish, Second Edition (Aquaculture Series)
Publisher: Springer; 2nd Edition (November 30, 1998).
11. Plankton Culture Manual, Frank H. Hoff (Author) 160 pages, Publisher:
Florida Aqua Farms Inc; 5th Rev edition (July 1999).
AQUACULTURE ENVIRONMENT Formatted Table

MS-FA-602 2+1=3 Crh
MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
This course will enable students understand different environment

management systems required for aquaculture.
Course Outline:
Concepts of sustainability, scope, objectives and importance of

sustainable development. Natural resource requirements: Land, water and
biological resources. Technical and economic assessment: location and
sitting requirement, market assessment, financial analysis, risk
assessment, resource utilization, socioeconomic characteristics, and
sustainability profile. Environmental interactions: Impact of environment
on aquaculture, culture site characteristics, water quality, mangroves,
harvesting of wild larvae, predators and impact of aquaculture on
environment. Nutrient load of aquaculture: Nitrogen, phosphorus. Legal
and institutional framework: Government policy, Stakeholders. Key issues
in aquaculture: environmental context, aquaculture integrated with
agriculture, quality of seed resources and social aspects. Aquaculture
extension: Definition and objectives, extension models and tools,
extension services, extension training.
Lab Work:
Assignment/ case study (Market analysis, environmental impact, legal

framework etc.).
Recommended Books:
1. Heggberget, T.G., Woiwode, J.G., Robert J., Wolotira, Jr., (Eds.), 1996.
Aquaculture Management, James Meade (Author) 220 pages Publisher:
Springer; 1st edition (1989), Language: English ISBN-10: 0412077116
ISBN-13: 978-0412077111.
121
2.1. The Role of Aquaculture in World Fisheries: Proceedings of the
World Fisheries Congress, Theme 6. Tor G. Heggberget, John G.
Woiwode, Robert J., Jr. Wolotira (Editors), 244 pages Publisher:
Science Publishers, 244 pp. (December 1996).
2. Meade, J., 1989. Aquaculture Management. 1st edition, Springer, 220 pp.
ISBN-10: 0412077116 ISBN-13: 978-0412077111.
3. Wedemeyer, G., Fish Hatchery and Management. (G Wedemeyer).
122
AQUACULTURE HEALTH Formatted Table
MS-FA-603 2+1=3 Crh
MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
This course will enable students understand different health management

measures required for aquaculture.
Course Outline:
Microbial diseases: bacteria (aerobic, anaerobic, Gram +ve and -ve,

Pseudomonas, Vibrio); virus (Lymphocyctis, viral necrosis, pancreatic Formatted: Font: Italic
necrosis); Fungi (Ichtyoophomus hoferi and other fungal pathogens). Formatted: Font: Italic
Parasitic diseases: Protozoan, Platyhelmenthes, Nemathelmenthes and Formatted: Font: Italic
crustacean.
Disease issue in aquaculture: principal pathogens, effects. Diagnosis of
pathogens: clinical, post-mortem and histopathological examinations,
serology. Control: Non-infectious diseases, addition of chemicals to
water, addition of chemicals to feed, medication directly to fish, antibiotics
and probiotics. Socio-economic effects of diseases of fish and shell-fish.
Lab. Work:
Identification and microscopic examination of bacteria and fungus

causing disease. Identification and microscopic examination of common
parasites causing disease. Examination of Pathological type specimen
and histological slides.
Recommended Books:
1. Austin, B. and Austin, Fish Diseases and Disorders Vol 1-3 Eds.: P.T.K.
Woo, J. F. Leatherland and D.A., D. Bruno 1999. , CABI Publishers.
2.1. Bacterial Fish Pathogens: Diseases of farmed and wild fishes. Brian
Austin and D. A. Austin 1999, Springer.
3.2. Noga, E.J., 2000. Fish Disease: diagnosis and treatment. E. J. Noga
2000, Wiley-Blackwell Publishers.
4.3. Plumb, J.A., 1999. Health Maintenance and principle diseases of
cultured fish. J. A. Plumb 1999, Wiley and Blackwell.
4. Woo, P.T.K., Leatherland, J.F. and Bruno, D.D., (Eds.), 1999. Fish
Diseases and Disorders Vol 1-3. CABI Publishers.
Formatted: Normal, Left

Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 12 pt
123
MS-FA-604 AQUACULTURE NUTRITION 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course will enable students understand different nutritional

requirements for aquaculture practices. Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
Course Outline: _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
Formatted: Pattern: Clear
Introduction to aquaculture nutrition, Protein, lipid, carbohydrate, vitamin
and mineral requirements, Nutritional pathology, Aqua feed ingredients,
formulation, manufacture and storage. Aquafeed: Risks and benefits, Live
feed and algal culture, Feeding regimes and diet selection criteria. Culture
of fish food organisms. Major phytoplankton groups- microalgal culture,
laboratory methods- isolation, media preparation, kinds of culture- pure,
crude, mass culture. Mass culture of Chaetoceros, Spirulina. Artemia –
different strains, hatching, decapsulation, enrichment and production of
Artemia cyst. Brood stock and larval nutrition: energy partitioning for
reproduction, dietary quality.
Lab. Work:
Nutritional evaluation of feed ingredients (total protein, lipids,

carbohydrates and gross energy). Feed formulation: calculation for
protein and energy levels in manufactured feed. Live feed: Microalgal and
zooplankton culture (media preparation, maintenance and examination).
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1998. Nutrition and Feeding of Fish, 2nd Edition

(Aquaculture Series),) Publisher: Springer.; (November 30, 1998)
2. Hertrampf, J.W., Piedad-Pascual, F. and Ong, S.L., 2000. Handbook on
Ingredients for Aquaculture Feeds. 1st edition, Springer, 624 pp.
2. Hoff, F.H., 1999. Plankton Culture Manual., Frank H. Hoff (Author) 160
pages.
3. Publisher: Florida Aqua Farms Inc; 5th Rev. Edition, 160 pp. edition Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Pattern: Clear
(July 1999).
4. Sumich, J.L. and Morrissey, J.F., 2004. Handbook on Ingredients for
Aquaculture Feeds. J.W. Hertrampf, F. Piedad-Pascual, Sik Lee Ong 624
pages. Publisher: Springer; 1 edition (June 1,2000)
5.4. Introduction to the Biologybiology of Marine Life. marine life. James
L. Sumich and John F. Morrissey. 2004. Johns and Bartlett Publisher,
Canada.
124
FISHERIES ECONOMICS AND
MS-FA-605 2+1=3 Crh
MARKETING
Objectives:
To understand economic perspective of fisheries, maximum economic

yield, fisheries efficiency, failure and control.
Course Outline:
Economic perspective of fisheries management, Economics of fish,

Maximum Economic Yield (MEY), Bio-economic modelling and MEY
targets, Data for economic analysis for commercial fisheries,
Measurement and analysis of efficiencies in fisheries, Understanding and
measuring capacity in fisheries, measuring productivity and decomposing
profits in fisheries, Economic insight, problems, policy choices,
challenges of uncertainty, Adaptive measurement, Fisheries failure and
control.
Lab. Work:
Analysis of maximum economic yield. Analysis of fisheries efficiency.

Recommended Books:
1. Anderson, L.G., 2004. Economics of Fisheries Management. The

Blackburn Press.
1.2. Bhattachary, H., 2002. Commercial Exploitation of Fisheries:
production, marketing and finance strategies. H. Bhattachary 2002,
Oxford University Press USA.
2.3. Cheston, I., 1991. Marketing in Fisheries and Aquaculture. Ian
Cheston 1991, Wiley.
4. Clark, C.W., 2007. Worldwide Crisis in Fisheries: economic models and
human behaviour. Cambridge University Press.
5. Iudicello, S., Weber, M.L. and Wieland, R., 1999. Fish Markets and
Fishermen: the economics of overfishing. Island Press.
3.6. Sethiadhas, R. 1997. Production and Marketing Management of
Marine Fisheries in India. R. Sethiadhas 1997, Daya Publishing House
India.
4. Walters, C., 2002. Economics of Fisheries Management. Lee G.
Anderson 2004, The Blackburn Press.
5.7. Adaptive Management of Renewable Resources. Carl Walters 2002,
The Blackburn Press.
6. Fish Markets and Fishermen: the economics of overfishing. S. Iudicello,
M. L. Weber and R. Wieland 1999, Island Press.
7. Worldwide Crisis in Fisheries: economic models and human behaviour.
125
Colin W. Clark 2007, Cambridge University Press.
126
FISHERIES RESOURCES AND Formatted Table
MS-FA-606 2+1=3 Crh
MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To understand fish and shell-fish recourses, conservation and

management.
Course Outline:
Coastal, demersal and pelagic resources, Shell-fish resources,

commercially important species, Overexploitation, Conservation of
resources, Marine-protected areas, Environmental issues, Management
issues and control, international laws related to fisheries practice and
management.
Lab. Work:
Study of important coastal, demersal and pelagic fish and shell-fish

resources. Case study of overexploitation. Case study of conservation
strategies.
Recommended Books:
1. Gunderson, D.R., 1993. Surveys of Fisheries Resources. Willey and

Inter science.
1.2. Hillborne, R. and Walters, C.J., 1992. Quantitative Fish Stock
Assessment: choice, dynamics and uncertainty. R. Hillborne and C. J.
Walters 1992, Springer.
3. Pauly, D. and Murphy, G.I., (Eds.), 1982. Theory and Management of
Tropical Fisheries. Proceedings of ICLARM/CSIRO workshop 1981
Australia.
2.4. Walters, C.J. and Martell, S.D., 2004. Fisheries Ecology and
Management. C. J. Walters and S. D. Martell 2004, Princeton University
Press.
127
3. Theory and Management of Tropical Fisheries. D. Pauly and G. I. Murphy
(eds) 1982, Proceedings of ICLARM/CSIRO workshop 1981 Australia.
4. Surveys of Fisheries Resources. D. R. Gunderson 1993, Willey and Inter
science.
FISHERIES TECHNIQUES AND Formatted Table

MS-FA-607 2+1=3 Crh
METHODS
Objectives:
Understanding of fishing gears and method, fishing policies, fish

population assessment and statistical methods.
Course Outline:
Fishing gears and methods, Illegal fishing gears, Analysis of fish

population data, Methods for estimating fish population parameters (age,
growth, recruitment, mortality), Use of computer modelling in fisheries,
Fisheries statistical data analysis.
Lab. Work:
Study of fishing gears and their operations. Application of statistical

methods on fisheries data. Computer modeling exercises.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1999. Fisheries Techniques. B. R. Murphy and D. W. Willis

1996, American Fisheries Society, USA.
2. Fish Catching Methods of the World. A. V. Brandt 2005, Willey and
Blackwell Publishers.
3. An Introduction to Fishing Gear Technology. K. B. Lal 1969,
Metropolitan Book Company India.
4.1. Ken Shultz’s Fishing Encyclopaedia. 1999, IDG Books Worldwide.
2. Brandt, A.V., 2005. Fish Catching Methods of the World. Willey and
Blackwell Publishers.
3. Lal, K.B., 1969. An Introduction to Fishing Gear Technology.
Metropolitan Book Company India.
4. Murphy, B.R. and Willis, D.W., 1996. Fisheries Techniques. American
Fisheries Society, USA.
Formatted: Font: (Default) Times New Roman, 12 pt
128
MS-FA-608 FISH POPULATION AND DYNAMICS 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To study about growth, mortality and exploitation rate.

Course Outline:
The concept of population and unit stock. Biological structure of fisheries

resource in space and time. Indicators of dynamics in a fishery resource.
Characteristics of unit and mixed stock. Data requirements for stock
assessment. Segregation of stocks. Principles of stock assessment.
Population age structure. Theory of life tables. Von Bertalanffy growth
parameters. Graphical models. Monte Cario simulation model and
ECCPATH model. What is Mortality, estimation of total, fishing and natural
mortality. The concept of yield, yield in number and yield in weight, yield
per recruit, yield curve. Yield models. The concept of Maximum
Sustainable Yield and Maximum Economic Yield. Biological symptoms of
under-fishing and over-fishing. Growth over-fishing and recruitment over-
fishing. Eumetric fishing. Open access fisheries. Fisheries regulations.
CPUE. Trawl selection and gillnet selection. Analytical models of fish
stocks.
Lab. Work:
Segregation of stock using direct methods. Study of analytical models:

Beverton and Holt model. VBGF, Pauly’s integrated methods, graphical
models. Estimation of Z, F and M. estimation of net selectivity coefficient.
Microcomputer packages ELEFAN, FISAT. Projects. Survey in marine fish
landing centres. Survey in riverine or reservoir fish landing centres. Status
of exploited fishery in selected backwaters/estuaries/rivers. Enumeration
of fishing vessels and gears operated in inland and marine sectors
Recommended Books:
1. Quantitative Fish Stock Assessment: choice, dynamics and

uncertainty. R. Hillborne and C. J. Walters 1992, Springer.
2. Fisheries Ecology and Management. C. J. Walters and S. D. Martell
2004, Princeton University Press.
3. Surveys of Fisheries Resources. D. R. Gunderson 1993, Willey and
Inter-science. FAO (1997) Fisheries management.
4.1. FAO Technical Guidelines for Responsible Fisheries. No. 4. Fishery Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
Resources Division and Fishery Policy and Planning Division, FAO. Rome:
82 pp82p. Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
5.2. FAO, (1995.) Code of Conduct for Responsible Fisheries, FAO,

Rome: 41 p.
129
6.3. FAO, (1997.) Inland fisheries. FAO Technical Guidelines for
Responsible Fisheries. No. 6 Fisheries Department, FAO, Rome: 36 ppp.
4. Gunderson, D.R., 1993. Surveys of Fisheries Resources. Willey and
Inter-science. FAO (1997) Fisheries management.
5. Hillborne, R. and Walters, C.J., 1992. Quantitative Fish Stock
Assessment: choice, dynamics and uncertainty. Springer.
6. Walters, C.J. and Martell, S.D., 2004. Fisheries Ecology and
Management. Princeton University Press.
HATCHERY OPERATION AND Formatted Table

MS-FA-609 2+1=3 Crh
MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To understand breeding, taxonomy and morphology of marine species

and water quality management.
Course Outline:
Breeding criteria of marine species: taxonomy and morphology, life

history, food and feeding habits, reproductive development, fecundity and
spawning, Hatchery design: species consideration, site selection and
hatchery size, Water quality management, Hatchery facilities and
equipment. Hatchery operations: brood stock collection and rearing,
spawning and fertilization, incubation and hatching, harvest and
transport, plankton/ microalgal culture.
Lab. Work:
Detailed study of established hatcheries, Taxonomy and biology of

commercially important species (fish, shrimp, crab, bivalves), Study of
larval developmental stages (slide preparation and microscopic
examination).
Recommended Books:
1. Beveridse, M., Aquatic Engineering (Mike Walker).

2. Fish Hatchery and Management (G Wedemeyer).
3.1. Cage Aquaculture. (M. Beveridse).
4.2. FAO, Hatchery hatchery Manual.
5. Pillay, T.V.R. and Kutty, M.N., 2005. Responsible Marine Aquaculture.
Edited by Stickney and JP McVey, 2002.
6.3. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. T.V.R. Pillay and M. N. Kutty,
2005.
Aquaculture.
130
5. Stickney, R.R., 1994. Principles of Aquaculture.
7.6. Timmons, M. B., Recirculating Aquaculture Systems. (M. B.
Timmons).
8. Wedemeyer, G., Fish Hatchery and Management.
131
8. Principles of Aquaculture (Robert R. Stickney 1994).
MS-FA-610 ICHTHYOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To recognize all major taxonomic groups of fishes and systematics of

common fishes. Understanding of basic anatomy and physiology,
evolution and zoogeography of major groups of fishes of fishes.
Understanding of current issues concerning conservation and fisheries
management.
Course Outline:
Introduction to Ichthyology, Anatomy and systems (movement,

Respiration, Blood and its circulation, Buoyancy and Thermal regulation,
Hydro mineral balance, Feeding, nutrition, digestion and excretion,
Growth, Reproduction, Sensory perception, Behaviour and
communication). Systematics, Evolution, (Hagfishes and lampreys,
Sharks, rays and chimaeras, Relict bony fishes, Teleost fishes), Marine
zoogeography, Marine fish assemblages, Conservation and Invasive
species.
Lab. Work:
Identification of some common marine fishes. Study of general anatomy

and systems (dissection of some representative fishes).
Recommended Books:
1. Bone, Q. and Moore, R.H., 2008. Ichthyology. Karl F. Lagler 1977, Wiely.
2.1. Biology of Fishes. Q. Bone and R. H. Moore 2008, Taylor and Francis.
3.2. Evans, D.H., 1998. Physiology of Fishes., D. H. Evans 1998, CRC
Press.
3. Lagler, K.F., 1977. Ichthyology. Wiely.
4. Saksena, D.N., 1999. Ichthyology: Recent research advances. D. N.
Saksena 1999, Oscar Publication, India.
132
MS-FA-611 MARINE FISHERIES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To develop understanding of fisheries resources and management.

Course Outline:
History of fisheries, Aquatic resources, Fishing Gears and fishing

techniques, Population dynamics and modeling, Fisheries data analysis,
Threats to fishing and factors leading to unsustainable fishing, Illegal,
unregulated and unreported (IUU) fishing, Fisheries perspective of
Pakistan, Conservation and sustainable management of Fisheries
resources. Post-harvest management. Seafood processing and value
addition. National and International Legal framework and policies.
Lab. Work:
Study of fishing gears. Sampling design and methods of field collection.

Identification of commercially important finfish and shellfish species.
Assessment of maturation and spawning of commercially important
species. Regular field visits of fish landing sites.
Recommended Books:
1. Bell, J.D. Rothlisherg, P.C. and Munro, J.L., 2005. Restoring and Stock
Enhancement of Marine Invertebrate Fisheries.
1. Grafton, R.Q., Hilborn, R. and Squires, D., 2010. Marine Fisheries
Ecology. Simon Jenning, Michel J. Kaiser, 2001.
2. Hand Book of Marine Fisheries Conservation and Management, R. Formatted: Font: Italic
Quientin Grafton, Ray Hilborn, Dale Squires, 2010. Formatted: Font: Italic
3. Hussain, M., 2008. Fishing Gears. HEC-Pakistan.

4. Jenning, S. and Kaiser, M.J., 2001. Marine Fisheries Ecology.
5. Munshi, A.B. and Begum, A., 2014. Sea Squid fisheries in Pakistan.
6. Munshi, Al.B. and Sobia, Fundamental Status of Marine Pollution.
3. NRC, 2000. Responsible Fisheries in the Marine Ecosystem. Michael
Sinclair, Grimur Valdinmarsson, Food and Agriculture Organization of the Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
United States, 2003. _NUMBER MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_TEXT 2_,
Font: 16 pt
4.7. Improving the Collection Management and use of Marine Fisheries
Data. National Research Council (US) Ocean Studiesstudies Board, _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
3_, Font: 13 pt, Font color: Black
2000.
5. Sinclair, M.Restoring and Valdinmarsson, G., 2003. ResponsibleStock Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
_NUMBER MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_TEXT 2_,
Enhancement of Marine Invertebrate Fisheries. Johann D. Bell, Peter C. Font: 16 pt, Italic
Rothlisherg, John L., Munro, 2005. Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Pattern: Clear (White)
6. Fishing Gears 2008 by Mukhdoom Hussain by HEC-Pakistan. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
_NUMBER MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_TEXT 2_,
7.8. Sea Squid fisheries in the Marine Ecosystem.FoodPakistan (2014) by Font: 16 pt, Not Bold, Italic, Font color: Auto, English (United
States)
133
Alia B. Munshi and Agriculture Organization of the United States. Askari
Begum.
8. Fundamental Status of Marine Pollution by Alia B. Munshi and Sobia.
MS-FA - 612: Seafood Handling, Processing and Safety

(For description please refer to Module I: MS-BOC - 615)
134
Module IV: Geological Oceanography (GO)
COASTAL AND MARINE Formatted Table
MS-GO-601 2+1=3 Crh
SEDIMENTOLOGY
Objectives:
This course is designed to acquire the knowledge about various types of

sedimentary environment and processes. This will help the students to
understand the dynamics and natural processes involved in the coastal
and marine system.
Course Outline:
Introduction to sedimentology, origin, transportation and deposition of

sediments. Sedimentary structures, their classification, morphology and
significance. Origin and classification of sedimentary facies. Provenance
of sediments. Diagenesis. Concepts of sedimentary facies and facies
associations. Physico-chemical controls of the sedimentary
environments. In-situ deposition of evaporates, authegnic and biogenic Formatted: Font: Italic
sediments.
Lab. Work:
Grain size analysis of sediments and sedimentary rocks. Megascopic and

microscopic study of sedimentary rocks. Separation and identification of
heavy minerals. Study of sedimentary structures.
Recommended Books:
1. Boggs Jr. S., 1992. Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks. Merril Publishing

Co.
2. Friedman, G.M. and Sanders, J.E., 1978. Principles of Sedimentology.
John Wiley.
3. Pettijohn, F.J., 1975. Sedimentary Rocks. Harper and Row.
1.4. Sand and Sandstone by Pettijohn, F.J., Potter, P.E. and& Siever, R.,
1972. Sand and Sandstone., Springer.
5. Prothero, D. and Schwab, F., 1996. Sedimentary Geology. W.H. Freeman
& Co.
6. Reading, H.G., 1986. Sedimentary Environment and Facies. Blackwell.
2. Reineck, H.E. and Singh, I.B., 1980. Principles of Sedimentology by
Friedman, G.M. & Sanders, J.E., 1978, John Wiley.
3.7. Depositional Sedimentary Environments. by Reineck, H.E. & Singh, I.B., Formatted: Font: Italic
1980, Springer-Verlag.
8. Selly, R.C., 1988. Applied Sedimentology. Chapman & Hall.
4. Tucker, M.E. and Wright, V.P., 1990. Carbonate Sedimentology. by Formatted: Font: Italic
135
Tucker, M.E. & Wright, V.P., 1990, Blackwell.
5.9. Sedimentary Environment and Facies by Reading, H.G., 1986,
Blackwell.
6. Applied Sedimentology by Selly, R.C., 1988, Chapman & Hall.

7. Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks by Boggs Jr. S., 1992, Merril
Publishing Co.
8. Sedimentary Rocks by Pettijohn, F.J., 1975, Harper and Row.
9. Sedimentary Geology by Prothero, D. & Schwab, F., 1996, W.H.
Freeman & Co.
MS-GO-602 GEOLOGY OF THE ARABIAN SEA 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The primary goal is to provide background and exposure to current

geological knowledge of Arabian Sea. To acquaint students with Arabian
Sea geology and its resources prospects. This will pave the way for better
exploration and management of offshore environment.
Course Outline:
Geological evolution of Arabian Sea. Geology of the coastal regions of

Arabian sea. Physiographic and structural features of Arabian sea.
Geodynamics and sedimentation of Mekran and Indus continental
margins. Geology of the Indus delta and Indus Fan systems. Geology of
DSDP and ODP-Well sites from Arabian sea. Seismic stratigraphy of the
northern Arabian sea. Mineralogy and geochemistry of Arabian sea
sediments. Sea level changes, Oxygen Minimum Zone variations and its
influence on Arabian sea sediments. Sedimentary record of climatic
variations and Himalayan orogeny. Offshore hydrocarbon and Mineral
resource prospects. Heavy metal pollution in the sediments of Arabian
Sea.
Lab. Work:
Selected Exercises based on national and international Geological

research Cruises data of Arabian sea.
Recommended Books:
1. Clift, P.D., Kroon, D., Gaedicke, C. and Craig, J., 2005. The Tectonic and
Climatic Evolution of the Arabian Sea Region. Geological Special
Publication No.195.
1.2. Haq, B.U. and Milliman, J.D., (Eds.) 1984. Marine Geology and Formatted: Font: Italic
136
Oceanography of Arabian Sea and Coastal Pakistan. by Haq, B.U. and
Milliman, J.D. (eds) 1984, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.
3. Legget, J.K., (Ed.), 1982. Trench and Fore-arc Geology: Sedimentation and
Tectonics on modern and Ancient active Plate margin. Blackwell Scientific.
Oxford.
4. Nair, A.E.M. and Stehli, F.G (Eds.). The Ocean Basins and Margins. The
Indian Ocean. Plenum, New York.
2.5. R.D. et al., (Eds.), 1975. Initial Reports of the Deep Sea Drilling
Project, 1975. Vol. 23 by Whitmarsh, R.D; et al., (eds) 1975, Washington,
D.C; U.S. Government Printing Office.
3. Weimer, P. and Link, M.H., (Eds.), 1991. Trench and Fore-arc Geology:
Sedimentation and Tectonics on modern and Ancient active Plate margin by
Legget, J.K. (ed) 1982, Blackwell Scientific. Oxford.
4. The Ocean Basins and Margins, 6. The Indian Ocean by Nair, A.E.M. and
Stehli, F.G (eds) Plenum, New York.
5. The Tectonic and Climatic Evolution of the Arabian Sea Region by
P.D.Clift, D.Kroon, C.Gaedicke and J. Craig; 2005, Geological Special
Publication No.195.
6. Seismic Facies and Sedimentary Processes of Submarine Fans and
Turbidite Systems., by Weimer, P and Link, M.H (eds) 1991, Springer,
New York.
MS-GO-603 HYDROGEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The primary goal is to provide background and exposure to current hydro-

geological knowledge of Earth. This will pave the way for better
understanding of underground environment.
Course Outline:
Introduction, Hydrogeologic cycle, water budgets, Aquifer properties,

Aquifer properties, continued, Groundwater flow, Flow of groundwater to
wells, Aquifer tests and monitoring well installation, Regional
groundwater flow, case studies, Groundwater-surface water interactions,
case studies, Geochemistry of groundwater, Groundwater pollution (e.g.,
nitrate, heavy metals, organics), Contaminant transport, case studies,
Geochemical tracers, stable isotopes, case studies.
Lab. Work:
There will be at least 1 field trip (one or two days) to a nearby groundwater
contamination site.
Recommended Books:
137
1. Fetter, C.W.Jr., 2014. Applied Hydrogeology. 4th Ed., Pearson Education
Limited, 598 pp.
2. Hiscock, K.M., 2009. Hydrogeology: Principles and Practice. Wiley-
Blackwell, 408 pp.
3.2. Heath, R.C., 1987. Basic Ground-Water Hydrology. Geological Survey
water-supply paper; 2220, United States Government Printing Office, p. 84.
3. Hiscock, K.M., 2009. Hydrogeology: Principles and Practice. Wiley-
Blackwell, 408 pp.
4. Uliana, M.M., 2012. Basic Hydrogeology. 1st Ed., An Introduction to the
Fundamentals of Groundwater Science.
5.4. Tafesse, N.T., 2010. Basic Principles of Hydrogeology: Basic
Concepts and Methods. VDM Verlag Dr. Müller, 188 pp.
5. Uliana, M.M., 2012. Basic Hydrogeology. 1st Ed., An Introduction to the
Fundamentals of Groundwater Science.
MARINE GEOPHYSICS AND Formatted Table

MS-GO-604 2+1=3 Crh
EXPLORATION
Objectives:
This a wide spectrum of marine geophysical exploration methods have

been developed in last two decades. The range of application extends
from marine resource exploration to scientific investigations in the deep
ocean. Introduction to Marine Geophysics course is designed to provides
students knowledge of basic field skills in applied marine geophysics. The
aim is to introduce the basic physical principles of off shore exploration
and practical application to the geophysical techniques. At undergraduate
level marine science students will highly benefit from understandings the
role of geophysics particularly in hydrocarbon and mineral exploration.
Course Outline:
Scope of Marine geophysics. Introduction to different geophysical

techniques. Gravity, Magnetic, Electrical and Seismic methods. High
resolution and low resolution geophysical methods. Offshore
138
Geophysical logging for resource evaluation. Instrumentation and
Usages. Introduction to geophysical data acquisition, processing and
interpretation. Applications of geophysical techniques for exploration of
mineral deposits, oil, gas, subsurface water and engineering works;
introduction to seismology and geodynamics.
Lab. Work:
Analysis and interpretation of geophysical data, Seismic images

interpretation and understanding of subsurface geological features.
Recommended Books:
1. Dobrin, M.B. and Savit, C. H., 1988. Applied Geophysics by W. M.

Telford, L. P. Geldart R. E. Sheriff, 2010. Cambridge University Press;
2nd edition.
2. Introduction to Geophysical Exploration by Philip Kearey, Michael
Brooks, Ian Hill; 2002. 3rd ed. Blackwell Scientific Publications,
London.
3. Introduction to Well Logs and Subsurface Maps by Jonathan C. Evenick,
2008: PennWell Corp.; illustrated edition.
4.1. Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting. by Dobrin, M.B. & Savit, C.
H., 1988, McGraw Hill.
2. Evenick, J.C., 2008. Introduction to Well Logs and Subsurface Maps.
PennWell Corp.; illustrated edition.
3. Kearey, P., Brooks, M. and Hill, I., 2002. Introduction to Geophysical
Exploration. 3rd ed. Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
5.4. Basic Exploration Geophysics by Robinson, E.S. and& Coruh, C.,
1988. Basic Exploration Geophysics., John Wiley and Sons.
6.5. Sharma, P.V., 1987. Geophysical methods in geology. by Sharma,
P.V., 1987, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company.
6. Telford, W.M., Geldart, L.P. and Sheriff, R.E., 2010. Applied Geophysics.
2nd edition, Cambridge University Press.
MS-GO-605 MARINE NON-LIVING RESOURCES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course will enable students to have an idea regarding non-living marine
resources of Pakistan and possibility of exploiting them.
Course Outline:
Introduction and Overview - Progress in offshore exploration technology.

Non-living resources and geological environments. Non-living resources
139
types, Origin and distribution. Hydrocarbons, Oceanic Hydrates, Minerals,
Building Material, Metals, Marine Energy Resources (Waves, Tides, OTEC
Energy), Chemicals, Drugs. Metal deposits in the ocean. Coastal & marine
mineral resources. placer minerals, sulfides, oxides and. metalliferous
muds. Manganese nodules and cobalt crusts. Gas hydrate - crystalline gas
hydrate - formation of gas hydrate and global oceanic distribution. Law of
the Sea - International Seabed Authority.
Lab. Work:
Specified assignments.
Recommended Books:
1. Bentor, Y.K., 1980. Marine phosphorites-geochemistry, occurrence,

genesis. Soc Econ Palentol Mineral Soc Publ 29 Tulsa Oklahoma.
2. Degens, E.T. and Ross D.A., 1969. Hot brines and recent heavy metal
deposits in the Red sea. Springer.
3. Fischer, A.G. and Judson, S. (Eds.), 1975. Petroleum and global
tectonics. University Press, Princeton.
4. Glasby, G.P., 1977. Marine manganese deposits. Elsevier.
5. Skinner, B.J. and Turrekian, K.K., 1973. Man and the Ocean. Prentice-
Hal.
1.6. Thiede, J. and Suess, E. (Eds.), 1983. Coastal upwelling: Its
sedimentary record, Part B: Sedimentary records of ancient coastal
upwelling, Plenum Press, New York
2.7. Whelan, J.K. and Farrington, J.W. (Eds.), 1992. Organic matter:
Productivity, accumulation and preservation in recent and ancient
sediments, Columbia University Press. New York.
140
3. Fischer, A.G. and Judson, S. (Eds.), 1975. Petroleum and global
tectonics. University Press, Princeton.
4. Glasby, G.P., 1977. Marine manganese deposits. Elsevier.
5. Bentor, Y.K., 1980. Marine phosphorites-geochemistry, occurrence,
genesis. Soc Econ Palentol Mineral Soc Publ 29 Tulsa Oklahoma.
6. Skinner, B.J. and Turrekian, K.K., 1973. Man and the Ocean. Prentice-
Hal.
7. Degens, E.T. and Ross D.A., 1969. Hot brines and recent heavy metal
deposits in the Red sea. Springer.
MS-GO-606 OCEAN BASIN EVOLUTION 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course is designed to acquire the knowledge about the various types
of plate boundaries, their kinematics and dynamics. This will help the
students to understand the sea floor spreading and geological histories
of the ocean basin.
Course Outline:
Marine magnetic anomalies and sea-floor spreading. Individual ocean

geological history. Heat distribution and age of the ocean crust. Island arc,
back arc basins. Rocks of the ocean crust. Volcanism and oceanic ridges.
Paleo-magnetism and plate stratigraphy. Oceanic ridges. Hot spot and
Mantle plumes. Tectonic evolution of the ocean basins. Mineral resources.
Lab. Work:
Specified assignments/projects/Field visits with respect to fossil record

collection.
Recommended Books:
1. Moores, E.M. and Twiss, R.J., 1995. Tectonics. W.H. Freeman and Co.
2. Keary, P. & Vine, F.J., 1996. Global Tectonics. Blackwell.
3.1. Cox, A. and Hort, R.B., 1986. Plate Tectonics: How it Works. Blackwell.
2. Keary, P. & Vine, F.J., 1996. Global Tectonics. Blackwell.
4. Windley, B.F., 1984. The Evolving Continents. John Wiley & Sons.
5.3. Kereay, P., Klepeis, K.A. and Vine, F.J., 2009. Global Tectonics.
Blackwell Scientific Publications.
4. Moores, E.M. and Twiss, R.J., 1995. Tectonics. W.H. Freeman and Co.
5. Windley, B.F., 1984. The Evolving Continents. John Wiley & Sons.
Formatted: Font: (Default) Times New Roman, 12 pt
141
MS-GO-607 PALEO-OCEANOGRAPHY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted: Font: 14 pt
Objectives: Formatted: Font: 14 pt
This course is intended for advanced undergraduate and graduate students Formatted Table
who are interested in learning about the history of the oceans and earth’s
climate.. Students will acquire a broad spectrum of geological approaches,
including paleontology, geochemistry and stratigraphy, to interpret the
history of oceans and how paleoclimate studies help to learn more about
the workings of the climate system.
Course Outline:
Introduction to Paleoceanograhy. Global paleoceanographic evolution.

Major Paleoceanographic and Paleoclimatic Events in ocean history,
Paleomonsoons. Marine geological record, Geochemistry of ancient
oceans. Past ocean chemistry and water mass tracers, Paleoceanograhy
and Paleoproductivity Indicators, Carbon Isotopes and Oxygen Isotope in
Paleoceanography. Pacific, Atlantic and Indian Ocean Paleoceanography,
Oceanic History of Calcium Carbonate Compensation Depth.
Lab. Work:
Paleoclimatic reconstruction techniques and sources of paleo climatic

information. Dating methods. Selected Paleoceanographic exercises of
marine geological records.
Recommended Books:
1. James P. K., 1982. Marine Geology. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
1. Blum, P., 1997. Physical properties handbook: a guide to the shipboard

measurement of physical properties of deep-sea cores. ODP Tech.
Note.
2. Bradley, R.S., 1999. Chapt. 3.2.3, Uranium-series dating, p. 76-80,
Paleoclimatology.
3. Elderfield H., (Ed.), 2006. The oceans and marine geochemistry.
Treatise on geochemistry vol 6. Elsevier.
2.4. Fischer, G. and Wefer, (Eds.) 1999. Use of proxies in
paleoceanography. Examples from the South Atlantic. Springer-Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg.
3. Elderfield H., (Ed.), 2006. The oceans and marine geochemistry.
Treatise on geochemistry vol 6. Elsevier.
4. Bradley, R.S., 1999. Chapt. 3.2.3, Uranium-series dating, p. 76-80,
Paleoclimatology.
5. Hillaire-Marcel C. and Vernal A.de., (Eds.), 2007. Proxies in Late
Cenozoic Paleoceanography. Elsevier, Pergamon.
142
6. Blum, P., 1997. Physical properties handbook: a guide to the shipboard
measurement of physical properties of deep-sea cores. ODP Tech.
Note.
7. Scrutton R. A. and Talwani, M., 1982. The Ocean Floor. John Wiley, New
York.
8. Sen, B.K., 1999, Gupta Modern Foraminifera Kluwer, Academic
Publishers.
6. James P. K., 1982. Marine Geology. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs,
N.
9.7. Ruddiman, W. F., 2001. Earth's Climate: past and future. W.H. Freeman
& Son.
8. Scrutton R. A. and Talwani, M., 1982. The Ocean Floor. John Wiley, NY.
9. Sen, B.K., 1999, Gupta Modern Foraminifera Kluwer, Academic
Publishers.
MS-GO-608 PETROLEUM GEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand the process that lead to the generation of petroleum and to

the accumulation of a viable oil field. To gain familiarity with the basic
techniques of petroleum exploration.
Course Outline:
Introduction to Petroleum Geology, Overview of Basic Physical Principles,

Earth System, Review of Sedimentary Rocks, Overview of Stratigraphy,
Depositional Systems, Marine Biological and Chemical Sedimentary
Processes. Properties of Formation Water, Oil and Gas. Physical
Principles in Fluid Environments, Subsurface Temperature and Pressure,
Physical Principles Fluid Equation List. Generation and Migration of
Petroleum, Reservoir Properties, Traps and Seals, Sedimentary Basins
and Petroleum Systems, Methods of Petroleum Exploration, Introduction
to Stratigraphic Analysis, Introduction to Seismic Stratigraphy,
Production and Recovery, Hydrocarbon Production and Recovery, Case
Studies / Regional Petroleum Geology.
Lab. Work:
Pressure Exercise and Application of Ideal Gas Law. Intro to Isopach

Mapping. Paleofacies Analysis. Structure Contour Mapping.
Recommended Books:
1. Selley, R.C., 1998. Elements of Petroleum Geology. 2nd Ed., Academic

Press, Toronto, 470 pp.
143
2.1. Link, P.K., 2007. Basic Petroleum Geology. 3rd Ed. 443 pp.
3.2. Richard, C.S. and Sonnenberg, S.A., 2014. Elements of Petroleum
Geology. 3rd Ed. Elsevier, 526 pp.
3. Selley, R.C., 1998. Elements of Petroleum Geology. 2nd Ed., Academic
Press, Toronto, 470 pp.
Formatted: Normal
144
PLATE TECTONICS AND Formatted Table
MS-GO-609 2+1=3 Crh
COASTAL STRUCTURES
Objectives:
To describe the processes by which the Earth formed and continues to

modify itself through Plate Tectonics. Explain supporting evidence for plate
tectonics, the different types of plate boundaries, the driving forces, the
resulting landforms, and the ocean basin cycle.
Course Outline:
Introduction to the Coastal Zone: Society, Landforms, and Processes,

Origins of the water planet, Plate tectonics, Plate tectonics and the ocean
floor, Marine provinces and sediments - clues to the past and present.
Introduction to Coastal Zone Hazards: Long and Short-term Processes of
Change and Their Impacts on Society. Water, and why it is special?
Chemistry of saltwater and why it matters? The global heat budget and
winds, Fisheries. Wind-driven circulation: surface currents, Density-
driven circulation: Deep circulation and structure, Waves, Tides,
constantly changing coasts, Estuaries, wetlands, and coastal seas, Living
in salt water: major biological groups and adaptations, Biological
productivity: primary and secondary production, energy transfer, Pelagic
communities, Benthic communities, Challenges of sustainability:
resources from the sea and marine pollution, Challenges of sustainability:
climate change.
Lab. Work:
Identify and describe observations related to the course. Local marine

ecosystem or coastal habitats, or any sustainable or unsustainable
practices related to marine habitats or organisms.
Recommended Books:
1. Lastovicka, J., 2009. Geophysics and Geochemistry. Vol. 1, EOLSS

Publications, 348 pp.
2.1. Davidson-Arnott, R., 2009. Introduction to Coastal Processes and
Geomorphology. Cambridge University Press, 434 pp.
2. Lastovicka, J., 2009. Geophysics and Geochemistry. Vol. 1, EOLSS
Publications, 348 pp.
3. Trujillo, A.P. and Thurman, H.V., 2011. Essentials of Oceanography. 10th
Ed., Prentice Hall/ Pearson.
145
MS-GO-610 QUATERNARY GEOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
The Quaternary Period comprises the last 1.5 million years of Earth history,
an interval dominated by climate fluctuations. Studies of Quaternary
environments are increasingly important to understand the scale and
rapidity of climatic and environmental changes in the modern world. This
course will cover geologic evidence, that are used to reconstruct ocean and
atmospheric conditions (e.g., temperature) through the Quaternary. Formatted: Font: Italic
Understanding of recent coastal deposits and coastal features within the

context of Late Quaternary climate variability.
Course Outline:
Introduction to the Quaternary, Quaternary Stratigraphy Oxygen Isotope
stratigraphy, biostratigraphy and magnetostratigraphy, glacial-
interglacial cycles, eustatic changes, The oceanic record, Pleistocene sea
level, proxy indicators of paleoenvironmental/ paleoclimatic changes,
Responses of geomorphic systems to climate, sea level and tectonics on
variable time scales in the Quaternary,. Quaternary dating methods,
radiocarbon chronology, annual (varves, tree rings), Milankovitch Orbital
cycles, D-O / H- events & last glacial termination (i.e., 20 - 7 ka), Ocean
Circulation, neotectonics and their applications to natural coastal hazard
assessment.
Lab. Work:
Study of the coastal areas of Pakistan.
Recommended Books:
1. Andersen, B. G., and Borns, Jr., H. W., 1994, The ice age world: Oslo,
Norway, Scandiavian University Press, 208 p.
2. Bowen, D.Q., 1978. Quaternary Geology: A stratigraphic framework for
multidisciplinary work, Parts 1-4. Pergamon Press.
3. Ehlers, J., and Gibbard, P. L., 2004, Quaternary glaciations, extent and
chronology, part II: North America: Elsevier, Netherlands,
Developments in Quaternary Science 2, Rose, J., Series editor, 440 p.
2.4. Ruddiman, W. F., 2000, Earth's climate: past and future: San
Francisco, California, Freeman.
3.5. Siegert, M. J., 2001, Ice sheets and late Quaternary environmental
change: New York, New York, Wiley, 231 p.
4.6. Williams, M., Dunkerley, D., De Deckker, P., Kerhsaw, P., and
Chappell, J., 1998, Quaternary Environments (2nd edition): New York,
Oxford University Press, 329 p.
5. Ehlers, J., and Gibbard, P. L., 2004, Quaternary glaciations, extent and
146
chronology, part II: North America: Elsevier, Netherlands,
Developments in Quaternary Science 2, Rose, J., Series editor, 440 p.
6. Bowen, D.Q., 1978. Quaternary Geology: A stratigraphic framework for
multidisciplinary work, Parts 1-4. Pergamon Press.
7. Zhisheng, An., Earth Surface Processes and Landforms (Chichester
Quaternary geology: Proceedings of the 30th International Geological.
SEA LEVEL CHANGES AND Formatted Table

MS-GO-611 2+1=3 Crh
COASTAL ZONES
Objectives:
The main aim is to understand the sea level changes processes and its
effects on coastal environment. How a coastal system responds to different
sea level variations scenarios. To understand the delicate and complex
dynamics of costal zones in relation to recent rise in sea level and
associated coastal dynamics.
Sea level changes and causes, Eustasy and Isostasy, Regional and global
effects of sea level changes. Effects of sea level changes on shorelines.
Sea level Processes and indicators. Changes in coastal environments,
Coastal dunes, Estuaries and Lagoons, Deltas. Physical processes,
Coastal ecosystem, Human activities, Coastal issues.
Lab. Work:
Specified assignments/ projects.

Recommended Books: Formatted: Left
1. Bird, E.C.F. and Schwartz, M.L. (eds.) 1985. The words Coastlines. Van
Nostrand Rheinhold, New York.
1. Basco, D.R.1982. Surf Zone Currents. MR-82-7, Coastal Eng. Res.
Centre, US Army.
2. Bird, E.C.F, 1984. Coasts, An Introduction to coastal geomorphology.
Basil Blackwell.
3. Bird, E.C.F, 1985. Coastline Changes. Wiley interscience.
4. Basco, D.R.1982. Surf Zone Currents. MR-82-7, Coastal Eng. Res.
Centre, US Army.
4. Bird, E.C.F. and Schwartz, M.L. (eds.) 1985. The words Coastlines. Van
Nostrand Rheinhold, New York.
5. Carter, R.W.G; 1988. Coastal Environments, An introduction to the
Physical, Ecological and cultural systems of coastlines. Academic
Press.
147
148
MS-GO-612 SEISMIC STUDIES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To discuss the concept and limitations of basic theory for seismic wave
propagation; to use principles of seismological instrumentation to select suitable
equipment for various applications; and to locate the earthquake source and
calculate in detail the mechanism from seismic observations. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
2_, Font: Bold, Font color: Black, English (United States),
Course Outline: Condensed by 0.1 pt
Sources of seismic waves. Seismic wave propagation. The wave equation in Formatted: Pattern: Clear
different forms. Exact and approximate (numerical) solution methods such as
ray tracing and tomography. Examples of the results of the modelling of
seismological data. Body and surface waves in heterogeneous media. Data
storage and analysis. Networks and arrays. Earthquake source parameters.
Macroseismic studies. Risk and hazard. Seismotectonics. Earthquake statistics.
Lab. Work:
Specified assignments/projects.
Recommended Books:
1. Lay, T. and Wallace, T.C., 1995. International Geophysics: Modern

Global Seismology. Elsevier Science, 534 pp.
1.2. Lay, T. and Wallace, T.C., 1995. Modern Global Seismology.
Academic Press, 535 pp.
2. Lay, T. and Wallace, T.C., 1995. International Geophysics: Modern
Global Seismology. Elsevier Science, 534 pp.
3. McDonald, J.A. (Ed.), 1983. Seismic Studies in Physical Modeling.
Springer, 258 pp.
149
Module V: Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM)
BASIC PRINCIPLES AND Formatted Table

MS-ICZM-601 2+1=3 Crh
SCOPE OF ICZM
Objectives:
To define ICM and the common terminology involved in discussing ICM

principles and approaches; To explain the scope and functions of ICM and
the typical actions relating to each function. To understand the principles
of good governance, sustainable development.
Course Outline:
Introduction to the need for ICM and the link between social ecological
systems and single sector development approaches. Terms and
definitions: ICM and ICZM as defined by different organizations and
experts, key terms in ICM including integrates, sustainable development,
process versus project. Overview of the eleven principles that reflect the
character and uniqueness of oceans and coasts under the three headings
used by Cicin-Sains and Knecht (1998), plus additional information
regarding more recent developments in ICM. Internationally accepted
definitions for coastal zone and coastal waters: Internal waters, Territorial
waters, Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ), Continental shelf.
Lab. Work:
Identify and describe the objectives and functions of at least three

important regional intergovernmental or non-governmental organisations/
programs, or other regional cooperation initiatives, involved with coastal
and marine area and/ or resources management. Group based discussion
guided by a set of questions uncovering “Why is ICM needed?”
Recommended Books:
1. Cicin-Sain, B. and Knecht, R.W., 1998. Integrated Coastal and Ocean

Management: Concepts and Practices. Island Press, USA. 517 pp.
2. Clark, J.R., 1992. Integrated Management of Coastal Zones. FAO
Fisheries Technical Paper No. 327. Food and Agricultural Organization
of the United Nations, Rome, Italy. 167 pp.
3. Haines-Young, R. and Potschin, M. 2011. Integrated Coastal Zone
Management and the Ecosystem Approach. CEM Working Paper No 7,
University of Nottingham, England. 17 pp.
4. Moore, P., Zhang, X. and Triraganon, R., 2011. Natural Resource
Governance Trainers’ Manual. IUCN, RECOFT, SNV, Bangkok, Thailand.
150
COASTAL ECOSYSTEM AND Formatted Table
CLIMATE CHANGE
Objectives:
To explore how the predicted changes in climate during the present century
may affect coastal ecosystems and to examine the likely impacts of climate
change on mangroves and corals. To understand the basic concepts of
climate change and resilience. To identify various ecosystems based tools
for climate change adaptation.
Course Outline:
Terms and definitions: IPCC and UNFCCC, Climate Change, Weather and
Climate. Overview on component on climate change covering principal
components of global climate change that most affect coastal
ecosystems: Carbon Dioxide, Acidification of the Oceans, Temperature,
Sea Level Rise, Extreme Weather Events and Changes in Precipitation.
Introduction to Disaster Risk Reduction for coastal communities. Why do
disasters matter to sustainable development? Disaster trends. Explain the
definitions of disaster, disaster risk, and disaster risk reduction making
the linkages to climate change. Case study analysis to understand
disaster risk. Explore why ecosystems matter to reducing disasters,
including a comparison of Eco-DRR and Ecosystems Based Approach.
Lab. Work:
Comparative analysis of ecosystem-based adaptation and engineering

options. Other case studies also available for lab exploration.
Recommended Books:
1. McLeod, E. and Salm, R.V., 2006. Managing Mangroves for Resilience
to Climate Change. IUCN, Gland, Switzerland. 64 pp.
Souter, D.W. and Linden, O., 2000. The health and future of coral reef
systems. Ocean and Coastal Management 43: 657-688.Comparative
analysis of ecosystem-based adaptation and engineering options. Other
case studies also available for lab exploration.
Recommended Books:
2. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
3.1. IPCC., 2012. IPCC Special Report on Extreme Events, Summary for 3_, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Condensed by
Policymakers. 29. Geneva: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change 0.1 pt
First Joint Session of Working Groups I and II. Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.24", No bullets or numbering,
Pattern: Clear (White)
to Climate Change. IUCN, Gland, Switzerland. 64 pp.
151
4.3. Renaud, K. F., Sudmeier-Rieux and Estrella, M., 2015. The Role of
Ecosystems in Disaster Risk Reduction, eds. Bonn: United Nations
University. UN/ ISDR. Global Assessment Report. Geneva: UN/ ISDR.
4. Souter, D.W. and Linden, O., 2000. The health and future of coral reef
systems. Ocean and Coastal Management 43: 657-688.
COASTAL RESILIENCE AND Formatted Table

DISASTER RISK REDUCTION
Objectives:
To understand the concept and components of resilience for providing

conceptual framework for managing socio-ecological systems. To
understand the basic concepts of disasters, disaster risk reduction and
resilience. To identify various ecosystem based tools in reducing disaster
risk and climate change adaptation.
Course Outline:
Importance of implementing resilience concepts, strategy building and

planning, ecosystem services and reduction of vulnerability in disasters.
The importance of DRR in reducing sensitivity and exposure and
establishing systems for detection, response and recovery. How the
integration of resilience data can secure and strengthen ecosystem
service delivery, promote adaptation of ecosystems and economic
activity. How data can support development of adaptation action plans, to
measure and communicate changes over time etc. Introduction to Disaster
Risk Reduction for coastal communities. Why do disasters matter to
sustainable development? Disaster trends. Definitions of disaster,
disaster risk, and disaster risk reduction making the linkages to climate
change. Case study analysis to understand disaster risk. Why ecosystems
matter to reducing disasters, comparison of Eco-DRR and Ecosystems
Based Approach.
Lab. Work:

Recommended Books:
152
Recommended Books:
1. IPCC. 2012. IPCC Special Report on Extreme Events, Summary for

Policymakers. 29. Geneva: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
First Joint Session of Working Groups I and II.
1.2. McLeod, E. and Salm, R.V., 2006. Managing Mangroves for
Resilience to Climate Change. IUCN, Gland, Switzerland. 64 pp.
3. IPCC. 2012. IPCC Special Report on Extreme Events, Summary for
Policymakers. 29. Geneva: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
First Joint Session of Working Groups I and II.
4.3. Renaud, K. F., Sudmeier-Rieux and Estrella, M., 2015. The Role of
Ecosystems in Disaster Risk Reduction, eds. Bonn: United Nations
University. UN/ ISDR. Global Assessment Report. Geneva: UN/ISDR.
5. UNEP EBM guidance, EbA decision support framework:
COASTAL TOURISM Formatted Table

MANAGEMENT
To explore the opportunities and threats of coastal tourism development Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.98 li
on coastal ecosystems and local communities and how these can be
managed using tried and tested tools and the ICM approach.
Course Outline:
The connections between coastal tourism development and the impacts Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.98 li
on local environments and communities. How the ICM principles and
practices are applied to understand the tradeoffs involved in coastal
tourism development using select case studies? Introduction to
sustainable coastal management and tourism development.
Understanding the linkages between coastal tourism development and the
impacts on the local environment and local community. Understanding
Carrying Capacity as an essential part of sustainable management
decision making and the basic approach for managing tourism. Applying
the ICM principles to explore the issues, threats and opportunities of
coastal tourism development. Introducing recognized codes of conduct
that support sustainable coastal tourism. Explore case studies that
highlight good and bad practice in coastal tourism development.
Lab. Work:
153
Management Plan Exercises may be given.
Recommended Books:
1. Buckley, R., 2003. Environmental inputs and outputs in ecotourism:

Geotourism with a positive triple bottom line? Journal of Ecotourism 2(1):
76-82.
2. Burke, L., Reytar, K., Spalding, M., & Perry, A., 2011. Reefs at Risk
Revisited. Washington, DC, USA: World Resources Institute.
3. Daldeniz, B., and Hampton, M. P., 2012. Dive Tourism and Local
Communities: Active Participation or Subject to Impacts? Case Studies
from Malaysia. International journal of tourism research.
4. Graci, S., and Dodds, R., 2010. Sustainable tourism in island destinations.
London, England: Earthscan.
5. Hall, C. M., 2001. Trends in ocean and coastal tourism: the end of the last
frontier? Ocean & Coastal Management, 44: 601-618.
6. Hawkins, J. P., Roberts, C. M., Kooistra, D., Buchan, K., and White, S.,
2005. Sustainability of scuba diving tourism on coral reefs of Saba.
Coastal Management, 33(4): 373-387.
7. Kokkranikal, J., McLellan, R., and Baum, T., 2003. Island tourism and
sustainability: A case study of the Lakshadweep Islands Journal of
Sustainable Tourism, 11(5): 426-447.
MS-ICZM-605 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 3(2+1) Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand coastal zones, the dynamic environments shaped by natural

forces as well as human intervention. To enable students to develop
management strategies and identify threats to these environments.
Course Outline:
History, definition, systems view of the coast. Abiotic subsystems:

classification of coasts, wave, current, sediment transport. Biotic
subsystem: marine and coastal ecosystems, eco-toxicology, marine
pollution. Socio-economic subsystem: social, economic, legal and
political dimensions. Coastal zone protection infrastructures beach
nourishment, groins, revetments, breakwater, coastal embankment,
cyclone shelter. Development options in the coast - tourism and
recreation, fisheries, nature conservation. Policy analysis and case
studies, coastal pressures, critical management issues and use conflict
analysis - case examples, and use of GIS, global climate change, sea level
rise and coastal adaptive management, fisheries issues and& sustainable
aquaculture.
Lab. Work:
154
Case studies, Study of Regional legislation, Field trip to coastal areas and
monitoring of beaches.
Recommended Books:
1. Beatley, T., Brower, D.J., Schwab, A.K., An introduction to coastal zone

management.
2. Clark, J.R., Coastal zone management handbook.
3. Sharma, P., Coastal Zone Management.
4.3. Moksness, E., Dahl, E., Stottrup, J., Integrated Coastal Zone
Management.
4. Sharma, P., Coastal Zone Management.
Formatted: Normal, Left
155
MARINE PROTECTED Formatted Table
AREAS MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To introduce the concept and global experiences of Marine Protected Areas

(MPA) management, as applied for marine biodiversity conservation,
fisheries management, and sustainable tourism. To apply the concept of
coastal use zonation and MPA management through a case study exercise
of Mafia Island.
Course Outline:
Defining MPAs, Role of MPAs in protecting marine biodiversity, Types and

categories of MPAs, Benefits from MPAs, Evidence of the positive impacts of
MPAs, Best practice in establishing MPAs, MPAs and ICM, Zoning and MPAs,
Use of GIS tools in marine spatial planning, Designing resilient MPAs and MPA
networks, Case studies.
Lab. Work:
This course is taught with the aid of videos and class discussion and a working
group activity. Working groups of 4-5 people students will read the case study
of an island experiencing a number of emerging coastal management issues.
Let students analyze the issues and describe the approach to be taken in finding
solutions to the multiple and interlinked management issues. Presentation of
work to the class.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 2003. Commonwealth of Australia, The Benefits of Marine

Protected Areas.
2. Anonymous, 2006. Scaling up Marine Management: The role of Marine
Protected Areas. Washington, DC, The International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development, The World Bank.120.
1.3. Anonymous, 2008. Department for Environmental, Food and Rural
Affairs. The Marine and Coastal Access Bill. United Kingdom.
2. Anonymous, 2003. Commonwealth of Australia, The Benefits of Marine Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
Protected Areas. 3_, Font: Bold, Font color: Black, English (United Kingdom)
3.4. Anonymous, 2008. IUCN World Commission on Protected Areas (IUCN-
WCPA) Establishing resilient Marine Protected Area networks – Making it
happen.
156
4. Anonymous, 2006. Scaling up Marine Management: The role of Marine
Protected Areas. Washington, DC, The International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development, The World Bank.120.
MARINE SPATIAL PLANNING Formatted Table

AND CONFLICT MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To introduce coastal and marine spatial planning (MSP) as a tool/ planning

approach for ICM. To explore the nature of conflict and the principles of
and approaches for conflict resolution as part of conflict management. To
examine the nature of dispute resolution processes and practices. To
understand the rational for conflict resolution in ICM.
Course Outline:
Introduction to concept and practice of Marine Spatial Planning (MSP), why

MSP is needed, introduction of the seven key steps in MSP process. Nature of
conflict and conflict management. Strategies for dealing with conflict: competing,
accommodating, avoiding, collaborating, compromising. Conflict resolution
approaches: Direct negotiation, conciliation, mediation, arbitration, litigation.
Overview of consensus building. Rational for conflict resolution.
Lab. Work:
Conflict management and negotiation: role play exercise on conflict

management in near shore fisheries management.
Recommended Books:
1. Charles, E. and Douvere, F. 2009. Marine Spatial Planning: a step-by-

step approach toward ecosystem-based management.
Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission and Man and the
Biosphere Programme. IOC Manual and Guides No. 53, ICAM Dossier
No. 6. Paris: UNESCO.
2. Clark, J.R., Coastal Zone Management Handbook.
3. Thia-Eng, C., Essential elements of integrated coastal zone
management.
4. FAO Corporate Document Repository; Title: Integrated coastal area
management and agriculture, forestry and fisheries. Part E: Conflict
resolution in integrated coastal area management. Produced by Natural
Resources Management and Environment Department.
5. Thomas, K.W. and Kilmann, R.H., 2018. Conflict Mode Instrument
Profile and Interpretive Report.
157
MS-ICZM- NATIONAL POLICIES AND Formatted Table
3(2+1) Chr
608 INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS
Objectives:
To explain the concept of governance; To review the institutional

arrangements, relevant agencies responsible for coastal and marine
resources management in Pakistan; To review the national legal
framework, policies and regulations used to manage coastal and marine
resources; To review the International Conventions ratified by Pakistan that
support and necessitate sustainable coastal resource management.
Course Outline:
Governance concepts, efficiency of management, coastal institutions, and Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
coastal management process in Pakistan. Sustainable coastal and marine

resources. Role of forestry, fisheries departments, coastal development
authorities, port authorities, municipal and town authorties, Environmental
Protection Agencies, Pakistan Navy, Maritime Security Agency, Private
Sector Organisations and civil society organisations etc. United Nations
Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD), Montreal Protocol, UN Convention on Law of Seas
(UNCLOS), Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species
(CITES), Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants, MARPOL
73/78, Memorandum of Understanding on the Conservation and Management
of Marine Turtles and their Habitats of the Indian Ocean and South-East Asia,
Ramsar Convention, Convention on the International Maritime Organization,
Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals,
Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety etc. Formatted: Font: Bold, Font color: Black, English (United
Kingdom), Condensed by 0.3 pt
Lab. Work:
Institutional mapping exercise - outlining all relevant agencies/

organizations that have a role in coastal marine resource management and
their relationship to each other.
Recommended Books:
1. Cicin-Sain, B. and Knecht, R W, 1998. Integrated Coastal and Ocean

Management: Concepts and Practices. Island Press, USA. 517pp.
2. Patti Moore, Xuemei Zhang, and Ronakorn Triraganon, 2011. Natural
Resource Governance Trainers Manual. IUCN, RECOFTC, SNV,
158
Bangkok Thailand.
3.2. Grindle, Merilee S. 2002. Good Enough Governance: Poverty
Reduction and Reform in Developing Countries. Prepared by the
Poverty Reduction Group of the World Bank.
3. Patti Moore, Xuemei Zhang, and Ronakorn Triraganon, 2011. Natural
Resource Governance Trainers Manual. IUCN, RECOFTC, SNV,
Bangkok Thailand.
4. Relevant national environmental policies and regulations and
international conventions and agreements.
SOCIAL EMPOWERMENT AND Formatted Table

GENDER EQUALITY
Objectives:
To develop sensitization, awareness raising and the development of a common

understanding re key gender concepts and definitions related to gender,
sustainable development and the environment. To develop a basic
understanding of the concept and methodology of gender integrated planning.
The linkages between environmental sustainability and the Human Rights
Based Approach (HRBA).
Course Outline:
Overview of human rights as a starting point. Human Rights Based Approach Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
(HRBA): key principles, responsible actors. Equality, equity and human

development: definitions and terminology of equality, inequality, equity. Detailed
overview of commonly marginalized groups in coastal communities: the poor,
indigenous groups, women, migrants and refugees. The social empowerment
process: what is social empowerment, factors that facilitate social empowerment
(information and knowledge, capacity development, local organization and
leadership, economic empowerment, land tenure and property rights). Overview of
gender integration and sustainable development, definitions and terminology of
gender, socialization and gender in the context of socialization. General overview
of gender differences/ gender gaps. Gender issues specifically in coastal
communities across Asia. Gender mainstreaming and the special condition of
women in the process. Key gender concepts and definitions: Gender division of
labour, productive roles, reproductive roles, gender roles, condition, position,
gendered access, gendered control, gender analysis.
Lab. Work:
Match gender concepts and definitions.

Recommended Books:
159
1. Anonyhmous, 2011. USAID Tips for Conducting a Gender Analysis at
the Activity or Project Level Training Manual on Gender and Climate
Change, IUCN, UNDP, UNEP, GGCA.
1.2. Kabeer, N., . (2003.). Gender Mainstreaming in Poverty Eradication
and the Millennium Development Goals: A handbook for policy-makers
and other stakeholders. UK: Commonwealth Secretariat, International
Development Research Centre, Canadian International Development
Agency.
2. 2011 USAID Tips for Conducting a Gender Analysis at the Activity or

Project Level Training Manual on Gender and Climate Change, IUCN,
UNDP, UNEP, GGCA
3. Kabeer, N. (2003). Gender Mainstreaming in Poverty Eradication and the
Millennium Development Goals: A handbook for policy-makers and
other stakeholders. UK: Commonwealth Secretariat, International
Development Research Centre, Canadian International Development
Agency.
SOCIO-ECOLOGICAL
MS-ICZM-610 FUNDAMENTALS OF 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
COASTAL ZONES
Objectives:
To consolidate their understanding of terminology used in ecology and to

understand key ecological processes of high relevance and application in
integrated coastal management. The course will identify and categorize the
role and functions of natural ecosystems and their provision of ecosystem
services and benefit to man; and to understand how human impacts on
ecosystems can change the status and value of these services.
Course Outline:
An introduction to the fundamental concepts of ecosystem-based management,

a systems-analysis approach, a) plant-animal interactions; b) trophic
relationships; c) population dynamics; and d) species life cycle strategies (vital
to conservation management). Relationship between people and the
environment. Public attitudes, perceptions, and beliefs influence coastal
management decision-making. Relationship between a community and its
natural resources. Overview of the multidisciplinary approach to coastal
ecosystems management. Role of social sub-systems e.g. culture, economic
structure, demography etc. Millennium Ecosystem Assessment (MEA, 2005).
How they relate to coastal ecosystems and ICM.
160
Lab. Work:
Identification of examples of both a Keystone species and a Flagship species

associated with coastal or marine habitats in a country or region.
Recommended Books:
1. Ecological Principles.
2. Global Species Programe: how WWF classifies species.
3. Keystone Species.
4. Mann, K.H., 2000. Ecology of Coastal Waters: With Implications For
Management, 2nd Edition. Wiley-Blackwell, UK. 432 pp.
5. Millennium Ecosystem Assessment, 2005. Ecosystems and Human Well-
being: Synthesis. Island Press, Washington, DC. 137 pp.
161
MS-ICZM-611 THE ICM CYCLE 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To describe the ICM process or cycle, and explain each of the main stages
in the ICM implementation cycle.
Course Outline:
Introduction to the five main stages of ICM process:1) Situation analysis and
issue identification; 2) Program/ Project planning and design; 3) Accepting and
resourcing the plan; 4) Implementation; 5) Learning and evaluation. Detailed
overview of each stage of ICM process outlining the linkage between the stages.
Participatory Planning and Design Tools for ICM including: Situation Analysis
Stakeholder Assessment and SWOT Analysis; Participatory Rural Appraisal/
Rapid Rural Assessment; Vulnerability Assessment; Systems thinking, analysis
and approach; Spatial Assessment and Geographic Information System (GIS) -
Use of GIS in coastal and marine area planning and management; Participatory
project design and logical framework analysis and Theory of Change; and
Monitoring and evaluation of ICM - ICM Indicators - ecosystem, governance,
human well-being.
Lab. Work:
Specific assignments.
Recommended Books:
1. Cicin-Sain, B. and Knecht, R.W., 1998. Integrated Coastal and Ocean

Management: Concepts and Practices. Island Press, USA. 517 pp.
2. Gattuso, J-P and Smith, S.V., 2011. Encyclopaedia of Earth: Coastal
Zone.
2.3. Olsen, S.B., 1993. Will integrated management programs be
sustainable? The constituency problem. Ocean and Coastal
Management 21: 201-225.
162
3. Gattuso, J-P and Smith, S.V., 2011. Encyclopaedia of Earth: Coastal
Zone.
Module VI: Mangrovology (Mangl.)

BENTHIC ECOLOGY OF Formatted Table
MS-Mangl-601 2+1=3 Crh
MANGROVES
Objectives:
To understand that benthic organisms are of ecological as well as of Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
economic importance in mangroves and adjacent tidal flats. They affect

internal nutrient cycling and exchange processes with adjacent
ecosystems. Benthic fauna is a major food source for numerous juvenile
fish and crustacean species and thus crucial for the survival of many
commercially harvested species. In addition, benthic crabs and molluscs
are important fisheries resources for the localslocal population. Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
Course Outline:
General introduction: Taxonomy, anatomy, feeding strategies and life cycles

Food web and energy flow measurement Biodiversity Zonation patterns;
temporal and spatial variation Intra- and interspecific interactions Stability of
benthic communities Impact of benthic organisms on carbon and nutrient cycling
Sampling design; uses and threats: Use of benthic resources Natural and
anthropogenic threats; pollution Biological indicators of ecosystem health and
resilience Protection and sustainable use of resources; management issues Re-
colonization by benthic organisms.
Lab. Work:
Laboratory and field experiments Status, Practical work, including field

trips: Collection of epi- and endobenthic species using different sampling
gears;gear Sample processing species;Species identification
abioticAbiotic factors; and data Data processing and interpretation.
Recommended Books:
1. Hogarth, P.J., 1999. The Biology of Mangroves. Oxford University Press.

United Kingdom, 228 pp.
2. Lewis, R.R. and Flynn, L.L., 2015. Mangrove Zone Ecology. Oxford
University Press.
3. Odum, W.E., McIvor, C.C. and Smith, T.J., 1982. The Ecology of the
Mangroves of South Florida: a Community Profile. U.S. Fish and
Wildlife Service, Office of BiologicaI Services, Washington, D.C., 144
pp.
163
1.4. Selvam, V. and Karunagaran, V.M., 2004. Ecology and Biology of
Mangroves, Orientation Guide. M.S. Swaminathan Research Foundation,
Chennai, India, 61 pp.
2.5. Stokes, D.J., Healy, T.R. and Mason, N., 2009. The benthic ecology
of expanding mangrove habitat, Tauranga Harbour, New Zealand. Paper
presented to Coasts and Ports.
3. Odum, W.E., McIvor, C.C. and Smith, T.J., 1982. The Ecology of the
Mangroves of South Florida: a Community Profile. U.S. Fish and
Wildlife Service, Office of BiologicaI Services, Washington, D.C., 144
pp.
4. Lewis, R.R. and Flynn, L.L., 2015. Mangrove Zone Ecology. Oxford
University Press.
United Kingdom, 228 pp.
MS-Mangl-602 BIODIVERSITY OF MANGROVES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand that organisms dwelling in mangrove habitats are of

ecological as well as of economic importance. They affect nutrient cycles
and exchange processes. To identify mangrove associated flora and fauna
that provide major food source for numerous juvenile fish and crustacean
species.
Course Outline:
Introduction: Marine environment, Waves and tides, Understanding biodiversity;

Diversity Assessment Methods, Mangrove Ecosystems, Biodiversity in
Mangrove Ecosystems: Floral Diversity, Faunal Diversity; Brachyuran crabs in
mangroves, Threats to Mangroves, Policy and Sustainable Management of
Mangroves, Setting up a backyard hatchery for marine ornamental fish, Global
Policies (Role of institutions, Conservation strategies in different countries).
Lab. Work:
Laboratory and field experiments Status, Practical work, including field

trips to collect flora and fauna of mangrove habitats.
Recommended Books:
1. Kathiresan, K. and Qasim S.Z., 2005. Biodiversity of Mangrove

Ecosystems. Hindustan Publishing Corporation, 251 pp.
2. Naskar, K. and Mandal, R., 1999. Ecology and Biodiversity of Indian
Mangroves. Daya Publ., 916 pp.
3. Naskar, K. and Mandal, R., 1999. Ecology and Biodiversity of Indian
164
Mangroves: Morpho-Anatomy of Mangroves. Daya Publishing House,
754 pp.
MS-Mangl-603 COASTAL LAND RECLAMATION 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand mechanism and drivers of large scale coastal land

reclamation in Pakistan and Southeast Asia; environmental impacts of
coastal land reclamation and strategies for ecological improvement.
Course Outline:
Introduction: Context, Challenges, and Design Saliency. Comparison of the land

reclamation history and trend between the developed and the developing
countries. The broader ecological impacts of coastal land reclamation.
Involvement of landscape architects, planners and ecologists in land
reclamation. Landscape Planning and Design: Role of landscape architects and
planners in the land use decision making; Opportunities for ecological
improvements; Introduction to the cases studies. Strategies and Feasible
Design Solutions: Developer’s perspective, Proposing solutions based on
strong technicality, Land-fill substance and its influences on design solutions.
Phasing and Implementation: ecological goals; Integrating ecological phasing;
Long term monitoring and maintenance plan for sensitive habitats.
Lab. Work:
Field surveys.
Recommended Books:
1. Abbott, M.B. and Price, W.A., 1993. Coastal, Estuarial and Harbour
Engineer's Reference Book. CRC Press, 768 pp.
1.2. Hudson, B.J., 1980. Coastal Land Reclamation with Special Reference
165
to Hong Kong.
3. Lo, K.F.A. and Gunasiri, C.W.D., 2014. Impact of Coastal Land Use
Change on Shoreline Dynamics in Yunlin County, Taiwan.
Environments, 1:124-136.
2.4. Phillips, A. J. and Knights, B., 1979. Estuarine and Coastal Land
Reclamation and Water Storage. Lexington Books, 256 pp.
4.5. Sekitar, J.A., 1998. Environmental impact assessment guidelines for
coastal and land reclamation. Dept. of Environment, Ministry of Science,
Technology and the Environment, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, 768 pp.
CONSERVATION OF Formatted Table

MANGROVE RESOURCES
Objectives:
This course provides students an opportunity to gain an appreciation of the
scope and value of resources of mangrove ecosystems and their
conservation and sustainable management. The course also addresses
regulatory practices, which allow sustained use of these resources.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Types of marine resources: food, minerals and rare metals, oil and gas, Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
chemicals, exotic products, natural wilderness; Uniqueness of the marine

environment: relationship between aboriginal peoples and the sea; Major
management and regulatory agencies: role of the government in maintaining
marine resources, marine clubs and reserves, major and international treaties
and regulations dealing with marine pollution, the history of global marine
resource management during the twentieth century; Effective and/ or ineffective
management practices in turtle populations, the tuna industry, the prawning
industry, the fishing industry, coral reefs, the whaling industry, coastal, estuarine
and wetland development; Sustainable development; consequences of
resource over-exploitation; renewable and non-renewable resources; sources
of marine pollution including natural, industrial (including petroleum, marine
166
litter, synthetic or organic compounds, pesticides, mining refuse), agricultural
(including topsoils, pesticides, fertilisers), radioactive substances, conflict,
community development (e.g. run off, etc.), ballast water; major disputes over
the use of a particular resource.
Lab. Work:
To research and report on local uses of marine resources and local
community needs, which place pressure on marine resources; to
recognise and discuss the need for species diversification and ecological
balance.
Recommended Books:
1. Saenger, P., 2002. Mangrove Ecology, Silviculture and Conservation.
Springer Science & Business Media, 360 pp.
2. Marschke, M., 2012. Life, Fish and Mangroves: Resource governance in
coastal Cambodia. University of Ottawa Press, 194 pp.
1. Lavieren, H.V., Spalding, M., Alongi, D.M., Kainuma, M., Clüsener-Godt, M.,
Adeel, Z., n.d. Policy Brief: Securing the Future of Mangroves, United
Nations University Institute for Water, Environment and Health, Canada.
3.2. Keeley, M.A., Sutton, A.H., Draper, R. and Sargent, S., 2014. Marvellous
Mangroves of Queensland, A curriculum-based teachers’ resource
guide for Australia.
4. Lavieren, H.V., Spalding, M., Alongi, D.M., Kainuma, M., Clüsener-Godt,
M., Adeel, Z., n.d. Policy Brief: Securing the Future of Mangroves, United
Nations University Institute for Water, Environment and Health, Canada.
3. Marschke, M., 2012. Life, Fish and Mangroves: Resource governance in

coastal Cambodia. University of Ottawa Press, 194 pp.
ECOLOGICAL MANGROVE Formatted Table
REHABILITATION (EMR)
Objectives:
To introduce students regarding recently evolved concept of ecological

mangrove rehabilitation (EMR) so that they may practice it.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Introduction to Ecological Mangrove Rehabilitation (EMR), key biophysical

factors, programme design, preliminary assessment, biophysical assessments,
assessing resilience, design and planning, implementation, monitoring,
167
international case studies.
Lab. Work:
Lab. Work:
Field visits of coastal communities living near mangrove habitats for

experimenting rehabilitation activities.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1997. Community Participation in Mangrove Forest

Management and Rehabilitation in Southern Thailand. Second Interim
Report (ECU funded project), Wetlands International Asia-Pacific, 26 pp.
1. Lewis, R.R. and Brown, B., 2014. Ecological Mangrove Rehabilitation: A
Field Manual for Practitioners.
2. Field, C.D., 1999. Mangrove rehabilitation: choice and necessity.
Hydrobiologia, 413: 47-52.
3. JAM, 1997. Final report of the ITTO project on Development and
Dissemination of Re-aforestation Techniques of Mangrove Forests [PD
11/92 Rev.l (F)]. Publication of the Japan Association for Mangroves,
Tokyo, Japan, 104 pp.
4. Spalding, M. D., Blasco, F. and Field, C.D., (Eds.), 1997. World Mangrove
Atlas. International Society for Mangrove Ecosystems, Okinawa, Japan, 178
pp.
5. Anonymous, 1997. Community Participation in Mangrove Forest
Management and Rehabilitation in Southern Thailand. Second Interim
Report (ECU funded project), Wetlands International Asia-Pacific, 26 pp.
6. Vanucci, M., 2004 Mangrove Management & Conservation: Present &
Future. United Nations University Press.
4. Lewis, R.R. and Brown, B., 2014. Ecological Mangrove Rehabilitation: A
Field Manual for Practitioners.
7.5. Lustica, A., 1991. Guide in Mangrove reforestation. Yuhum La
Defensa Press Inc.
8.6. Macintosh, D.J., Mahindapala, R., Markopoulos, M. (Eds.), 2012.
Sharing Lessons on Mangrove Restoration. Bangkok, Thailand:
Mangroves for the Future and Gland, Switzerland: IUCN.
7. Spalding, M. D., Blasco, F. and Field, C.D., (Eds.), 1997. World Mangrove
Atlas. International Society for Mangrove Ecosystems, Okinawa, Japan, 178
pp.
8. Vanucci, M., 2004 Mangrove Management & Conservation: Present &
Future. United Nations University Press.
MS-Mangl-606 ECONOMIC EXPLOITATION OF 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
168
MANGROVES AND MARKETING
Objectives:
To develop an awareness of the scope and importance of mangrove

communities in Pakistan. Students should consider the vulnerability of
these communities, threats to them and commercial exploitation.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Physical features of a mangrove environment: distribution of mangroves in

Pakistan, features of four mangrove species, adaptations of these mangrove
species for salt water, aeration, seed dispersal, importance of mangroves to the
life cycles of fish, crustaceans, molluscs, animals found among mangroves,
threats to mangrove communities in Pakistan. Prospects and procedure of
commercial activities in mangrove habitats like crab fattening, mariculture,
pisciculture, silviculture (honey production) etc.
Lab. Work:
Field visits of mangrove habitats for experimenting commercial activities.

Recommended Books:
1. Aburto-Oropeza, O., 2008. Mangroves in the Gulf of California increase

fishery yields. PNSA Vol. 150 No. 30.
1.2. Anonymous, 2005. Mangroves of Pakistan, Status and Management.
IUCN Pakistan, 110 pp.
2.3. Atheull, A.N., Din, N., Longonje, S.N., Koedam, N. and Dahdouh-
Guebas, F., 2009. Commercial activities and subsistence utilization of
mangrove forests around the Wouri estuary and the Douala-Edea
reserve (Cameroon). J. Ethnobiol. Ethnomed., 5: 35.
3.4. Clough, B., 2013. Continuing the Journey Amongst Mangroves.
ISME Mangrove Educational Book Series No. 1. International Society
for Mangrove Ecosystems (ISME), Okinawa, Japan, and International
Tropical Timber Organization (ITTO), Yokohama, Japan, 86 pp.
5. Saenger, P., 2002. Mangrove Ecology, Silviculture and Conservation. Formatted: Indent: Left: -0.01", Numbered + Level: 1 +
Numbering Style: 1, 2, 3, … + Start at: 1 + Alignment: Left +
Springer Science & Business Media, 360 pp. Aligned at: 0.25" + Indent at: 0.5"
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 16 pt, Not Bold,
Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not Expanded by /
Condensed by
169
4. Aburto-Oropeza, O., 2008. Mangroves in the Gulf of California increase
fishery yields. PNSA Vol. 150 No. 30.
MS-Mangl-607 ESTUARINE STUDIES 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course gives students the opportunity to study the important areas
where salt and freshwater meet - the estuaries. It is an ideal change to
explore the unique ecosystems found in estuarine systems.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Nature of an estuary: merging of salt and fresh water, main ecosystems present
open river, sea grass beds, tidal mudflats, mangrove and salt-water grass and
mud lands, life form adaptations to the estuarine environment, estuaries as
sources of food for marine organisms and as nurseries for many species of fish
and crustaceans; Effects on estuaries of: urban and agricultural runoff, amateur
and professional fishing, recreational activities, reclamation for development,
flood mitigation and training wall construction; Suitable management practices
that will protect estuarine environments; common techniques used to sample
marine life in a estuary; Estuary life: common mangrove species, common
crustaceans, fish found in estuaries; Importance of estuaries; Ecosystems
present in estuaries; Techniques used to sample estuarine ecosystems.
Lab. Work:
Lab. Work:
To demonstrate common techniques used to sample marine life in an
estuary; to map the features of a local estuary including ecosystems
present; to extract animal life from mangrove mud (using sieves) to
identify and analyse estuary life; to use a microscope to look for plankton Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
and other microscopic life forms in river water; and to test mangrove mud
for the presence of sulphide ions (S2).
Recommended Books:
1. Bowman, M.J., Barber, R.T., Mooers, C.N.K., Raven, J.A., (Eds.), 2016.
Coastal and Estuarine Studies. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Fenchel, T.M. and Blackburn, T.H., 1979. Bacteria and Mineral Cycling.
Academic Press, New York.
2. Robertson, A. I. and Alongi, D. M., (Eds.), 1992. Tropical Mangrove
170
Ecosystems (Coastal and Estuarine Studies). 1st Ed., American
Geophysical Union, 330 pp.
3. Klemas, V., Bartlett, D., Philpot, W., Rogers, R. and Reed, L., 1974.
Coastal and estuarine studies with ERTS-1 and Skylab. Elsevier B.V.
4. Odum, E.P., 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders
Co., 547 pp.
5. Fenchel, T.M. and Blackburn, T.H., 1979. Bacteria and Mineral Cycling.
5. Robertson, A. I. and Alongi, D. M., (Eds.), 1992. Tropical Mangrove
Ecosystems (Coastal and Estuarine Studies). 1st Ed., American
Geophysical Union, 330 pp.
HUMAN IMPACT AND THREATS Formatted Table

TO MANGROVE ECOSYSTEM
This course discusses various natural and human induced pressures and Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
drivers of mangrove ecosystem degradation including deforestation, land
reclamation, coastal erosion; environmental impacts of coastal land
reclamation and strategies for ecological improvement. It will be useful for Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
environmentalist and forest protection agencies forin proper and effective Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
management and protection measures of the mangroves. Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
Course Outline: Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt
Human Impacts on Mangroves ecosystem: landuse change; Mangroves cutting; Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Coastal erosion; Mangroves Destruction, Degradation due to pollution; Long-
term Effects of Mangrove Destruction, Human activities and natural processes
that affect wetlands, Impact of Wetlands Loss. Surface water and groundwater,
classifying water pollutants, effects of pollutants on water, pollution sources,
auto awareness. Alternatives to household hazardous chemicals, sewage and
solid waste dumping. A history of rubbish, oil spill clean-up, wheel of trouble.
The rare scare - The road to extinction.
Lab. Work:
Field visits of different mangrove ecosystems to assess human impact on Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
the habitats of mangroves and report writing.
Recommended Books:
1. Abbott, M.B. and Price, W.A., 1993. Coastal, Estuarial and Harbour Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
2. Brown, B.E., 1997. Integrated Coastal Management: South Asia. Dept
Marine Sciences and Coastal Management, Univ. Newcastle, Newcastle
upon Tyne, UK.
171
1.3. Lacerda, L.D.de., 2002. Mangrove Ecosystems: Function and
Management. Springer Science & Business, 292 pp.
2.5. Lotfinasabasl, S., 2013. Mangrove and Human Activities: An
Assessment of Human Activities on Mangrove Ecosystem. LAP
LAMBERT Academic Publishing, 224 pp.
3. Vannucci, M., 1997. Supporting appropriate mangrove management.
Intercoast Network Special Edition 1.
4. Brown, B.E., 1997. Integrated Coastal Management: South Asia. Dept
Marine Sciences and Coastal Management, Univ. Newcastle, Newcastle
upon Tyne, UK.
5.6. Macintosh, D.J. and Ashton, E.C., 2002. A Review of Mangrove
Biodiversity Conservation and Management. Centre for Tropical
Ecosystems Research, University of Aarhus, Denmark.
7. Vannucci, M., 1997. Supporting appropriate mangrove management.
Intercoast Network Special Edition 1.
MANGROVES AND Formatted Table

CLIMATE CHANGE
Objectives:
This course will allow students to develop their knowledge on role of

mangroves in climate change mitigation and adaptation.
Course Outline:
Mangroves in a changing climate: climate change impacts, mangrove role

in climate change adaptation/ mitigation (mangrove role in carbon cycle,
carbon accounting and mangroves), increasing resilience of mangrove
ecosystems to global change, vulnerability and risk reduction, Disaster
Risk Reduction (DRR).
Lab. Work:
Methodology and planning of mangrove eco-tourism; Visitor survey

techniques; Identification of eco-tourism sites; to write a report to
describe ideas of planning ecotourism in the mangrove swamps, which
incorporates the major assignments related to the field trip.
172
Recommended Books:
1. Forbes, K. and Broadhead, J., 2007. The Role of Coastal Forests in the
Mitigation of Tsunami Impacts – Main report”.
to Climate Change. IUCN Resilience Science Group Working Paper
Series - No 2, Gland, Switzerland.
3.2. McIvor, A.L., Möller, I., Spencer, T. and Spalding, M., 2012. Reduction of
wind and swell waves by mangroves. Natural Coastal Protection Series:
Report 1. Cambridge Coastal Research Unit Working Paper 40. Published
by The Nature Conservancy and Wetlands International. 27 pages. ISSN
2050-7941.
to Climate Change. IUCN Resilience Science Group Working Paper
Series - No 2, Gland, Switzerland.
4. Pendleton, L., Donato, D.C., Murray, B.C., Crooks, S., Jenkins W.A.,
Sifleet, S., Craft, C., Fourqurean J.W., Kauffman, J.B., Marba, N.,
Megonigal, P., Pidgeon, E., Herr, D., Gordon, D. and Baldera, A., 2012.
Estimating Global ‘‘Blue Carbon’’ Emissions from Conversion and
Degradation of Vegetated Coastal Ecosystems.
5. Siikamäki. J., Sanchirico, J.N., and Jardine, S.L., 2012. Global economic
potential for reducing carbon dioxide emissions from mangrove loss, pp
6.
MANGROVE COASTAL Formatted Table

FOREST MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
This course gives important information about mangroves forest

management along the coastal area. It will be useful for environmentalist
and forest protection agencies for proper management and protection of
the mangroves.
Course Outline:
Introduction to Forest Resource Management; History of Mangroves

Management in Pakistan; Forest Resource Health, Safety, Assessment and
Mapping; Management Planning; Essential Field Skills; Introduction to Forest
Ecology; Soil properties, development and organisms; ecology of the
mangroves; Coastal Harvesting Systems; Introduction to Timber Cruising,
Grading and Scaling; Worksite Readiness Skills; Transportation of Dangerous
173
Goods.
Lab. Work:
Field visits of different mangrove forests; preparation of survey reports;

to participate in the activities of mangroves transplantation.
Recommended Books:
1. Salm, R. V., 1978. Conservation of marine resources in Seychelles: Report

on current status and future management for the Government of Seychelles.
Morges, Switzerland: International Union for Conservation of Nature and
Natural Resources, 41 pp.
2. Clark, J., 1996. Coastal Zone Management Handbook. CRC/Lewis Publ.,
Boca Raton, Florida (USA), 694 pp.
3. Clark, J., 1998. Coastal Seas: The Conservation Challenge. Blackwell
Science, Oxford, 134 pp.
1. Clark, J., 1996. Coastal Zone Management Handbook. CRC/Lewis Publ.,
Boca Raton, Florida (USA), 694 pp.
2. Clark, J., 1998. Coastal Seas: The Conservation Challenge. Blackwell
Science, Oxford, 134 pp.
3. GIZ, 2014. Mangrove Management: A manual for appropriate mangrove
conservation and planting in the Mekong Delta, Published by the
Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH.
4. Hamilton, L.S. and Snedaker, S.C. (Eds.), 1984. Handbook for Mangrove
Area Management. Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, 123 pp.
5. McHarg, I., 1969. Design with Nature. The Natural History Press, Garden
City, New York, 197 pp.
6. McNeely, J.A., 1988. Economics and Biological Diversity. IUCN, Gland,
Switzerland, 236 pp.
7. Neelakantan, K.S., 1994. Management Plan for the Gulf of Mannar
Marine Biosphere Reserve. Forest Dept., Tamil Nadu, India, 118 pp.
8. GIZ 2014. Mangrove Management: A manual for appropriate mangrove
conservation and planting in the Mekong Delta, Published by the
Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH.
8. Salm, R. V., 1978. Conservation of marine resources in Seychelles: Report
on current status and future management for the Government of Seychelles.
Morges, Switzerland: International Union for Conservation of Nature and
Natural Resources, 41 pp.
MS-Mangl-611 MANGROVE ECOTOURISM 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course will allow students to develop their knowledge of all aspects of
commercial and recreational activities i.e. the theoretical and practical
174
aspects of development and management of mangrove based ecotourism
for livelihood development of dependent communities.
Course Outline:
What is ecotourism and how does it relate to natural resource management;

development of sustainable ecotourism facilities and services to be provided to
visitors, local communities, economies, and the environment; Principle of marine
and coastal eco-tourism, marine environment, important coastal habitats and
tourism resources, coral reef, mangrove forests, etc., development of mangrove
eco-tourism, eco-tourism activities in marine areas, management of sustainable
eco-tourism; planning and management frameworks for developing ecotourism
opportunities on a site, community, and landscape level; how ecotourism
activities impact natural areas and communities; and strategies and techniques
to manage natural areas like coastal, creek or mangroves areas for recreation
and tourism.
Lab. Work:
Methodology and planning of mangrove eco-tourism; Visitor survey

techniques; Identification of marine eco-tourism sites; to write a report to
describe ideas of planning ecotourism in the mangrove swamps, which
incorporates the major assignments related to the field trip.
Recommended Books:
1. Garrod, B. and Wilson, J.C., 2003. Marine Ecotourism: Issues and

Experiences. Channel View Publications, 289 pp.
2.1. Bryson, T.J., 2015. Sustainable Marine Ecotourism. 62 pp.
3.2. Cater, E. and Cater, C., 2007. Marine Ecotourism: Between the Devil
and the Deep Blue Sea (Ecotourism Series). CABI, 320 pp.
3. Garrod, B. and Wilson, J.C., 2003. Marine Ecotourism: Issues and
Experiences. Channel View Publications, 289 pp.
4. Hoyt, E., 2012. Marine Protected Areas for Whales, Dolphins and Porpoises.
Taylor & Francis/ Routledge and Earthscan, London and New York, 477 pp.
5. Martinez, E., 2008. Dugong. In: M. Lück (Ed). Encyclopaedia of tourism and
recreation in marine environments. CABI International Publishing, Oxford.
6. Morales, M.I., Masagca, J. T., Araojo, A.E., and Vargas, S.R., 2014
Coastal and Mangrove Eco-Tourism in Catanduanes Island
(Philippines): A Menace or a Bonus? International Conference on Latest
Trends in Food, Biological & Ecological Sciences (ICLTFBE’14) July 15-
16, 2014 Phuket (Thailand).)
MORPHOLOGY, PHYSIOLOGY Formatted Table

AND ANATOMY OF MANGROVES
175
Objectives:
This course introduces students to the morphology, physiology and

anatomy of mangroves. Students have the opportunity to study in depth
aiming to make themselves aware of the complexity of these plants and
their adaptations.
Course Outline:
Types of Mangroves. Morphology of mangroves: modification of root, shoot and

leaves. Physiology of mangroves: Roots and adaptation to water-logged
conditions, energy production, photosynthesis and growth, excretion,
respiration, salt regulation through salt glands, Reproduction (Pollination,
Vivipary, Dispersal), Biomass. Anatomy of mangroves, anatomical structures,
functions of these structures.
Lab. Work:
To list major systems present in a marine plant; to describe how the plant
takes in minerals, produces organic compounds, removes waste,
responds to stimuli; to recognise the importance of photosynthesis to
marine plants. Morphology of leaves, leaf area, Section cutting and
physiological experiments.
Recommended Books:

United Kingdom. 228 pp.
2. Selvam, V. and Karunagaran, V.M., 2004. Ecology and Biology of
1. Tomlinson, P.B., 1986. The Botany of Mangroves. Cambridge:
2.3. Spalding, M., Blasco, F., Field, C., 1997. World Mangrove Atlas.
International Society for Mangrove Ecosystems, Okinawa.
United Kingdom. 228 pp.
4. Tomlinson, P.B., 1986. The Botany of Mangroves. Cambridge:
176
PRODUCTIVITY OF Formatted Table
MANGROVE WETLANDS
Objectives:
This course introduces students to the importance of mangrove wetlands,

which provide nursery grounds for several marine creatures.
Course Outline:
Mangrove forests and mangrove wetlands, Characteristic features of mangrove

wetlands, Distribution of mangrove wetlands, Ecological factors influencing the
mangrove wetland, Classification of mangrove wetlands (Classification of
mangroves at the regional scale, Classification of mangroves at the micro level),
Habitat and economic value of mangrove wetlands (Shoreline stabilisation,
Shoreline protection, Detritus-based food web, Nursery ground for aquatic
animals and fishery resources, Habitat for wildlife, Economic value).
Lab. Work:
Estimation of Primary productivity and secondary productivity of

Mangrove Wetlands.
Recommended Books:

2. Odum, E.P., 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders Co, 547 pp.
3.1. Alexander, M., 1977. Introduction to Soil Microbiology. John Wiley,
New York.
4.2. Fenchel, T.M. and Blackburn, T.H., 1979. Bacteria and Mineral Cycling.
5.3. Hansell, D.A. and Carlson, C.A., 2002. Biogeochemistry of Marine
Dissolved Organic Matter. Academic Press, New York.
4. Odum, E.P., 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders Co, 547 pp.
177
MS-Mangl-614 SEABIRDS OF COASTAL AREA 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course introduces students to the sedentary and migratory sea birds
found along our coast. It is an introductory study of sea birds in general
with a more detailed study of those species found in local area. This course
is based upon observing and recording local marine bird life.
Course Outline:
Basic physiology of birds: bone structure in birds related to flight, the differences
between bird and human lungs; Adaptations which allow birds to live
successfully in and around water: flight, prolonged flight, wading on soft mud,
swimming, camouflage, catching food; Observing and accurately recording
these observations.
Lab. Work:
To use equipment appropriate for viewing sea birds at a distance; to

identify birds that commonly seek food in mud flats, tributaries, sea
shores, oceans; to construct a sighting log book listing date and time,
location, name of bird, approximate numbers, main food, residency
(permanent or migratory).
Recommended Books:
1. Brewer, D. and Harris, A., 2003. Coastal and Sea Birds Handbook. Miles
Kelly Publishing Ltd., 112 pp.
2. Harrison, P., 1991. Seabirds: An Identification Guide. Houghton Mifflin
Harcourt; New edition, 448 pp.
3. Howell, S.N.G. and Sullivan, B.L., 2015. Offshore Sea Life ID Guide:
West Coast. Princeton University Press, 56 pp, 300+ colour photos.
178
Module VII: Physical Oceanography (PO)
MS-PO-601 AIR-SEA INTERACTIONS 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Formatted Table
Oceanic and atmospheric mixed layers including fluxes of heat,

momentum, moisture and salt between the ocean and atmosphere; vertical
distribution of energy sources and sinks at the interface including the
importance of surface currents; forced upper ocean dynamics, the role of
surface waves on the air- sea exchange processes and ocean mixed layer
processes.
Course Outline:
Laminar and turbulent flows; Reynolds stresses; Richardson's criterion

for turbulence; principles of Prandtl's mixing length theory; Taylor's
statistical theory and Kolmogoroffs similarity theory, Air Sea interaction
at various scales; planetary and laminar boundary layer, surface layer and
spiral layer; Sea surface as a lower boundary of air-flow and its geometry;
wind field in the first few meters of the sea surface, wind structure in the
maritime frictional layer; transfer of heat and water vapour; determination
of air-sea fluxes; Obukhov Length Scales, Approximations, Role of SSTs,
Precipitation and Evaporation, energy exchange and global heat and water
budgets, convection and its role in tropical circulations, effects of
upwelling and sinking on the ocean atmosphere system.
Lab. Work::??????????????????
Specific problem may be given to exhibit Air Sea interaction.

Recommended Books:
1. Kraus, E.B., and Businger, J.A., Atmosphere-Ocean Interaction.

2.1. Brown, R.A., Fluid Mechanics of the Atmosphere.
3.2. Garratt, J.R., The Atmospheric Boundary Layer.
4.3. Gill, A.E., Atmospheric-Ocean Dynamics.
4. Kraus, E.B., and Businger, J.A., Atmosphere-Ocean Interaction.
5. Kraus, E.B., The Dynamics of the Upper Ocean.
6. Phillips, O.M. and Hasselman, K., Wave Dynamics and Radio Probing
of the Ocean Surface.
179
MS-PO-602 BOATING AND SEAMANSHIP 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Formatted Table
This course acknowledges the high level of boat ownership in Pakistan and Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
the economic importance of small boat operation. Students are given the
opportunity to learn the basics of small boat operation and handling.
Course Outline:
Formatted: Left, Right: -0.1", Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Emergency and safety procedures: standard safety and distress signals,
basic rescue and first-aid, procedures applicable to boating, important rescue
agencies; the equipment required by law when, boating in enclosed and open
water in NSW; seamanship; methods used to solve boating related problems:
towing a trailer, basic maintenance procedures for a trailer, regulations
governing safe passage of small craft on water, cardinal and lateral system of
buoyage, regulations governing salvage, the use of basic knots and splices
at sea, standard launching and landing, procedure from a ramp or slipway,
loading and trimming a vessel correctly, determining the sea-worthiness of a
vessel; the care and maintenance of boats and engines; the identification of
areas of responsibility: responsibilities of small boat ownership,
responsibilities of the driver or captain.
Lab. Work:
To plan a safe boating trip; to determine the latitude and longitude of a Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
position on a chart; to explain how to locate one’s position using a transit Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
bearing or a cross bearing fix; to determine the variation and deviation of a
compass for a particular location and ship’s heading; to row a small boat, to
fit an outboard motor to a small boat; to anchor and secure a small boat; to
come alongside another vessel safely; to handle a small boat in windy
conditions and with current and tidal flow use a compass in a boat; to
demonstrate basic maintenance procedures for a trailer; to demonstrate the
use of basic knots and splices; to participate in standard launching and
landing procedure from a ramp or slipway; to prepare a boat for operation
prior to launching; to load and trim a vessel correctly.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 2013. Boating Skills and Seamanship. 14th Ed., Inc. U.S. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Coast Guard Auxiliary Assoc., 416 pp.
2. Eaton, J., 2013. Chapman Piloting and Seamanship. 67th Ed., Hearst
Marine Books, 920 pp.
3. Maloney, E.S. and Chapman, C.F., 1983. Chapman Piloting:
Seamanship & Small Boat Handling. 65th Ed., Hearst Books.
180
4. Rousmaniere, J., Smith M., 1989. The Annapolis Book of Seamanship.
Hearst Marine Books.
5.4. Murrant, J., 1998. The Boating Bible: The Essential Handbook for
Every Sailor. Sheridan House, 320 pp.
5. Rousmaniere, J., Smith M., 1989. The Annapolis Book of Seamanship.
Hearst Marine Books.
MS-PO-603 CLIMATE CHANGE 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt

Formatted Table
This course explores the science of climate change. Students will learn how
the climate system works; what factors cause climate to change across
different time scales and how those factors interact; how climate has
changed in the past; how scientists use models, observations and theory
to make predictions about future climate; and the possible consequences
of climate change for our planet.
Course Outline:
Climate Work: An introduction to the concept of climate as a dynamic

Earth system, how much of the Sun’s energy reaches the Earth, the
greenhouse effect; Causes Climate to Change: Plate Tectonics, Earth’s
Orbital Variations, Longlived Greenhouse Gases, Variations in Solar
Luminosity, and Volcanic Eruptions; Response of the Climate System:
Carbon Cycle and its Role in the Climate System; Numerical Modeling,
Theory, and Observation to Understand Cause and Effect of Climate
Change; Learning from the Past? Variations in Ocean and Lake Sediment
Cores, Ice Cores, Corals, Tree Rings, and other Geologic Records;
Potential Consequences, Risks, and Uncertainties of Climate Change:
Sea Level Rise, Disruption of the Global Food Supply.
Lab. Work:
Specific laboratory assignments may be given.

Recommended Books:
1. Mathez, E., 2009. Climate Change: The Science of Global Warming and
Our Energy Future. 1st Ed., Columbia University Press, 344 pp.
2. Schmidt, G., Wolfe, J. and Sachs, J.D., 2009. Climate Change: Picturing
the Science. 1st Ed., W. W. Norton & Company, 320 pp.
1.3. Valeem, E.E. and Tirmizi, S.M.A., 2011. Wave climate of northern Arabian
Sea during southwest monsoon season near Karachi, Pakistan: Variation
and analysis of wave characteristics. VDM Verlag Dr. Müller, 284 pp. ISBN.
10: 3-639-31657-6, ISBN. 13: 978-3-639-31657-5.
181
2. Mathez, E., 2009. Climate Change: The Science of Global Warming and
Our Energy Future. 1st Ed., Columbia University Press, 344 pp.
3. Schmidt, G., Wolfe, J. and Sachs, J.D., 2009. Climate Change: Picturing
the Science. 1st Ed., W. W. Norton & Company, 320 pp.
MS-PO-604 MARINE ACOUSTICS 2+1=3 Chr Formatted Table

This course introduces the physical principles underlying acoustic

propagation in the sea and describes key applications. It draws on the
internationally recognised marine acoustics programme.
Course Outline:
Background material; Noise in the ocean; Ray acoustics; Deep water

acoustic propagation; Wave acoustics; Shallow water acoustic
propagation; Devices for sound production and reception underwater;
Sound production and reception by marine animals; Use of sound by
marine animals; Impacts of man-made noise; Marine resource estimation;
Marine environmental assessment; Defence applications of underwater
acoustics; Commercial applications of underwater acoustics.
Lab. Work::??????????????????
Specific assignments may be given to explore underwater acoustics.

Recommended Books:
1. Lurton, X., 2002. An Introduction to Underwater Acoustics: Principles

and Applications. Springer.
1. Blue, J.E. and Medwin, H., 2005. Sounds in the Sea: From Ocean
Acoustics to Acoustical Oceanography. Cambridge University Press, Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
643 pp.
2. Buchanan, J.L., Gilbert, R.P., Wirgin, A. and Xu, Y., 2004. Marine
Acoustics: Direct and Inverse Problems. SIAM, 347 pp.
3. Fish, J.P., 1989. Unfinished Voyages. Woods Hole, USA.
3.4. Hovem, J., 2010. Marine Acoustics. Peninsula Publishing, 656 pp.
4. Blue, J.E. and Medwin, H., 2005. Sounds in the Sea: From Ocean
Acoustics to Acoustical Oceanography. Cambridge University Press, 643 Formatted: Condensed by 0.1 pt
pp.
182
5. Lurton, X., 2002. An Introduction to Underwater Acoustics: Principles
and Applications. Springer.
183
5. Fish, J.P., 1989. Unfinished Voyages. Woods Hole, USA.
NATURAL HAZARDS
MS-PO-605 2+1=3 Chr
AND THE OCEANS
NATURAL HAZARDS AND
MS-PO-605 2+1=3 Chr
THE OCEANS
Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course provide better understanding of the natural hazards in the

ocean environment and their relation to the relevant physical,
meteorological geological processes including tsunamis, hurricanes and
other storms, waves, coastal flooding, erosion, and climate change.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Introduction to Natural Hazards; Hazard Energy Sources & Earth Interior,

Earth Structure; Ocean Bathymetry and Plate Tectonics, Ocean Basin; Plate
Tectonics (PT) and Earthquakes, Sea Floor; PT and Volcanoes; Mega-
Volcanoes; Atmosphere/ Ocean System Dynamics; Ocean Conveyor Belt;
Ocean Dynamics; The Gulf Stream; Ocean Waves; Tsunamis; Rogue
Waves; Ocean Storms; Hurricanes Dynamics; Hurricanes Inundation,
CSKatrina; Global Climate Change.
Lab. Work:
Lab. Work: Formatted: Left
Specific laboratory assignments may be given. Formatted: Font: 13 pt, Bold

Recommended Books:
1. Bankoff, G. and Christensen, J., 2016. Natural Hazards and Peoples in

the Indian Ocean World: Bordering on Danger. Springer, 318 pp.
1.2. Bryant, E., 2005. Natural Hazards. Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, UK.
2.3. Hyndman, D. and Hyndman, D., 2011. Natural Hazards and Disasters.
Brooks/ Cole Publishers, Belmont, CA.
184
3. Bankoff, G. and Christensen, J., 2016. Natural Hazards and Peoples in
the Indian Ocean World: Bordering on Danger. Springer, 318 pp.
MS-PO-606 OCEAN DYNAMICS 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt

Formatted Table
The aim of this course is to help students, acquire an understanding of

some of the basic concepts of fluid dynamics that will be needed as a
foundation for advanced applications in ocean and atmospheric sciences
and ocean engineering, etc. The emphasis is on fluid fundamentals, but
with an atmosphere/ ocean twist.
Course Outline:
Course Outline:
Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, Kinematics of Fluid Flow, Eulerian and
Lagrangian Representations of Flow, The Material Derivative Trajectories,
Streaklines, and Streamlines, Cauchy-Stokes Theorem, The Velocity
Gradient Tensor, Vortex Flows, Circulation, and Vorticity, Equations of
motion of frictionless ocean currents; scale analysis, barotropic and
baroclinic approximation; geostrophic currents in a stratified ocean, the 2
layer approximation and White-Margules equation; gradient currents and
mass stratification; relative currents and slope currents; Ekman's theory,
Sverdup, Stommel and Munk's theories; Waves, Beta Effect, Wave
Kinematics Barotropic, Fixed Depth Rossby Waves, Shallow Water
Equations, Shallow Water Gravity Waves, Inertia-Gravity Waves, Kelvin
Waves, Rossby Waves, upwelling and sinking with special reference to the
Indian ocean.
Lab. Work:

Recommended Books:
1. Kundu, P.K. And Cohen, I.M., 2016. Fluid Mechanics. Academic Press,
750 pp.
2.1. Cushman-Roisin, B.,Cushman-Roisin, B., 1994. Introduction to
Geophysical Fluid Dynamics. Prentice Hall, 320 pp.
3.2. Gill, A. E., 1982. Atmosphere-Ocean Dynamics. Academic Press, 662
pp.
3. Holton, J. R., 1972. An Introduction to Dynamic Meteorology.
4. Kundu, P.K. And Cohen, I.M., 2016. Fluid Mechanics. Academic Press,
750 pp.
185
4. Tritton, D. J., 1988. Physical Fluid Dynamics. Clarendon Press, 544 pp.
5. Pond, S. and Pickard, G.L., 1983. Introductory Dynamical
Oceanography. 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, 349 pp.
6. Tritton, D. J., 1988. Physical Fluid Dynamics. Clarendon Press, 544 pp.
OCEAN MODELLING AND

MS-PO-607 2+1=3 Chr
NUMERICAL METHODS
6. Holton, J. R., 1972. An Introduction to Dynamic Meteorology.
OCEAN MODELLING AND

MS-PO-607 2+1=3 Chr
NUMERICAL METHODS
Formatted Table
This course provides an introduction to numerical methods used to solve the Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
equations of ocean motion. Topics of course range from basic numerical
concepts to general transport and shallow-water equations to ocean circulation
models that are employed to understand weather and climate.
Course Outline:
Introduction, Classifications of PDE’s and their properties, Equations of Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
motion and heat transfer in the ocean, Parabolic, hyperbolic, and elliptic
equations, Numerical approximation of derivatives, Numerical
approximation of derivatives, Basic strategies: grid-point and series-
expansion methods, Finite difference scheme, Taylor series expansions,
Spectral methods, Finite element methods, Truncation error, Higher order
derivatives, Stability properties of time differencing schemes, Finite
difference solution of the Poisson equation using direct and iterative
methods, Special advection schemes, Energetically consistent finite
difference schemes, Ordinary differential equations (ODE), Runge-Kutta
method, Finite volume methods, Initial/ boundary value problems, Steady
diffusion-advection equation, Methods for solving two-dimensional
shallow-water equations, A, B, and C spatial grid configurations, Time
integration schemes, Splitting methods, Solutions of Linear equation
systems, Turbulence models, Large scale ocean models, Data
assimilation.
Lab. Work:
Lab. Work: Formatted: Left, Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
186
Work on assigned modelling problems and write a report for each. For the
final project one can chose a topic of your interest, building on the material
covered in the course. This project must include a written final report with
a thorough discussion of numerical aspects, such as stability and error
analysis.
Recommended Books:
1. Ascher, U.M., 2008. Numerical Methods for Evolutionary Differential

Equations. Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics.
1.2. Ferziger, J.H., Peric, M., 2002. Computational Methods for Fluid
Dynamics. Springer Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York.
2.3. Gottlieb, D., Orszag, S.A., 1977. Numerical Analysis of Spectral
Methods Theory and Application. Society for Industrial and Applied
Mathematics.
3.4. Haidvogel, D.B., Beckmann, A., 1999. Numerical Ocean Circulation
Modeling. Imperial College Press.
5. Kämpf, J., 2010. Ocean Modelling for Beginners. 1st Ed., Springer, XIII, 181
pp.
4.6. Patankar, S.V., 1980. Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow.
Hemisphere Publishing Corporation.
5. Ascher, U.M., 2008. Numerical Methods for Evolutionary Differential
Equations. Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics.
6. Kämpf, J., 2010. Ocean Modelling for Beginners. 1st Ed., Springer, XIII,
181 pp.
OCEAN CIRCULATION Formatted Table

MS-PO-608 2+1=3 Chr
AND CLIMATE Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Objectives:
In this course students learn about many of the physical processes that
occur in the ocean, how these physical processes are observed, budgeted,
and quantified? where these processes occur in the ocean? and access
recent ocean datasets.
Course Outline:
Instruments, Fluids Mechanics, Rotation, Stratification, Vorticity balances,

Ocean Circulation, Forcing, Wave Basics, Dispersive Wave Kinematics:
Phase & Group velocity, Important kinds of ocean waves: surface gravity,
internal gravity, Rossby, Kelvin Nonlinear waves, eddies, vortices, and
coherent structures El Nino.
Lab. Work: Formatted: Left, Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Lab. Work:
187
Recommended Books:
1. Colling, A., 2001. Ocean Circulation. 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann,

286 pp.
1.2. Siedler, G., Griffies, S., Gould, J. and Church, J., (Eds.), 2013. Ocean
Circulation and Climate. Academic Press, 904 pp.
2. Colling, A., 2001. Ocean Circulation. 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann,
286 pp.
3. Valeem, E. E. and Tirmizi, S.M.A., 2011. Wave climate of northern Arabian
10: 3-639-31657-6, ISBN. 13: 978-3-639-31657-5.
3.4. Vallis, G. K., 2006. Atmospheric and Oceanic Fluid Dynamics.
Cambridge University Press, 745 pp.

10: 3-639-31657-6, ISBN. 13: 978-3-639-31657-5.
OCEAN WAVES, Formatted: Font: 16 pt

MS-PO-609 2+1=3 Chr
TIDES AND CURRENTS Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course provides information regarding ocean waves, tides and
currents and use of instruments to measure them.
Course Outline:
OCEAN WAVES, Formatted Table
MS-PO-609 2+1=3 Chr
TIDES AND CURRENTS Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Objectives:
188
This course provides information regarding ocean waves, tides and
currents and use of instruments to measure them.
Course Outline:
Wave hydrodynamics: wave characteristics, simple harmonic wave,

Laplace equation, potential flows, Small amplitude wave theory - Airy’s
solution, Finite amplitude waves-Stokes solution, wave celerity and
particle orbits, short waves and long waves. Wave generation, Jeffrey’s
theory, Sverdrup and Munk theory, wave growth and propagation. Group
velocity. Ocean tides: tide characteristics, theories of tide generation,
harmonic analysis, tidal prediction, Renewable energy sources from
Ocean –Wave energy, tidal energy and thermal energy. Wave forecasting
– Sea and swell, significant wave, SMB method of wave forecasting PNJ
method of wave forecasting, co-cumulative spectrum, fetch limited and
duration limited cases, swell forecasting, dispersion, angular spreading
and the concept of wave forecasting filter. Tides and Currents.
Lab. Work:
Recommended Books:
10: 3-639-31657-6, ISBN. 13: 978-3-639-31657-5.
2.1. Ippen, A.T., Coastal and Estuarine Dynamics.

3.2. McClellan, Elements of physical Oceanography. by McClellan
3. Neumann and Pierson, Introduction to principles of dynamic
oceanography.
4. US Navy, Observing and forecasting of ocean waves – H.Q Pub. No.
603, US Navy.
10: 3-639-31657-6, ISBN. 13: 978-3-639-31657-5.
5. Introduction to principles of dynamic oceanography by Neumann and

Pierson
189
MS-PO-610 PHYSICAL METEOROLOGY 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt, Not Bold
Objectives: Formatted Table
This course provides an introduction to Physical Meteorology to
understand atmosphere and different processes governing it.
Course Outline:
State of the atmosphere: Main constituents of dry air, carbon dioxide, ozone, Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
ozone depletion, water vapour and aerosols; Vertical thermal structure of the
atmosphere: Troposphere, stratosphere, mesosphere, thermosphere and
exosphere; Environmental lapse rate; Standard atmosphere; Hydrostatic
equilibrium; Hydrostatic equation; Geopotential; Equipotential surfaces.
Thermodynamics of dry air: Equation of state, Expansion of gas under
constant pressure; Law of conservation of energy; specific heats of a gas;
First law of thermodynamics; Adiabatic process in the atmosphere; Potential
temperature; Equation state of dry air; poisson’s equation for dry air;
Alternative forms of the energy equation; Entropy; Enthalpy.
Thermodynamics of moist air: The three states of water substances; The
Classius and Clapeyron equation; Equation of state for water vapour;
Moisture variables (Absolute humidity, specific humidity, relative humidity,
mixing ratio); Relationship between Rm and Rd; Virtual temperature. Isobaric
processes for moist air: Dew point temperature; Wet bulb temperature;
Equivalent temperature; Adiabatic expansion of unsaturated air; Adiabatic
expansion of saturated air. Vertical stability of the atmosphere: Dry adiabatic
lapse rate; Standard adiabatic lapse rate; Equilibrium states; The parcel
method; Application of the parcel method; Latent instability; The slice
method; Relation between potential and latent instability; Stability of layers.
Solar Radiation: Characteristics of the sun; Nature of solar radiation;
Definitions and concepts in radiation; Transfer of radiation through a
medium; Terrestrial radiation; Characteristics of terrestrial radiation;
Absorption of terrestrial radiation; Transmission of terrestrial radiation
through the atmosphere; Simpson’s computation of terrestrial radiation
transfer; Elsasser’s radiation chart; Radiative cooling or heating of the
atmosphere; The mean heat balance of the earth - atmosphere system; The
atmospheric green house effect.
Lab. Work:
Specific experiments. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
Recommended Books:
1. Haltiner, G.J. and Martin, F.L., 1957. Dynamical and Physical Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
Meteorology. McGraw-Hill, NY, 470 pp.
2. Rettalack, B.J., 1973. Physical Meteorology. Compendium of
Meteorology (WMO Pub.), Vol. 1, No. 2.
190
3.2. Houghton, H.G., 1985. Physical Meteorology. The M.I.T. Press,
London, 442 pp.
4.3. Iribarne, J.V. and Godson, W.L., 1973. Atmospheric
Thermodynamics. Springer Netherlands, 223 pp.
4. Rettalack, B.J., 1973. Physical Meteorology. Compendium of
Meteorology (WMO Pub.), Vol. 1, No. 2.
MS-PO-611 SATELLITE OCEANOGRAPHY 2+1=3 Chr Formatted Table

This course provides an introduction to Satellite Oceanography to

substitute on board instruments to record various parameters of oceans.
Course Outline:
Physical Principles of remote Sensing; Satellite Orbits; Sensors for

forecasting the Ocean; Remote Sensing Program for satellite Meteorology
and Oceanography; Principles of Image Processing; Passive sensors;
Ocean colors and Remote Sensing; Passive microwave radiometers;
Comparison between infrared and microwave radiometers for SST
measurement; Air - Sea Interaction studies using satellite data; Radars, sea
surface roughness and Scatterometry; Radar Altimeters from the Ocean;
Synthetic Aperture Radar imaging of Ocean.
Lab. Work:
Specific assignments
Recommended Books:
1. Kidder, S.Q. and Haar, T.H.V., 1995. Satellite Meteorology an

Introduction. Academic Press, x + 466 pp.
2. Robinson, I.S., Measuring the Oceans from Space.
2.3. Satellite Oceanography- An Introduction for Oceanographers and
Remote sensing scientists.
3. Robinson, I.S., Measuring the Oceans from Space.

Formatted: Left
MS-PO - 612: Sea Level Changes and Coastal Zone

(For description please refer to Module IV: MS-GO - 611)
191
Module VIII: Port Operations and Ship Management (POSM)
BUSINESS RESEARCH Formatted: Font: 16 pt
MS-POSM-601 2+1=3 Chr
METHODOLOGY Formatted Table
Objectives:
This subject introduces the fundamentals of the research process and

covers the applications of qualitative and quantitative research methods.
The purpose of this subject is to enable students to develop their skills of
conducting a research independently.
Course Outline:
The role of business research; Scientific thinking and investigation -

theory building, inductive and deductive reasoning; Difference between
propositions and hypotheses; Concept of research process - preliminary
data gathering, research problem/question definition, theoretical
framework hypothesis development, scientific research design;
Observational, experimental and case study research designs; Qualitative
and quantitative research methodologies; Data collection methods;
Questionnaire design; Measurement of variables - scaling, reliability and
validity; Censuses and sampling; Probability and nonprobability
sampling; sampling frame; Response rate issues and non-response bias;
Analysis and interpretation for qualitative and quantitative data;
Parametric and nonparametric statistics for hypothesis testing; Bivariate
correlation and simple linear regression. Research proposal and research
report; Use of Harvard reference methods; Ethics of research; Plagiarism.
Lab. Work:
Use of statistical software packages.

Recommended Books:
1. Anderson J. et al., Thesis and Assignment writing. Wiley Eastern.

1. Zikmund, W.G., 2003. Business Research Methods. 7th Ed., Thomson,
South-Western.
2. Cavana, R.Y., Delahaye, B.L. and Sekaran, U., 2001. Applied Business
Research: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods. John Wiley & Sons
Australia, Ltd.
3. Emory, W.C., Business Research Methods. Richard D Irwin.
4.3. Cooper, D.R., 2001. Business Research Methods. 7th Ed., McGraw-
Hill.
4. Emory, W.C., Business Research Methods. Richard D Irwin.
5. Zikmund, W.G., 2003. Business Research Methods. 7th Ed., Thomson,
192
South-Western.
5. Anderson J. et al., Thesis and Assignment writing. Wiley Eastern.
FUNDAMENTALS OF MARITIME, Formatted: Left, Right: -0.1"

MS-POSM-602 2+1 = 3 Chr
ECONOMICS AND MARKETING Formatted Table
Objectives:
To understand the economic aspects of maritime trade and shipping

market.
Course Outline:
Maritime sector, its economic and marketing fundamentals; Economic

organization of the shipping market; Supply, demand and freight rates;
Financing ships and shipping companies; Economic principles of
maritime trade; Global pattern of maritime trade; Bulk cargo and the
economics of bulk shipping; General cargo and the economics of liner
shipping; Regulatory framework of maritime economics; Economics of
shipbuilding and scrapping; Marketing environment; Product life cycle;
International product policy; International promotional policy; Overseas
marketing channel policy; Geographical aspects of Pakistan coastline;
Importance of oceans; Water Transport/ Water Ways; Role and
significance of ports in maritime transport; Ports sector and ports in
Pakistan & world and Major Trading Blocks of the World; The importance
of ports to the national/ regional economy; Challenges in the maritime
sector including globalization; Neglected areas and their improvement
strategies; National legislation on maritime issues including National
maritime Policy (NMP).
Lab. Work:
Marketing surveys.
Recommended Books:
1. Cateora, P.R. and Graham, J., International Marketing. Irvine-Sage

Publications.
1. Stopford, M., Maritime economics. 3rd Edition.
2. Dana-Nicoleta, L., 2003. International Marketing. Biztantra.
3. Keagan, W.J. and Green, M., Global Marketing. Prentice Hall.
4. Cateora, P.R. and Graham, J., International Marketing. Irvine-Sage
Publications.
193
5.4. Kotler, K., Koshy, J., Principles of Marketing Management. Prentice
Hall.
5. Stopford, M., Maritime economics. 3rd Edition.
HUMAN RESOURCE Formatted: Font: 16 pt

MS-POSM-603 2+1 = 3 Chr
MANAGEMENT Formatted Table
Objectives:
To equip the students with the fundamentals of Strategic role of human

resource management; Planning for human resources in dynamic
environment; Acquisition and maintenance of human resources; Training
and development; Trade unionism and employee welfare.
Course Outline:
Human Resource Management: Importance to managers, Changing

environment and Duties of HRM, HR Strategic Challenges, HR and
Competitive Advantage & Strategic HRM Personnel Planning and
Recruitment, Job Analysis, Writing job descriptions & specifications,
Recruitment and Selection Process, Workforce (Personnel) Planning and
Forecasting, Interviewing Perspective Employees, Types of selection
interviews and selection techniques, Training and Developing Employees,
Training Process, Training Techniques, Evaluating the Training and
Development Effort, Performance Management & Appraisal Methods,
Monetary Compensation, Current Trends in Compensation, Incentive
plans & Employee Incentive, Introduction to Crew Management in the
Shipping Industry, Crew Management Origin and Development, Major
Commercial Players, Crew Management Procedures and Seafarers’
Employment Practices, Crew Administrative Quality and Productivity
Indicators and Crew Welfare.
Lab. Work:Work:???????????????????????????????
Specific assignments may be given.

Recommended Books:
194
1. Foot, M. and Hook, C., 2008. Introducing Human Resource
Management. 5th Ed., FT Prentice Hall,
1.2. Gomes-Mejia, L., Balkin, D. and Cardy, R., 2010. Managing Human
Resources. 6th Ed., Pearson. Prentice Hall.
2.3. ILO, 2004. The Global Seafarer, Living and Working Conditions in a
Globalized Industry. Geneva.
4. Price, A., 2004. Human Resource Management in a Business Context.
2nd Ed., Thomson Learning.
3. Foot, M. and Hook, C., 2008. Introducing Human Resource
Management. 5th Ed., FT Prentice Hall,
4.5. Sutherland, J. and Canwell, D., 2004. Key concepts in Human
Resource Management. 1st Ed., Palgrave McMillan.
5. Price, A., 2004. Human Resource Management in a Business Context.
2nd Ed., Thomson Learning.
MARINE AND MARITIME Formatted Table

MS-POSM-604 2+1 = 3 Chr
EMPLOYMENT Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Objectives:
When students enter in to the workforce. This strand has been designed to
introduce students to the wide range of employment opportunities offered
by marine and maritime industries.
Course Outline:
Marine employment opportunities: types of employment, entry

requirements; maritime employment opportunities, education/training
standards required for selection, post-school training details for the
positions; advantages and disadvantages of shore and sea-based
careers; features prospective employers may require in applicants;
scholarships and traineeships available in the marine and maritime fields.
Lab. Work:
To investigate career opportunities in the marine and maritime industries,

assess personal characteristics and traits in relation to the requirements of
prospective employers; to search requirements for training, working conditions,
rates of pay, hours of work for sea-going and shore-based positions.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, Opportunities In Marine And Maritime Careers. Online.

2.1. 2001. Seaman Service Book. G.S.O. form No. 20.
2. Anonymous, 2016. Maritime & Offshore Career Guide. 16th Ed., Navingo
195
BV.
3. Jensen, L., 2006. New Waves of Marine Career Opportunities. Georgia
Sea Grant Marine Education Intern.
4. Opportunities In Marine AndAnonymous, 2016. Maritime Careers.
Online& Offshore Career Guide. 16th Ed., Navingo BV.

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS
MS-POSM-605 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt
AND MARITIME LAWS Formatted: Font: 16 pt
To understand the legal structure and framework of the shipping industry

and the ‘international’ aspect and complexity of regulating such a dynamic
industry.
Course Outline:
History of Shipping, Shipping powers (Historical to present day); Ancient

and medieval shipping laws, Evolution of modern shipping laws; Choice
of courts and jurisdiction, Laws of the seas (UNCLOS); International
maritime regulatory bodies e.g. IMO, MSC, MEPC, UNCTAD; International
conventions e.g. SOLAS, MARPOL, Ratification of conventions and force
of law; International conventions e.g. STCW, COLREGS, IALA, BUOYAGE;
Important shipping organizations e.g. Intertanko, Intercargo, ITF, MPA;
Important shipping organizations e.g. ILO, ICS, ISC, PSC, Flag States; Role
of ‘BIMCO’, ‘The Baltic Exchange’, Lloyds of London; Description and role
of International Association of Classification Societies, Institute of
Chartered Shipbrokers.
Lab. Work:
Report Writing. 3_, Font: Times New Roman, 8 pt, Font color: Black, English
(United Kingdom)
Formatted: Justified, No widow/orphan control
196
Recommended Books:
1. Falkanger T., Bull, H.J. and Brautaset, L., 2004. Scandinavian Maritime
Law: the Norwegian Perspective. 2nd Ed., Oslo: Universitetsforlaget.
2. Farthing, B. and Brownrigg, M., 1997. Farthing on International
Shipping. 3rd Ed., LLP.
1.3. Guilf, D., 2009. Shipping Interdiction and the Law of the Sea.
2. Farthing, B. and Brownrigg, M., 1997. Farthing on International
Shipping. 3rd Ed., LLP.
3.4. Pamborides, G., 1999. International Shipping Law: Legislation and
Enforcement. 1st Ed., Springer.
197
4. Falkanger T., Bull, H.J. and Brautaset, L., 2004. Scandinavian Maritime
Law: the Norwegian Perspective. 2nd Ed., Oslo: Universitetsforlaget.
MARITIME LOGISTICS AND Formatted: Font: 16 pt

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT Formatted Table
Objectives:
To discuss, in the context of maritime transport, the concept and Formatted: Condensed by 0.2 pt
development of modern logistics, including supply chain management, and Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.93 li
marketing; to examine the specific position of shipping and ports in the
logistics and supply chain.
Course Outline:
Concepts in supply chain management; Information technology for the Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
supply chain; Decision support system for supply chain management; Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.93 li
Logistics network design and planning; Inventory management in the
supply chain; Risk pooling concept; Bullwhip effect in supply chain;
Computerized beer game; Supply chain integration; Strategic alliance and
partnering; Product and process design for logistics; International issues
in supply chain management; Role of manager in supply chain; Aligning
supply chain with business strategy; Elements of logistics and supply
chain management (Transportation; Plant location, facility location and
layout planning, maritime freight management); Effects of globalization on
logistic industry; Baltic Freight Index; Developing technologies in
logistics; Concepts of multimodal transport; Carrier alliances &
partnerships; Multimodal logistic process; Regional & national patronage;
National administrative control on Maritime Logistics; International
regulatory framework, & international organizations like APH/ ISF/ ICS/
ITF; Familiarity with integrating Decision Support System (DSS) in
managing the supply chain & Enterprise Resources Planning (ERP) and
the integration of DSS and ERP for supply chain management; Evolution
of maritime logistics in the context of maritime transport; Current trends
in shipping logistics; Specific position of shipping and ports in the
logistics and supply chain; International container trade; Marine
transportation & its role in supply chain management.
Lab. Work:
Main analytical tools as well as decision making techniques of logistics and Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.93 li
marketing and their applications in the shipping and port sector.
Recommended Books:
1. Ballou, R.H., Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.93 li
Pearson Education.
2. Christoper, M., 2003. Logistics and Supply Chain Management,
Pearson Education.
198
3. Christopher, M., Logistics & Supply Chain Management: Creating Value
Adding Networks. FT Press.
1.4. Simchi-Levi, D. Kaminsky, P. and Simchi-Levi, E., 2003. Designing
and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies and Case
Studies. 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill.
2. Christoper, M., 2003. Logistics and Supply Chain Management,
Pearson Education.
3. Ballou, R.H., Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management.
Pearson Education.
4. Christopher, M., Logistics & Supply Chain Management: Creating Value
Adding Networks. FT Press.
MARITIME SAFETY
AND SECURITY
MS-POSM-
607
MARITIME SAFETY AND SECURITY 2+1=3 Chr
Formatted Table
Objectives:
To equip students with the fundamentals of Maritime Safety and Security

and related matters.
Course Outline:
Hazard and definition; Types of hazards, Transportation of hazardous

goods; maritime casualties and reasons; threat and risk definitions;
qualitative and quantitative risk assessment; methods of reducing risk;
Emergency planning; Security concept/ regimes and management; Ship
and port security procedures, ship and port security equipment; Ship
security assessment and plan; Port security assessment and plan; Ship
and port security officials, their tasks and responsibilities; Security
documentation and registration; Security survey; Act/ ordinance,
Regulations, Manuals, and International regulations on Criminality,
Terrorism, Piracy, SOLAS, ISPS Contingency plans, DPA, ISM, SOLAS,
MARPOL, Classification society & other international safety & security
initiatives such as; 24 hour rule, CSI, C-TPAT & Mega-Port initiatives; Port
state control, Coastal state, UNCLOS-III, & Other Maritime conventions.
Lab. Work::?????????????????
Report writing.
Recommended Books:
1. Talley, W., 2013. Maritime Safety, Security and Piracy. CRC Press, 368
pp.
2. Trafford, S.M., Maritime Safety: The Human Factors.
199
3. Anonymous, 2008. Proceedings of the Marine Safety & Security
Council. U.S. Department of Homeland Security.
Anonymous, 1990.
4.1. Anonymous, 1990. Marine Safety Manual: Port Security. Vol. 7. U.S.
Department of Transportation, U.S. Coast Guard.
2. Anonymous, 2008. Proceedings of the Marine Safety & Security
Council. U.S. Department of Homeland Security.
5.3. Berg, H.P., 2013. Human Factors and Safety Culture in Maritime
Safety (revised). Bundesamt für Strahlenschutz, Salzgitter, Germany,
TransNav: The International Journal on Marine Navigation and Safety
of Sea Transportation, 7(3): 347-352.
4. Talley, W., 2013. Maritime Safety, Security and Piracy. CRC Press, 368
pp.
5. Trafford, S.M., Maritime Safety: The Human Factors.
MS-POSM-608 MARITIME TECHNOLOGIES 2+1=3 Chr Formatted Table

Objectives:
The aim of this course is to provide a working knowledge of the principles,

practice and management of present and future technologies in shipping
industry.
Course Outline:
This course will discuss the fundamental engineering and related

technologies relating to communications, power generation, propulsion,
sea keeping, structures & ship systems that underpin the maritime
industries. Contents of the module not limited to but include:
Appreciation of Marine Machinery Systems; Materials; Casting, Welding,
Non-destructive examination and measurement methods; Stress, Strain
and Structural Analysis; Thermodynamic and Fluid Mechanics; Fuel,
Combustion, Emissions and Environmental Considerations; Diesel
Engines; Ship and Machinery Vibration and Noise; Ship Strength, Stability
and Sea keeping; Ship Resistance and Propulsion; Ship Service Analysis;
Energy Management; Electrical and Control Engineering; Condition
Monitoring; Electronic Charting; Investigation and Failure Case Studies.
Lab. Work::????????????????????????
200
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 2014. Maritime-Port Technology and Development. CRC

Press.
2. Benford, H., 1991. Naval Architecture for Non-Naval Architects. Society
of Naval Architects & Marine Engineer.
2.3. Soares, C.G., Garbatov, Y., Sutulo, S. and Santos, T.A., 2012.
Maritime Engineering and Technology. CRC Press.
3.4. Wijnolst, N., Wergeland, T., 2008. Shipping Innovation. Delft
University Press.
4. Benford, H., 1991. Naval Architecture for Non-Naval Architects. Society

of Naval Architects & Marine Engineer.
MS-POSM-609 PILOTING AND NAVIGATION 2+1=3 Chr Formatted: Font: 16 pt

Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course gives students the basic knowledge enabling them to safely
direct a boat at sea and introduces students to pilotage. It also gives them
a basic understanding of the methods mariners use to safely direct their
vessels inshore and offshore.
Course Outline:
Difference between piloting and navigation: how mariners use landmarks,

buoys and marks to enter and leave port, directing a vessel at sea,
encompassing piloting, inshore and offshore directing; navigational light
requirements for vessels under way; the lateral and cardinal systems of
buoyage; navigation charts and their symbols; basic navigation aids;
ocean currents and navigation, how to locate one's position using a transit
bearing, cross bearing fix; practical navigation, locating position using a
transit bearing, cross bearing fix, the meaning of dead reckoning; the
global current patterns; how ancient mariners used currents to their
advantage? how the stars are used to navigate? the modern aids to
navigation; international regulations for the prevention of collision at sea. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
Lab. Work: 3_, Font: 6 pt, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Formatted: Left
201
To identify navigational light requirements for vessels under way; to recognize
the lateral and cardinal buoyage marks; to determine the latitude and longitude
of a position on a chart; to use or simulate the techniques used in estimating
one's position at sea etc.
Recommended Books:
1. Anonymous, 1942. Motor Boating. Yaughtmen’s Magazine.

1.2. Hobbs, R.R., 1998. Marine Navigation: Piloting and Celestial and
Electronic Navigation. Naval Institute Press, 677 pp.
2. Anonymous, 1942. Motor Boating. Yaughtmen’s Magazine.
3. Rousmaniere, J. and Smith, M., 1999. The Annapolis Book of
Seamanship: Third Edition: Completely Revised, Expanded and
Updated. Simon and Schuster, 416 pp.
PORT DEVELOPMENT,
MS-POSM - 610 OPERATIONS AND 2+1 = 3 Crh Formatted: Font: 14 pt
Formatted Table
MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To equip students with the fundamentals of the planning, design,

development, operations and management process along with issues of
ports and terminals.
Course Outline:
Role of ports in economic development and in the through transport

concept; road/ rail impact on port/ hinterland relationships; port
administration and free ports; the concept of dry-ports; demand analysis;
capacity evaluation; productivity enhancement; Port Performance and
Productivity including Port Performance Indicators (PPI) and
Implementation of key performance indicators (KPIs); Environmental
Impact Assessment; investment appraisal; information needs for port
planning; aids to navigation; hydrographic aspects and vessel traffic
management; investment criteria; investment analysis and financing; port
authority liabilities, legal liability under national and international law;
terminal design for the different principal cargo types; layout design
models; storage facility planning models; port operations and pilotage,
202
Input/output modes; management and organization; port marketing; cargo
handling and transfer technology; data processing and communications
technology; ship handling; docking and mooring systems; labour
management in ports; planning for emergencies and disasters including
safety & security.
Lab. Work::??????????????????????
Recommended Books:
1. Alderton, P., 2008. Port Management and Operations. 2nd Ed., Informa
Maritime & Transport.
2. Pinder, D. and Slack, B., Shipping and Ports in Twenty-first Century.
Routledge.
3. Register, L., 2004. Port security Handbook.
7. Anonymous, Manual of Best Management Practices for Port Operations.
American Great Lakes Port Association, Purdue University.
4.2. Anonymous, Port Development: A Handbook for Planners in
developing countries, UNCTAD.
5.3. Bernard, K., 1995. Marketing Promotion Tools for Ports. New York.
United Nations.
6.4. Haezendonck, E., 2001. Essays on Strategy Analysis for Seaports.
Louvain, Belgium, Garant.
7. Anonymous, Manual of Best Management Practices for Port Operations.
American Great Lakes Port Association, Purdue University.
MS-POSM- SHIP BROKERAGE, CHARTERING

2+1=3 Chr
611 AND E-COMMERCE
5. Pinder, D. and Slack, B., Shipping and Ports in Twenty-first Century.
Routledge.
6. Register, L., 2004. Port security Handbook.
SHIP BROKERAGE,
MS-POSM-611 CHARTERING AND 2+1=3 Chr
E-COMMERCE
To give students a thorough understanding of ships and tanker brokerage,
chartering and sale and purchase management in theory and in practice Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
along with basics of e-commerce.

Course Outline:
Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li, Pattern: Clear
(White)
Overview of the shipping market; composition of the freight market; Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
participants in the freight market and their interests and concerns; market
activities and indicators of the state of the market; Basic concepts of
203
chartering; the role and liability of brokers; information network; orders,
positions and freight market reports; chartering information centres and
organisations; The period of investigation, offers and counter-offers;
negotiation of main terms and details; subjects; post-fixture follow-up;
Different types of charters; costs and risk allocation in different types of
charters; standard charter-party forms; detailed analysis of standard charter
party forms; practical considerations in drafting charter parties; rider clauses;
Voyage estimating; comparing voyage charter income with time charter hire;
lay-time calculation; ballast bonus; Sources of information for ship sale and
purchase activities; the role of sale and purchase brokers, classification
societies and independent valuators; marketing ships for sale; the
commitment system; firm negotiation; sales terms; inspection and valuation
of the ship; documentation; closing meeting; payment and delivery, deletion
and registration; Major shipbuilding nations; the shipbuilding process; the
new building contract; major demolition markets; demolition sales terms;
payment and delivery; Advantages and disadvantages of second-hand
vessels; Standard contracts for sale and purchase of vessels. Introduction to
Technology Applications; E-Commerce and E-Business Concepts; Personal
Technology Use; Enterprise Systems Technology and Infrastructure; The
Wired World. Technology Convergence; Disruptive Technologies; Technical
Solutions and Standards; Building E-commerce Solutions; Managing
Business Value of Information Technology and E-commerce; E-commerce
and Consumer Behaviour; E-commerce and Technology Use; Ethical, Social
and Political Issues; Testing and Evaluating E-commerce Solutions.
Lab. Work::??????????????????
Recommended Books:
1. Gordon, L., 1995. Shipbrokering and Chartering Practice. London, LLP.
2. Lars, G., Ship broking and Chartering Practice. 7th Ed., Lloyd's List.
3. Laudon, K. C. and Traver, C.G., 2004. E-commerce: Business,
Technology, Society. 2nd Ed., Boston : Pearson/Addison-Wesley.
2.4. Packard, W., 1978. Voyage Estimating. London, Fairplay.
3.5. Packard, W., 1988. Sale and Purchase. London, Fairplay.
4. Lars, G., Ship broking and Chartering Practice. 7th Ed., Lloyd's List.
5.6. Stopford, M., 2009. Maritime Economics. 3rd Ed., Routledge Pub.
6. Laudon, K. C. and Traver, C.G., 2004. E-commerce: Business,
Technology, Society. 2nd Ed., Boston : Pearson/Addison-Wesley.
SHIPPING AND Formatted Table

ENVIRONMENT NORMS Formatted: Font: 16 pt
Objectives:
The objective of this course is to provide students an opportunity to

understand the impact of shipping and shipping related activities on the
environment, both sea and air; and to learn what the industry is doing to
204
reduce this impact. The course will also look at what Singapore is doing in
these areas to safeguard the marine environment.
Course Outline:
Causes of pollution to the marine and atmospheric environments due to

shipping related activities; Environmental issues such as ship waste, oil
pollution, anti-fouling paints, ship breaking activities, ship litter (including
plastics), ballast water management and ship emissions and ship
recycling; Role of shipping in relation to global issues like greenhouse
gases & global warming; Current measures (both preventive and
mitigating) adopted by the industry to tackle these issues along with
national policy/ steps to safeguard our marine environment.
Lab. Work::??????????????????
Recommended Books:
1. IMO., International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from

Ships.
1. Andersson, K., Brynolf, S., Lindgren, J.F., Wilewska-Bien, M., 2016.
Shipping and the Environment: Improving Environmental Performance in
Marine Transportation. Springer, 426 pp.
2. Heberlein, T.A., 2012. Navigating Environmental Attitudes. Oxford
University Press, 288 pp.
2.3. IMO., International Convention for the Control and Management of
Ships’ Ballast Water and Sediments.
4. IMO., International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from
Ships.
3. Heberlein, T.A., 2012. Navigating Environmental Attitudes. Oxford
University Press, 288 pp.
4.5. Ringbom, H., 1997. Competing Norms in the Law of Marine
Environmental Protection: Focus on Ship Safety and Pollution
Prevention. Kluwer Law International, 268 pp.
SHIPPING OPERATIONS
AND MANAGEMENT
5. Andersson, K., Brynolf, S., Lindgren, J.F., Wilewska-Bien, M., 2016.
Shipping and the Environment: Improving Environmental Performance in
205
Marine Transportation. Springer, 426 pp.
SHIPPING OPERATIONS AND
MANAGEMENT
Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course introduces the framework and practices on various aspects of

ship management, and marketing management for the shipping firm and
tools for financial analysis of shipping investments are also introduced.
Maritime transportation and cargoes; Uses of intermodal transport; Types

of water carriers and freight transportation; Introduction to Shipping
Practice; Agencies involved at various stage in Shipping & Port Procedure;
Shipping Lines, Shipping Operations & Handling of Containers; Container
Terminal Business Communication & Procedures; Fleet management;
Technical management; Managing ship’s maintenance & husbandry;
Marketing management for the shipping firm: concepts, functions, and
strategy; Tools for financial analysis of shipping investments; Ships
registration & classification; Shipping costs and budgeting; Crewing &
Manning; Marine Insurance, cargo claims and Risk management; Vessel
Operations & commercial/ technical issues; Bunker management & Voyage
estimating related commercial practices; Contractual framework of
international shipping; Occupational safety and safety of the environment;
Bulk commodity logistics and services; Operations of container freight
stations and inland container depots; Materials handling and packaging for
maritime transport; Handling of hazardous and dangerous cargoes.
Regulatory regimes in international shipping including codes like IMDG and
code; Functions of liner conferences and bases for rates; Transshipment
hub, logistical networks and feeder concepts; Non-vessel Operating
Common Carrier (NVOCC); Documentation and logistics information
systems; Security issues and related technology.
Lab. Work::???????????????????????? _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
3_, Font: 4 pt, Font color: Auto, English (United States), Not
Expanded by / Condensed by
Specific assignments may be given. Formatted: Left
Recommended Books: Formatted: Justified
1. Anonyhmous, 2006. Ship Operations and Management. Institute of

Chartered Shipbrokers, Witherby, 266 pp.
1.2. Branch, A.E., 2007. Elements of Shipping. 8th Ed.
3. Kristiansen, S., Maritime Transportation: Safety Management and Risk
Analysis. Butterworth-Heinemann.
2.4. Song, D-W., 2012. Maritime Logistics: A Complete Guide to Effective
Shipping and Port Management.
206
3.5. Willingale, M., 2005. Ship Management. 4th Ed., LLP. Ltd.
4. Kristiansen, S., Maritime Transportation: Safety Management and Risk
Analysis. Butterworth-Heinemann.
5. Anonyhmous, 2006. Ship Operations and Management. Institute of
Chartered Shipbrokers, Witherby, 266 pp.
SCHEME OF STUDY
FOR TWO-YEARS MS IN MARINE SCIENCE
Semester/ Year Name of Subject Crh

First Semester/ First Year
MS-701 Advanced Marine Ecology 2+1 = 3
MS-703 Chemical Oceanography 2+1 = 3
MS-705 Fisheries Biology 2+1 = 3
MS-707 Marine Pollution 2+1 = 3
MS-709 Principles of Mariculture 2+1 = 3
15
Second Semester/ First Year
MS-702 Advances in Marine Biology 2+1 = 3
MS-704 Coastal Zone Management 2+1 = 3
MS-706 Marine Geology 2+1 = 3
MS-708 Physical Oceanography 2+1 = 3
MS-710 Research Methodology* 3
15
*Research Methodology is a compulsory course and will be offered by DFS in Formatted: Justified
accordance with the University Policy. Formatted: Not Expanded by / Condensed by
Formatted: Normal, Justified, None, Space Before: 12 pt
Students may opt for 30 Cr.h. course work comprising of ten courses as given
above to be completed in two semesters/ an year without any research work
enabling them to earn M.S./ M.Phil. degree or 24 Cr.h. course work comprising
of eight courses to be completed in two semesters/ an year with a research/
thesis work of six Cr.h. They have to leave two courses i.e. one from each
semester if they want to do research work for M.S./ M.Phil.
207
208
DETAIL OF COURSES FOR
TWO-YEAR MS IN MARINE SCIENCE
3(2+1 = 3
MS -– 701 ADVANCED MARINE ECOLOGY Crh)
Formatted Table

To provide a pursuit of basic knowledge of science for better

understanding the working of marine ecosystems that is increasingly an
applied science devoted to understanding how ecosystems respond to
stressors and environmental changes.
??????????????????????????????
Introduction: The nature and global distribution of Marine Organisms, Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Habitats and Productivity. Patterns of Marine Ecosystem: Climate
changes: Sea surface temperature, El-Nino; Productivity and
Biogeography. Endemism, Abundance, Size and Biodiversity. Primary
productivity, Light and photosynthesis. Nutrients and growth. Microbial
decomposition of Organic Material. Pelagic ecosystem: The planktonic
system of surface waters. Environmental features, Temporal and spatial
variability in pelagic ecosystem. Pelagic Inhabitants, Pelagic fisheries.
The Deep Sea: Organisms and environment of the deep sea; Food supply
to the deep sea, Hydrothermal vents. Continental shelf and Seabed:
Habitat, biota, food web on the seabed, continental shelf and littoral
sediments Patterns of Distribution; Zonation pattern on shores, Causes of
zonation, community dynamics. Coping with physical and biological
environment. Ecosystem of Mangrove forests and Seaweeds: Population
dynamics of inhabiting organisms; economic/ commercial importance of
mangroves and seaweeds. Human impact on the shores: Collecting
marine organisms for food bait and trade. Chronic pollution, Introduction
of new species; Coastal zone change.
Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li, Pattern: Clear
Lab. Work: Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE

2_, Font: Bold, Font color: Black, English (United Kingdom)
Survey and collection of marine animals and plants from intertidal, subtidal,
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 16 pt, Not Bold,
supratidal zones of rocky and sandy shores and Mangrove area. Study of Italic, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
zonation pattern at rocky, sandy and muddy shores. Estimation of species Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
richness, density and diversity of intertidal zone organisms. _LEVEL MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_BY_ROLE_HEADING
2_, Font: Bold, Font color: Black, English (United Kingdom)
Recommended Books: Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE
1. Barnes, R.Kaiser, M.J.; Attrill M., Jennings, S.K. and Hughes, R.N., 1999. 2_, Font color: Auto, English (United States)
An Introduction to 2005. Marine Ecology. Blackwell. Sci, Processes, Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Systems and Impacts. Oxford Univ. Press. Formatted: Font: Italic
2. Boaden, P.J.S. and Seed, R. 1992. An Introduction to Coastal Ecology. Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 16 pt
Blackie A & P. Press, U.K. Formatted: MSG_EN_FONT_STYLE_NAME_TEMPLATE_ROLE

3. Kaiser, M.J., Attrill MBarnes, R.S.K. and Jennings, S., 2005.Hughes, R.N., 2_, Font color: Black, English (United Kingdom)
Formatted: Default Paragraph Font, Font: 16 pt
209
1999. An Introduction to Marine Ecology, Processes, Systems. Blackwell.
Sci.
4.3. Raffaelli,. D. and Impacts. Oxford Univ. Press.Hawkins, S., 1996.
Intertidal Ecology. Chapman & Hall, U.K
5.4. Nybakken, J.W., 1993. Marine Biology: An Ecological Approach. 3rd
edition. Harper & Row, Publ. New York.Yor
5. Raffaelli, D. and Hawkins, S., 1996. Intertidal Ecology. Chapman & Hall,
UK.
210
ADVANCES IN Formatted Table
MS - -702 3(2+1 = 3 Crh)
MARINE BIOLOGY
To provide advanced comprehensive information on marine animal and

plant groups and their ecology. To educate qualified multiplicators for the
idea of protection of marine life to increase the access to the complex
interaction and the "tiny life" in the sea. To encourage the diver to raise
awareness and participate in environmental activities.
??????????????????????????????????
Organisms of the Open Sea: Plankton. Crustacean and gelatinous plankton. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
Bioluminescence. Nekton, Cephalopods, Fishes, turtles and whales.
Phytoplankton: Biodiversity, Distribution, Life cycles, Ecology of Diatoms,
Dinoflagellates, Coccolithophores, Silicoflagellates and other small groups.
Red tide Phenomenon. Seaweeds: Biodiversity, Biomass, Distribution, and
Ecology of Chlorophyta, Phacophyta, Rhodophyta and other small groups:
Utilization of seaweed in developed and developing countries including
Pakistan. Mangroves: Biodiversity, Distribution, Associations. Mangrove forest
in Pakistan, Economic importance of mangroves. Benthic Marine
Invertebrates: Taxonomic level, Distribution and diagnostic characters of
Phyla: Protista Porifera, Cnidaria, Platyhelminthes, Annelida, Mollusca,
Crustacea, Echinodermata and Urochordata. Benthic Life Habits: Life habit
classification, Feeding classification, Life in mud and Life in Sand, Life on hard
surfaces and Moving waters, Benthic herbivores, Benthic carnivores. Intertidal
Zone: Factors affecting intertidal organisms. Zonation. Larval dispersion.
Predation and interspecific competition. Conserving Marine Biodiversity:
Estimation of Diversity, Value and Reduction in biodiversity, Marine Invasions.
Lab. Work:
Collection, Preservation and Identification of Phytoplankton. Preservation Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
and Identification of Seaweeds and Mangroves with associated fauna.
Sampling and preservation techniques of marine invertebrates,
identification of major groups: Molluscs, Crustaceans, Echinoderms
Annelids and Fishes. Identification of macro zooplankton collected from
northern Arabian Sea.
Recommended Books:
1. Hoqarth, P.J., 2000. The Biology of Mangroves (Biology of Habitats).

England, 162 pp.
2. Levinton, J.S., 2001. Marine Biology: Function, Biodiversity, Ecology.
2nd Ed., Oxford University Press.
3. Luning, K., 1990. Seaweeds: Their Environment, Biogeography &
Ecophysiology. Wiley. Inter. Sci. Publ.
211
1.4. Nybakken, J.W. and Bertness, M.D.,. 2005. Marine Biology: An Formatted: Font: Italic
ecological Approach., 5th Ed., Pearson Benjamin Cammings. Publ. Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
2.5. Pechenick, 2005. Biology of the Invertebrates. 5th Ed., McGraw-Hill.
3. Levinton, J.S. 2001. Marine Biology: Function, Biodiversity, Ecology,
2nd Ed., Oxford University Press.
4. Peter J. Hoqarth, 2000. The Biology of Mangroves (Biology of Habitats).
England, 162 pp.
5. Luning, K. 1990. Seaweeds: Their Environment, Biogeography &
Ecophysiology. Wiley. Inter. Sci. Publ.
MS - 703 CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted: Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Formatted Table
Objectives:
This course is designed to develop concept of Marine Chemistry and

important chemical processes in the oceans.
??????????????????????????????????
Course Outline:
Chemical Composition of Seawater: Major constituents and minor

constituents. Hydrographic Conditions: Temperature, pH, Salinity,
Dissolved oxygen, Biological Oxygen Demand, Chemical Oxygen
Demand, Dissolved Gases: The earth atmosphere Nitrogen. Oxygen,
Noble gases. Carbon Xioxide and Carbonate System: Exchange in ocean
& atmosphere. Acid-Base Equilibria in seawater, Equilibria of carbonate
species, Parameters of the CO2 system in seawater, Distribution of Formatted: Subscript
carbonate species, CaCo3 dissolution in seawater. Nutrient Chemistry: Formatted: Subscript
Phosphorus cycle. Nitrogen cycle, Silicon cycle, Use of nutrients as water

mass traces. Chemical Equilibria in the Ocean: The types species in
seawater, Principles of chemical equilibria, Chemical kinetics. Chemical
species and equilibria in the seawater. Radio Chemistry of the Ocean:
Classification of radio isotopes in the marine environment, Natural
radioactive elements, Radioactive contamination of the sea. Residence
time and mixing in the sea. Suspended Particulate Matter in Seawater:
Variability and concentration of suspended material, State of division,
Inorganic suspended material, Organic suspended material, Silicon,
Biochemistry of the Ocean: Body fluid, Biomaterial, Photosynthesis,
Animal metabolism, Decomposition of the dissolved organic content,
Phosphate, Nitrate and Nitrogen Substance, Anoxic condition, the
concentration of chemical elements by organisms.
Lab. Work:
Study of Hydrographic Condition: pH, Salinity, Dissolved Oxygen, Biological

Oxygen, Demand, Chemical Oxygen Demand. Nutrient Chemistry: Nitrite,
Nitrate, Phosphate and Silica estimation. Determination of heavy metals by
212
atomic absorption spectroscopy.
Recommended Books:
1. Eisler, R.L., 1981. Trace Metal Concentration in Marine Organisms. Pergamon

Press.
1. Millero, F.J., 2006. Chemical Oceanography. CRC Press NY, London.
2. Kennish, M.J., 2001. Marine Science: Practical hand book CRC Press.
3. Satyanarayana, D. 2007. Marine Chemistry, Daya Publ. House Delhi.
4.3. Mare, I.L. and Cresser, M.S., 1983. Environmental Chemical Analysis.
International text book Company. Chapman and Hall New York.
4. Millero, F.J., 2006. Chemical Oceanography. CRC Press NY, London.
5. Satyanarayana, D., 2007. Marine Chemistry, Daya Publ. House Delhi.
5. Eisler, R.L., 1981. Trace Metal Concentration in Marine Organisms. Pergamon

Press.
MS - -704 COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted: Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Formatted Table
To understand coastal zones, the dynamic environments shaped by natural

forces as well as human intervention enabling students to develop
management strategies and identify threats to these environments.
?????????????????????????
General Concepts Principles. Definition of ICZM, Evaluation of an ICZM Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.93 li
Program. Coastal Ecosystem and Resources: Basic concepts, Factors
affecting carrying capacity, shoreland systems, Estuarine systems,
Nearshore and ocean systems, Conserving and Restoring Coastal
Habitats, Wetlands along Pakistan coast, Renewable and non-renewable
resources, use of resources. Environmental Impact Assessment for
Coastal Developmental Projects and EIA in Pakistan. Coastal Zone
Management Techniques: Concept of integration in coastal zone
management, Discussion of various techniques. Water Quality
Management in the International legislation, Pollution Prevention in the
Coastal Zone, legislation and its implementation. Management of Beaches
& Coastal Hazards: Recreational value of beaches, Beach erosion and
water quality control, Copping with Beach Erosion, Guarding People and
Property against Natural Hazards, Managing Sediments and Shorelines,
Mitigating Shore Erosion along Coasts. Marine and Coastal Protected Area
Management: Design and implementation of marine and coastal protected
areas, Principles for management, Marine and coastal protected areas in
Pakistan. Future Problems of Coastal Zone: Eutrophication, Habitat
modification, exploitation of resources, toxic effects, introduction of non
indigenous species. Pathogen and toxins and their affects on human
health, global climate change and vulnerability of coastline. Institutional
213
and Legal Arrangements: Coastal zone management stakeholders,
Pakistan legislation pertinent to coastal zone management, Institutional
structure, Coastal Zoen Management Acts, managing coasts and their
watersheds, Coastal Programme Guides of Sindh and Balochistan
Provinces.
Lab. Work:
Specific exercises of lgical framework may be given.
????????????????????????????????
Recommended Books:
1. Clark, J.R., 1996. Coastal Zone Management Handbook, CRC Press.

1.2. Harvey, N.,. 2006. Global Change and Integrated Coastal
Management. The Asia-Pacific Region, Springer.
3. Kay, R.C. and Alder, J., 2005. Coastal Planning and Management. Taylor
& Francis.
2. Vernberg, W.B., 2001. The coastal zone: Past, present and future. Univ.
South Carolina Press.
3.4. Timothy, B., Brower, D.J. and Schwab, A.K., 2002. An Introduction of
coastal zone management. 2nd edition, Island Press.
5. Vernberg, W.B., 2001. The coastal zone: Past, present and future. Univ.
South Carolina Press.
4. Clark, J.R., 1996. Coastal Zone Management Handbook, CRC Press.
5. Kay, R.C. and Alder, J. 2005. Coastal Planning and Management. Taylor
& Francis.
MS - -705 FISHERIES BIOLOGY 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted: Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Formatted Table
To develop understanding of fisheries resources and recognize all major

taxonomic groups of fish and systematics of common fish. To understand
basic anatomy and physiology, evolution and zoogeography of major
groups of fish and current issues concerning conservation and fisheries
management.
???????????????????????????????
Fisheries Resources: Identification, nomenclature, classification, major Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.95 li
groups of Fishes and Shellfish. Fish Capture Devices in Industrial and
Artisanal Fisheries and their influence on Management, Trawling and
Gillnetting. Artisanal fisheries. Marketing Fish: International markets for
fish. Determination of values. Handling and storage. Resource
management and marketing. Marine Protected Areas and Fisheries:
Abundance, body size, fecundity and recruitment of target species in
MPAs. Population Dynamics: Distribution and abundance. Size
214
relationship. Selection of fishing gear. Food and feeding; Age and Growth,
Survival and Mortality. Life history patterns. Reproduction and Spawning:
Link between spawner abundance and recruitment. Influence of survival
and growth rate on age, size and reproductive effort at maturity; Effect of
fishing on life history. Parental care. Mating patterns. Reproductive
behaviour and life histories and exploitation. Assessment and Monitoring:
Collection of Basic Data; Stock size Data analysis and stock assessment.
Yield analysis. Ecosystem Effects of Fishing: Effect on benthic
communities and habitats. Effects of removing predators. Population
Structure: Age determination, back calculation techniques. Estimating food
consumption. Recruitment variability, pelagic eggs, larval and juvenile
stages. Fish as Predators and Prey: Foraging behaviour and diet choice.
Feeding ecology of piscivorous fishes. Biodiversity of Fish communities.
Habitat associations. Interaction between Fish, parasites and disease.
Lab. Work:
Identification of commercially important species of edible fishes.

Taxonomic study of most common edible crabs, shrimps oysters,
mussels, clams and squids obtained from Pakistan coast. Visit to
hatcheries and fish harbours.
Recommended Books:
1. King, M. 2007. Fisheries Biology; Assessment and Management.

Fishing News Book.
2. Hart, P.J.B., Reynolds, J.D. 2002. Handbook of Fish Biology and
Fisheries. Vol. 2. Blackwell Publ.
3.1. Blaber, S.J.M., 1997. Fish and Fisheries of Tropical Estuaries.
Chapman and Hall London.
2. Hart, P.J.B. and Reynolds, J.D. 2002. Handbook of Fish Biology and
Fisheries. Vol. 2. Blackwell Publ.
3. King, M., 2007. Fisheries Biology; Assessment and Management.
Fishing News Book.
4. Royce, W.F., 1996. Introduction to the Practice of Fishery Science. Acad.
Press.
4.5. Yadav, B.N., 2006. Fish & Fisheries. Daya Publ. House, India.
5. Royce, W.F., 1996. Introduction to the Practice of Fishery Science.
Academic Press.
MS-706 MARINE GEOLOGY 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted: Line spacing: Multiple 0.9 li
Formatted Table
To give detail of structure, evolution and geological processes of the
ocean basin and continental margin. This course will enable the students
to fully understand the marine environment, what dynamic processes
shape the surface of the earth under the ocean surface, sedimentation
processes, and Sediment distribution on seafloor.
????????????????????????????????
215
Course Outline:
Introduction: Landmark events in development of Marine geology. Scientific
Deep Sea Drilling, Contribution of Deep Sea Drilling Project (DWSDP) 1974-80,
Ocean Drilling Program (ODP; 1980-1990). Morphology of the Oceans:
Hypsometry, the principal topographic features of the Ocean, classifications
and geological processes of continental margins. Origin of Ocean Basin: Major
ocean basins, Gulfs and Seas, Estuaries, Deltas, Barrier Islands and Coral
Reefs, Plate tectonics and sea floor spreading, Rock magnetism, spreading
processes at ocean ridges, Age and structure of ocean crust, distribution of
deep ocean basins, Wilson cycle: opening and closing of ocean basins. Marine
Sedimentation: Sediment types and distributions, Biogenic calcite production
and deposition (CCD, Lysocline), Shelf sedimentation, Sediment types and
distributions, Biogenic calcite production and deposition (CCD, Lysocline),
shelf-to-basin transport phenomena, Deep sea sedimentation, Global
distribution of deep sea sediments. Sediment thickness and type variations.
Non-Living Marine Resources: Hydrocarbons, Minerals, Building material,
Marine energy resources (Renewable and Non renewable), Chemicals, Drugs.
Methods and instrumentation in Marine Geology: Navigation and Exploration
Techniques, Seafloor imaging: shipborne seafloor imaging (Echosounding,
multibeam bathymetry, sidescan sonars, airborne seafloor imaging multi and
hyper spectral sensors, radar methods, spaceborne seafloor imaging
(GEOSAT, ESR-1, SEASAT, LANDSAT), seismic and sub bottom profiling, Deep
submergence vehicles (ROVS). Sediment sampling Methods: Grabs, Dredgers,
core drilling (vibrocore, Piston core, Gravity core, Box core, Deep sea drilling).
Lab. Work:
Exercises of Marine Charts, Navigation and bathymetry, Acoustic Seismic
profiling, Marine environments, Sea floor spreading and Plate Tectonics,
Marine sediments, Coastal Processes.
Recommended Books:
1. Erickson, J., 2002. Marine Geology: Exploring the new Frontiers of
Oceans. Facts on File, USA.
2. Garrison, T., 2005. Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science.
Wadsworth Publ. Company.
2.3. Kennish, M.J., 2001. Practical Handbook of Marine Science. CRC
Press Washington D.C. 875 pp.
3.4. Segar, D.A., 1998. Introduction to Ocean Science. Wadsworth Publ.
CoCompany.
4. Garrison, T., 2005. Oceanography: An Invitation to Marine Science.
Wadsworth Publ. Company.
5. Seibold, E., 1996. The Sea Floor: An Introduction to Marine Geology.
Springer, UK.
MS - -707 MARINE POLLUTION 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted Table

Formatted: Font color: Auto, English (United States)
Objectives:
216
To understand pollution, its sources and implication with the biotic and
abiotic environment.
??????????????????????????????????
Course Outline:
Introduction to Pollution: Definition, Types of pollutants; Nature of input,

sources of input, Priorities. Oil Pollution: What is oil, oil discharges to
marine environment, Genesis of oil, Toxicology, Fate of spilled oil,
Treatment of oil at sea, Beach cleaning, Ecological impact of oil pollution,
Impact of refinery waste water, Impact of offshore operations, Commercial
damage from oil pollution, Public health risk from oil pollution. Metal
Pollution: Input routes, Atmospheric inputs, Uptake of metals, Biological
magnification, Mercury, Lead, Cadmium, Iron, Tin, Copper. Sewage
Treatment: Primary, secondary & tertiary treatment, d application of
sewage, Unconventional sewage treatment, Detergent phosphates.
Pesticides: Classification, Use, Effect on marine organisms,
Magnification, Effects on marine birds, pest resistance. Radioactivity:
Nature of radioactivity, Toxicology, Input of radioactivity to the sea,
Ecological impact of radioactivity, Hazard to human health. Thermal
Pollution and Power Plants: Power plant design, Discharges of waster
from thermal power plants, Toxic effects of effluent waters on biota.
Plastics Pollution: Nature of the problem, Effect on marine environment
i.e., aesthetics, ingestion, entanglement, Solutions & Education.
Institutional Arrangements: Introduction, The water pollution control, Sub-
sector, Institutions and organizations, Criteria and determinants, Example
of institutional arrangements, Capacity building.
Lab. Work:
Estimation of heavy metals in sediments and sessile organisms by atomic

absorption spectrometry. Estimation of aromatic compounds in seawater
samples by GLC.
Recommended Books:
1. Clark, B., 1992. Marine Pollution. Oxford University Press, New York.
2. Helmer and Hespanhol, I., 1997. Water Pollution Control. St.
Edmundsbury Press, UK.
1.3. Kennish, M.J., 1998. Pollution Impacts on Marine Biotic
Communities. C.R.C. Press, New York.
2.4. Law, A., 2000. Aquatic Pollution. John Wiley & Sons Inc. Canada.
3.5. Sindermann, J., 2006. Coastal Pollution: Effect on Living Resources
and Humans (Marine Science Series) CRC Press.
4. Helmer and Hespanhol, I., 1997. Water Pollution Control. St.
217
Edmundsbury Press, UK.
5. Clark, B., 1992. Marine Pollution. Oxford University Press, New York.
MS - -708 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted Table

Objectives:
To introduce important physical processes in the oceans in such a way

that they will understand both the conceptual physical principles and at
the larger scale how these fit into the earth as a system.
?????????????????????????????????
Course Outline:
Physical properties of sea water. Physical Laws and Classification of Forces,

and Motion in the Sea. Basic Forces, Pressure Gradient force, Wind stress,
Coriolis force, friction, viscosity, continuity equation, Equation of motion,
role of non-linear terms in the equation of motion. Waves: Characteristics,
Shallow Water and Deep Water Waves, Wave Reflection and Refraction,
Effects of Waves and Wave Energy. Tides: Measurements and Tides Origins
and Characteristics, Tidal forcing, Large scale tides, Tides near coasts, tidal
mixing, Estuaries, River outflow plumes, Fronts. Currents: Surface currents,
Response of the Upper Ocean to Winds, Ekman Layer and Ekman Mass
Transport. Application of Ekman Theory, Geostrophic flow, hydrostatic
equilibrium, Inertial flow, vorticity, westward intensification, Gulf Stream,
thermohaline effects, deep ocean circulation, and Tidal currents. Mass
Transport in the Ocean: Water mass identification and formation,
distribution of various properties, T-S relationship, water mass formation in
the North Indian Ocean. Ocean-atmosphere System: Ocean Atmosphere
Heat Exchange, air-sea heat flux components and geographic distribution,
computation of heat fluxes for Arabian Sea. Monsoon circulation, equatorial
waves, Impact of El Nino on global Weather. Coastal Hazards: Cyclones,
storm Surges, High Waves, Coastal Flooding. Salt Water Intrusion, Tsunami,
Tsunami Early Warming System for Indian rim countries.
Lab. Work:
Oceanographic Instruments: Instruments and Methods for measurements

of oceanographic parameters, measurements of tides, currents, waves
and sampling procedures for collections of sediments biological and
chemical sampling.
Recommended Books:
1. Dijkstra, H.A., 2005. Nonlinear physical oceanography: a dynamical

systems approach to the large scale ocean circulation and El Nino. Formatted: Font: Italic
218
Springer.
2. Stewart, R.H., 2007. Introduction to Physical Oceanography. Texas A &
M University.
3. Thurman, H.V., 2001. Introductory Oceanography. Charles E. Merrill
Publ.
4.2. Emery, W.J. and Thomson, R.E., 2001. Data Analysis Methods in
Physical Oceanography. Elsevier.
5.3. Mann, H. & Lazier, J.R. 2006. Dynamic of Marine Ecosystems. Blackwell
Publ.
4. Stewart, R.H., 2007. Introduction to Physical Oceanography. Texas A&M
Univ.
5. Thurman, H.V., 2001. Introductory Oceanography. Charles E. Merrill
Publ.
MS-709 PRINCIPLES OF MARICULTURE 3(2+1 = 3 Crh) Formatted Table

Objectives:
To understand different culture systems, their designs and operations.

Overview of different environment management systems required for
aquaculture as well as nutritional requirements for aquaculture practices.
??????????????????????????????????????????
Course Outline:
Introduction: An overview of status of mariculture of fishes with special

reference to Indo-Pacific region. Different Farming Systems: Extensive,
Semi-intensive and Intensive; Cage and Pen culture; Recirculatory and
running water systems. Important Cultivable Finfishes: Distribution,
biology, seed collection, hatchery technology, culture techniques,
problems and prospects (seabass, milkfish, mullets, sea breams, grouper,
etc.). Culture of Marine Crustaceans: Important cultivabale species of
shrimps, crabs and lobsters; distribution, biology, broodstock collection,
different systems of culture. Culture of Marine Moluscs: Present status
and scope, Species cultured (mussels, oysters, pearl oysters, scallops,
clams, sea cucumber) distribution, biology, farming methods, problems
and prospects. Seaweed Culture: Major seaweed species of commercial
importance; methods of culture; farming of agar, algin, carrageenan
yielding species; emerging trends in their farming in open seas;
Integration with other farming systems.
Fish and Shellfish Nutrition: Nutritional requirements of cultivable finfish
and shellfish: larvae, juveniles and adults; role of natural food in fish
nutrition; Role of nutrients; amino acids, fatty acids, proteins, lipids,
carbohydrates, vitamins and minerals. Soil And Water Quality
Management: Physical and chemical properties of soil and water, soil and
water quality monitoring and management.
219
Lab. Work:
Identification of cultivable marine finfish, shellfish and seaweeds.

Designing of cages and pens. Soil and water quality parameters. Visit to
mariculture sites.
Recommended Books:
1. Davenport, J., 2003. Aquaculture: The ecological issues. Springer-

Verlag.
1.2. Marianne, H. Carto, K.B., Duarte, S.M. 2008. Aquaculture in
Ecosystem. Springer-Verlag.
2. John Davenport, 2003. Aquaculture: The ecological issues. Springer-
Verlag.
3. McVey, J.P., 1993. CRC Handbook of Mariculture: Crustacean
Aquaculture. 2nd Edition. CRC press.
4. Parker, R. 2002. Aquaculture Science. 2nd Edition. Delmer Thomson
Learning U.K., U.S.
5. Wicking, J.T. and Lee, D. 2002. Crustacean Farming. Blackwell Sci.
Publ.
RECOMMENDATIONS
The NCRC for marine science submitted following recommendations to be considered by HEC:
I. Admission Criteria in B.S. Marine Science
A. Pre-requisite qualification should be Intermediate Science (or Equivalent) with
minimum 2nd Division from the following groups as per preference of order given
below:
i. Pre-Medical Group
ii. Pre-Engineering Group
iii. Other Groups (should have studied at least two subjects from Chemistry, Physics
and Mathematics.
B. Zero Semester would be offered to overcome students’ deficiency if required.
II. Compulsory Courses
A. Weightage of English may be reduced from 12 to 6 credit hours.
B. Urdu being the national language and as per decision of Supreme Court of Pakistan
must be included.
C. Biology should be included in the list of compulsory courses.
D. Citizenship Education and Community Engagement should be included in the list of
compulsory subjects and one credit hour out of three credit hours should be given for
community services (Project work).
III. Nomenclature of Degrees
A. Associate Degree [68 credit hours would be completed in two years (four semesters)].
B. B.S. Degree [124-136 credit hours would be completed in four years (eight
semesters)].
220
C. If a candidate obtains prevalent B.Sc. degree and wants to join B.S. programme, can
join in 5th semester through bridging (after attending 15 to 18 credit hours’ deficiency
courses).
D. If a candidate obtains Associate degree and wants to join B.S. programme, can join in
5th semester.
IV. Inclusion of new disciplines
A. Being maritime country the B.S. programmes should be extended to following
specializations in 7th and 8th semester to be added among the elective modules:
i. Biological Oceanography and Conservation (BOC)
ii. Chemical and Environmental Oceanography (CEO)
iii. Fisheries and Aquaculture (FA)
iv. Geological Oceanography (GO)
v. Mangrovology (Mangl)
vi. Integrated Coastal Zone Management (ICZM)
vii. Physical Oceanography (PO)
viii. Port Operations and Ship Management (POSM)
B. Field Project/ thesis/ Internship (to be reflected in transcript)
i. Field Project would be substituted by one course.
ii. Thesis would substitute two courses of two different semesters.
iii. Internship can be offered in summer/ winter vacations that would substitute
a course to be ratified by assessment report.
V. Suggestions regarding promotion of research in M.Sc./B.S. and M.Phil./M.S. programmes:
A. That the research activities should be started from M.Sc./ B.S. programme by including six
Cr.h. research as part and parcel of the programme wherein community may be involved
and their problems can be addressed.
B. That the M.Phil./M.S. programmes should be a blend of course and research work being
the intermediate phase between courses and research. Awarding M.Phil./ M.S. merely on
the basis of courses and certain CGPA is unjust as it would produce learned force having
no creativity.
C. That students involved in research work at the level of B.S./ M.Sc. should be given
preference in admitting M.S./ M.Phil. course. In that the student who have not done
research work either at the level of B.S./ M.Sc. or M.S./ M.Phil. should not be allowed to
take admission in Ph.D.
D. That the research activities need proper funding for field visits and laboratory
investigations where means of transportation, appropriate equipments and chemicals are
indispensable pre-requisites. Admission in research oriented degrees should be avoided if
such facilities are lacking.
E. That the involvement of social sector is important but it should be confined to social
science and not to pure as well as applied science. If we have to involve social sector then
it should be under Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) with the collaboration of
industries so that spirit of scientific research may not be jeopardized. There should be a
221
liaison among academia, industry and community so that research activities may focus on
future needs of country and the nation pave the way towards self reliance.
F. That the culture of scientific research should not be curbed by involving community based
interactions both in research grants and research works. Converting scientific research
into social service is a clear contravention to its doctrine.
G. That the HEC-Pakistan may write to governmental, non governmental agencies and
different stakeholders to create job opportunities for fresh graduates/ postgraduates of
marine science. The HEC should also give equivalence certificates to graduates so that they
may apply against various vacancies.
In the light of above facts the NCRC-HEC for marine science requests the HEC-Pakistan to make policies
in accordance with the Biovision Championing Agenda 2030 of UN, wherein 17 Sustainable
Development Goals (SDGs) were set in contrast to the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) for
industrialised as well as developing and emerging countries. The MDGs were not beneficial for our
country; therefore, we should follow the Biovision of SDGs.
Annexure A
GENERAL BIOLOGY (BIOL.-301)

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR THE SESSION 2015 - 2016
S. Inv.
No. Date Experiment Page Signature Formatted Table
No.
I 1 Microscope Formatted: Font: 9 pt
1. 1.1 To study and handle a compound microscope. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
2. 1.2 To calibrate a compound microscope for micrometry. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
II 2 Life forms Formatted: Font: 9 pt
3. 2.1 To introduce Phytography. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
4. 2.2 To study some plant specimens (Solanaceae & Mimosaceae).
5. 2.3 To study some algal organisms (Field study, Seaweeds).
6. 2.4 To study some animal specimens (Field study).
III 3 Plasmolysis and Deplasmolysis
7. 3.1 To study plasmolysis and deplasmolysis in plant cells.
8. 3.2 To study plasmolysis and deplasmolysis in blood cells. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
IV 4 Gram Staining Formatted: Font: 9 pt

9. 4.1 To prepare a smear of bacterial culture and staining it. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
To perform Gram staining to differentiate Gram positive and Formatted: Font: 9 pt
10. 4.2
Gram negative bacteria.
V 5 Study of Fungi
11. 5.1 To prepare slide and identify the fungus from given culture. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
VI 6 Study of Cell Division Formatted: Font: 9 pt

222
12. 6.1 To study mitosis in onion root tip. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
13. 6.2 To study meiosis in Grasshopper testis. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
VII 7 Identification of Chemical Nature of Living Organisms
14. 7.1 To determine Rf value of plant extract by chromatography.
15. 7.2 To study the phenomenon of Imbibition in plant material.
VIII 8 Biochemical Tests
16. 8.1 To test the presence of glucose in plant material.
17. 8.2 To test the presence of sucrose in plant material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
19. 8.3 To test the presence of glucose in animal material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
20. 8.4 To test the presence of sucrose in animal material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
21. 8.5 To test the presence of cellulose in plant material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
22. 8.6 To test the presence of carbohydrates in plant material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
23. 8.7 To test the presence of proteins in plant material. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
24. 8.8 To test the presence of lipids in plant material.
25. 8.9 To test the presence of carbohydrates in animal material.
26. 8.10 To test the presence of proteins in animal material.
27. 8.11 To test the presence of lipids in animal material.
Formatted: Font: 9 pt, Condensed by 0.1 pt
IX 9 Protein Digestion
28. 9.1 To demonstrate protein digestion by enzyme pepsin. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
X 10. Cytochemical Studies Formatted: Font: 9 pt

29. 10.1 To demonstrate DNA in Avian blood. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
30. 10.2 To demonstrate RNA in Avian blood. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
31. 10.3 To demonstrate DNA in Protozoa. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
32. 10.4 To demonstrate RNA in Protozoa. Formatted: Font: 9 pt
RECOMMENDATIONS Formatted: Font: 9 pt
Formatted: Font: (Default) Calibri, 11 pt, Not Bold, Font
color: Black
Formatted: Line spacing: 1.5 lines
??????????????????????????????
223
224

Criculum Marine Sciences 2016 HEC Marine-Sciences-Draft

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Criculum Marine Sciences 2016 HEC Marine-Sciences-Draft

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Criculum Marine Sciences 2016 HEC Marine-Sciences-Draft

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CURRICULUM

HIGHER EDUCATION COMMISSION

Mr. Fida Hussain Director General (Acad.))

Ms. Ghayyur Fatima Director (Curri.))

Mr. Rizwan Shoukat Deputy Director (Curri.))

Mr. Abid Wahab Assistant Director (Curri.))

Mr. Riaz-ul-Haque Assistant Director (Curri.))

University Grants Commission (UGC) was designated as the competent

In compliance with the above provisions, the Curriculum Division of HEC

In order to impart quality education, which is at par with international standards,

It is hoped that this curriculum document, prepared by the respective NCRC’s,

CURRI. CURRI. IN FINAL STAGE FOLLOW UP

COLLECTION APPRAISAL OF 1ST PREP. OF QUESTIONNAIRE

CONS. OF CRC. FINALIZATION OF INCORPORATION COMMENTS

PREP. OF APPROVAL OF PRINTING OF REVIEW

CURRI. CURRI. IN FINAL STAGE FOLLOW UP

COLLECTION APPRAISAL OF 1ST PREP. OF QUESTIONNAI

CONS. OF CRC. FINALIZATION OF INCORPORATION COMMENTS

PREP. OF APPROVAL OF PRINTING OF REVIEW

1. Prof. Dr. Rashida Qari Convener

3. Capt. Nasim Ahmad Tariq

Mr. Riaz-ul-Haque, Assistant Director (Curriculum) thanked the Convener, the

Rationale of BS in Marine Science:

The programme of BS in Marine Science is aimed at preparing graduates for a

No. of Credit Hours

 Total numbers of Courses 46 Courses Formatted Table

Total numbers of credit hours

ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION IN

* University may opt any other subject.

Semester/ Year Name of Subject Crh Formatted Table

First Semester/ First Year

MS - 404 Marine ResourcesMicrobiology 2+1 = 3

MS - 505 Marine Biodiversity 2+1 = 3

MS - 509 Marine Chemistry 2+1 = 3

MS - 511 Marine Geology 2+1 = 3

Module I Biological Oceanography and Conservation (BOC) Formatted: Condensed by 0.3 pt

MS-CEO - 610 Physical Chemistry 2+1 = 3

MS-GO - 601 Coastal and Marine Sedimentology 2+1 = 3

MS-ICZM - 601 Basic Principles and Scope of ICZM 2+1 = 3

MS-ICZM - 604 Coastal Tourism Management 2+1 = 3

Module VI Mangrovology (Mangl.) Formatted Table

MS-Mangl - 601 Benthic Ecology of Mangroves 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 607 Estuarine Studies 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 610 Mangrove Coastal Forest Management 2+1 = 3

MS-Mangl - 613 Productivity of Mangrove Wetlands 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"

MS-POSM - 601 Business Research Methodology 2+1 = 3 Formatted: Right: -0.1"

MS-POSM - 603 Marketing

MS-POSM - 607 Maritime Safety and Security 2+1 = 3

DETAIL OF COURSES FOR

To understand the principles, ethics and core attitudes related to

Objectives: Enhance language skills and develop critical thinking.

Biol-301 GENERAL BIOLOGY 2+1=3 Crh Formatted Table

The course provides wide range coverage to principles of life. Particular

Identification of the chemical nature of different animal and plant

1. Campbell, N.A., 2008. Biology. 8th Ed., The Benjamin/ Cummings

The main objective of this course is to provide a basic knowledge and

Chemical Bonding, Periodic tables. Ionic, covalent, coordinate covalent

Preparation of molar, molal, normal solutions/buffers. Osmosis and